JP7284404B2 - ball game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine having a game area from which game balls are shot.

Conventionally, among various pinball game machines, the game machine, which was called the first type pachinko game machine, has a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display"). This game machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot in which more prize balls than in a normal game can be obtained when a combination of symbols becomes a specific mode when the variation of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped. known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only are multiple symbols variably displayed, but the variable display time is usually set in a state called a so-called reach screen, in which if one more symbol is aligned, a big hit will occur. The performance is intended to increase the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectations are heightened by effects that use characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display, and advance notice effects that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

In recent years, the need to develop models that are not bound by type has been recognized in order to further improve game playability. is also being developed. In addition, when it becomes a small hit, the game ball is passed through a specific area (V zone) in the variable ball entry device to promote it from a "small hit" to a "big hit", creating a new special game (hereinafter referred to as " There is also proposed a game machine that generates a "small win development big win" or "small win V" (see Patent Document 2, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714 JP 2010-29308 A

In the ball-entering easy state in which the ball entering the second starting hole is more likely to be easily entered, a special performance designed on the assumption that the second special symbol changes based on the ball entering the second starting hole may be executed. In this case, if the first special symbol is changed based on the ball entering the first starting hole in the easy-ball-entering state, the special effect may progress in a manner not intended in terms of design.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and its main object is to prevent the performance from progressing in a manner not intended in terms of design.

In order to solve the above problems, a pinball game machine according to one aspect of the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and a predetermined position in the game area. and a second start opening having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state, and a ball entering the first start opening or a second lottery value obtained by entering the ball into the second starting port. Reservation control means for withholding the value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the pattern corresponding to the winning judgment; A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the special symbol and determining a variation pattern of the second special symbol for indicating the result according to the result of the determination based on the second lottery value; and a variation pattern determining means. A symbol display device in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed according to the determined variation pattern, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped in a manner indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit. Special game control means for executing a special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game when displayed, a performance display device for displaying performance, and performance determination for determining the performance to be displayed on the performance display device. a means; As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole is higher than in the normal state. The easy-to-enter state has a termination condition based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and a termination condition based on the number of variations of the second special symbol, and is terminated when either of the termination conditions is satisfied. There is, and the variation pattern determination means refers to a special standard, which is a standard for determining a variation pattern for executing a special effect in the easy-to-enter state and is a standard for which the number of times of reference is limited, to determine the first special The variation pattern of the symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the number of times of reference of the special reference is subtracted with the variation of the second special symbol, but is not subtracted with the variation of the first special symbol.

In addition, any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are replaced with each other between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the pinball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the presentation from progressing in an unintended manner from the design point of view.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a functional block of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main substrate; FIG. It is a figure which shows typically a right/wrong determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing range setting of winning/failing lottery values for each set value; It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination; It is a figure which shows typically the preliminary right/wrong determination table corresponding to game setting. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows typically the outline of a mobile cooperation system. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and sub-boards; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the main board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. 15; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the sub-board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. 20; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board; It is a flow chart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special design variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decorative design variation display. It is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small-hit game. 1 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of a slot machine; FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the housing door exposed when the housing door is opened; FIG. 4 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base exposed when the housing door is opened; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a main control unit and a sub control unit. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of an effect display control section; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of the main controller in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the main game flows of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a diagram showing a basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the big hit in the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows multiple types of variation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of a starting mouth unit. It is a right view of a starting port unit. It is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit. It is a figure which shows the example of chance production|presentation at the time of normal. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production|presentation during a time saving game. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. It is an external appearance perspective view which shows roughly the structure of a big prize-winning hole. It is a figure which shows roughly the internal structure of a big prize-winning hole. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation during a small-hit game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of an effect following FIG. 54; It is a figure which shows the example of a jackpot end demonstration effect. It is a time chart regarding a jackpot end demonstration effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change lottery table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change lottery table; It is a figure which shows the example of a special game end screen. It is a figure which shows the example of a trophy lottery table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a trophy lottery table of a modified example; It is a figure which shows the example of the special game end screen of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of chance production|presentation (common to a hit and a loss) in 5th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of chance production|presentation (loss) in 5th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of chance production|presentation (hit) in 5th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of chance production|presentation (per resurrection) in 5th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation screen which concerns on explanation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of special production|presentation in the 1st area of a special production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the flow of special production|presentation in the 2nd area of a special production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the pachinko game machine of 6th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a lightning strike suspension change production. It is a figure which shows the execution possible timing of a pending|holding change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of seven star holding change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a death-monger pending change production. It is a timing chart of pending change production. It is a diagram showing a lottery route of the pending change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a child lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of over winning a prize production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of an over winning effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the kind of special fluctuation pattern table.

(Prerequisite technology)
FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 to a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101 and attached to the outer frame 101 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door 104 . The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds are output according to the game state and the performance by means of controlling the performance. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the translucent interior. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc., by a means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central part of the game area 81 and its upper and right parts. 60 protection, decoration and other functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game ball that has flowed in rolls. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. Above the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven along with the content of the performance to perform a performance action. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls are installed. In this specification, "entering the ball", "winning", and "falling" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be configured as a "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass. ', 'winning', 'falling in' and 'passing' may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for entry into one of the game balls according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81 , and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11 . Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12, while right-handed. That is, if the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting hole 12, but it is impossible to enter the first starting hole 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is usually covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed each time a ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. be.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to target one of them depending on the launch strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one side is difficult to enter the other side. For example, the first starting hole 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64 . The second starting hole 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the ball to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64 .

The first starting port 11 is provided with a first starting winning detection device 16 . The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting prize detection device 17, a normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry.

The first operation opening 31 is provided at a left side position of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36 . The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when it passes. The second operation opening 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37 . The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation opening 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery for determining whether or not to spread the normal electric accessory 90 . When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, normal symbols, which are symbols indicating the determination result of the open lottery, are variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. - 特許庁Therefore, the open lottery is also called "normal symbol lottery". After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of normal symbols stops. When the normal symbol stops at a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of operating ports may be set to one, and the configuration may be such that one is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 .

The three general winning openings 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the game ball at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20 . The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 20, and generates big winning hole winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34 . In addition, as a modified example, one more large winning opening may be provided in the central lower portion of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39 . The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the central lowermost end of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A pattern display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80 . The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display portion 41, a second special symbol display portion 42, a first special symbol reservation display portion 71, a second special symbol reservation display portion 72, a normal symbol display portion 45, and a normal symbol display portion. Display units such as a holding display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display portion 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display portion 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Variations of 51 and second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second success or failure lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, an 8-segment LED consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42, or predetermined display (eg "-") and non-display (eg all lights off) are switched. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 use an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of kinds of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are combined with the lighting pattern and the lighting color. A special pattern 52 may be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of performance, in the underlying technique, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display on the lower left of the game area 81 are displayed. In the part 42, it is displayed in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative pattern by giving the special pattern itself a dramatic role, the special pattern is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to allow

Above the first special symbol display part 41, a first special symbol reservation display part 71 is provided as a suspension lamp for special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display part 42, a second special symbol display part 71 is provided. A second special symbol reservation display portion 72 is provided as a special symbol variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game of . The first special figure reservation display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game depending on the number of lights or blinking numbers (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) (also simply referred to as "holding number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the first start port 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the second start port 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The pending number of win/fail lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display portion 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120 . For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the normal symbol display state is represented by a lighting combination thereof. First, by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, the variation of the normal pattern is expressed, and finally, the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp is the stop pattern of the normal pattern. is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop pattern of losing, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first winning mode, and the first A second winning mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a normal pattern suspension display portion 75 is provided as a suspension lamp for normal symbol variation. The normal pattern reservation display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of normal pattern fluctuations reserved by the number of lights or the number of flashes. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during normal symbol fluctuations, and the number of normal symbol lotteries in which normal symbol fluctuations have not yet been executed. indicates

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77 . The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting a lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and extinguishing when the normal state. to display the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies an abnormality of a part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality with a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may be arranged individually without being collectively arranged in the pattern display unit 120, or they may be divided into a plurality of display devices grouped as appropriate. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured so as to be limited to a predetermined period of time, for example, a certain period of time after the power is restored.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative pattern 61 interlocking with the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is displayed. Display the variation of the effect image including. Such display is hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 . The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually directing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 . The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of patterns imitating a slot machine game, for example, are varied in the central area of the screen. In the base technology, symbols composed of numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and fluctuated, and winning or losing is indicated by the combinations of the three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. The pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a person or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 is switched between a case where a pattern integrally included in the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters and symbols are variably displayed according to the development of the performance. The configuration may be such that In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a performance effect related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot-matrix display device. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the game ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit", the right side passage is almost certain. A game ball can be passed through, and it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, may be combined. (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect. A performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102 . The production button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the production button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the production button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of being projected outside, and the player can grip the performance button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105 .

The game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the shooting handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one and shot to the game area 81 with the intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotating position of the shooting handle 107, the shooting of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center ornament 64, etc., and falls in a direction according to how it hits. When the game ball falls into each of the winning openings of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening enter the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. The balls are paid out to the ball tray 106 . A game ball falling into each winning hole such as a general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball falling into an out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The ejection of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the specification may be such that the safe balls are guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all of the ejections are detected by the out detection device 39. may be Alternatively, guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may not be performed, and the number of discharged balls may be determined by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display part 45, and is stop-displayed after the lapse of the variability display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbols are stop-displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped-displayed symbols and the game state when they are stopped. . That is, when the game state when the symbols are stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Further, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbols are displayed in the second winning mode during the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 . Here, the winning probability of normal symbols and the execution probability of long opening are set differently depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal pattern wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning pattern of the first winning mode is selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (the probability of selecting the winning pattern of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability between the first win mode and the second win mode is the same as in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if the lottery is won in any mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal pattern (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (0 when the opening time is displayed stopped in the first winning mode) 0.1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. In addition, the function (long opening) of extending the operation period of the normal electric accessory 90 may be called "open extension".

In addition, as described above, the probability of long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of short opening, so that the long opening is executed at a certain rate even in the normal state when winning the normal pattern. . As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening. good. Further, in the ball-entering easy state, it is possible to increase the ease of ball-entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of normal symbols. In that case, the variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or may be notified before the start of the normal pattern variation by reading in advance the suspension of the normal symbol variation, or the normal symbol variation may be notified. Notification may be made during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the open time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former is the one who enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening matches the hitting direction with the second starting port 12 from that point. The chances are long. In addition, it is possible to configure such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism differs according to the winning types. For example, when the normal pattern is the first win, the normal state is 0.1 second open once, and the ball easy state is 1 second open three times. In this case, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds, and in the easy-to-ball state, the open for 2 seconds may be opened twice.

On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60. , and the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the start to stop of variation is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a variability performance pattern in which a variability mode from the start to stop of the variability is determined. Plural kinds of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared respectively, and each of them has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative design 61 is variably displayed according to the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation display time is set for each pattern as a condition for ending the pattern fluctuation, and when the fluctuation display time elapses, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 change. be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. In addition, details such as a method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the symbols in all three rows are changed like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one, thereby finally stopping. Display the symbol combination as. Incidentally, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbols 190 is stopped, it is possible to control not to stop one row at a time but to stop a plurality of rows at the same time so that the attention is paid to the performance display other than the decorative symbols during the variable display, or in a shorter variation time. You may enable it to display a design variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of variation of a part of the rows according to the subsequent development of the variation (type of production pattern, etc.), so as to produce a sense of expectation. can be

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable performance pattern includes a normal out of reach performance pattern, out of reach performance pattern, and reach big hit performance pattern. The normal outlier effect pattern is a effect pattern when displaying a normal outlier pattern combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when a combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed through a ready-to-win state in which a big win is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The ready-to-win big-hit production pattern is a production pattern when a big-hit symbol combination is displayed through the ready-to-win state. In particular, the reach state pattern includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ”. The usual out-of-ordinary performance pattern, the out-of-reach performance pattern, and the ready-to-win big hit performance pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern variation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will change and the number of unit games of the special game will increase. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a chance for a relatively advantageous big win to occur. In addition, although the pattern for time saving is used in a time saving state by a premise technology, since it accompanies time saving in a probability variable state, the pattern for time saving is used also in a probability variable state. However, in the modified example, it may be a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation that is different from that for time saving in the probability variation state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation, or a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation in a probability variation state without using a pattern for time saving.

When the number of winning lotteries held reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of losing is shortened (hereinafter also referred to as "shortening variation") in order to improve the game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries is 4, the pattern variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "ultra-shortened variation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stop come to a stop mode indicating a big hit after the above-described symbol fluctuation, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started. The mode of stopping the decorative symbols 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a mode of combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a big difference in the profit from winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls fall, it is temporarily closed. The operation from opening to closing of such a large prize winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where multiple short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the big winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 16 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying a performance screen called end demo time. In normal special games, 9 or more balls can be sufficiently expected to be entered per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as ``discharged balls'') can be obtained by 16 unit games, resulting in a large profit. is obtained. A special game in which the unit game is repeated 16 times is also called "16R big win", and a special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is called "4R big win". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot") similar to the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost short (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the big winning opening 20 is opened only for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice and the shortened special game is ended. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the big winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short period of time, almost no ball can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls that come out is substantially equal to zero in the special game. be. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also called a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, a shortened special game can be realized by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Further, after the above-described pattern fluctuation, when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stop are in a predetermined small hit mode, a small hit game composed of one unit game , and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small winning game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big winning.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop pattern at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), a probability variation, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability variation, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the determination result of the win/fail lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and may be in a latent probability change state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, it is not clearly indicated on the effect display device 60 whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation even during the probability variation. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect display device 60 may indicate whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation.

An easy ball entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started in the normal game after the special game ends. In the ball-entering easy state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessary 90.例文帳に追加Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed period of time can be increased and the ease with which a ball enters the second starting port 12 also increases, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will also increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning prize balls by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls in possession or gradually increasing the number of balls in possession.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened more than in the normal state, so-called time saving. The fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after the predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 times of fluctuation display, is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time saving will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is shortened in the reduction of working hours, compared with the case of the normal state in which the pattern is changed with the normal fluctuation time, it is possible to wait until the big hit occurs. time can be shortened, and the easiness of obtaining a big win can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it may be a specification that does not implement the time saving of the special symbol in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and processes overall game operations such as a lottery when the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are won. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents in the effect display device 60 , and particularly changes the effect display contents according to the determination result by the main board 200 . The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning to each prize winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154 . The shooting device 156 shoots the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. A firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the launcher 156 . The power board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . A performance display section 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200 . The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number that indicates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to any one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set value. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch for shifting to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") and a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to turn it on. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172 . The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , it becomes a playable state. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display portion 173 . In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state to turn it off, the game becomes ready for play. When the setting key is turned off to enable a game, the setting display section 173 is turned off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is off, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159 . In this case, the combined display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the change of game settings may be disabled.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described. For the part already described as , the term may be used as it is for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 includes a power board 158 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling launch of game balls to the game area, and controlling the performance operations and processes. It is configured in a form in which the function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-controller.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the output port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200 , the firing control board 157 and the payout device 154 . The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 on the basis of the prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, etc., and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. , and the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. Dispensing device 154 includes dispensing motor 166 and ball counting sensor 167 . The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and controls the ball feeding device 164 and the ball feeding device 164 based on a firing permission signal or the like transmitted from the payout control board 155. A device 156 is controlled to shoot a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes the effect display device 60, the movable accessories 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111 and the electrical and transmit and receive various control signals to and from each other.

The main board 200 and the sub-board 300 are configured so that data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional, and each configuration for realizing the entire operation by data transmission/reception in one direction is unidirectional. It is arranged on the sub-board 300 . Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main substrate 200 to the sub substrate 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub substrate 300 to the configuration included in the main substrate 200. I can't even ask. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 , and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157 , data transmission/reception is performed bidirectionally. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data can be sent and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. A configuration for data transmission/reception may be employed.

Each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300, which will be described below, is merely an example. may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Also, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main substrate 200. As shown in FIG. The main board 200 includes an entering ball determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal figure lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small winning game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening and closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial process execution means 280, main power interruption process execution means 282, It comprises main error detection means 284 , setting change means 286 , setting confirmation means 287 and command communication means 205 .

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The entering ball determining means 201 determines entering of a game ball into each winning hole. The ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11 when receiving the first start winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second start winning information. to decide. A ball entry judging means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the big winning slot 20 when receiving the big winning slot winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 33 when receiving the general winning slot information. The entering ball determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 when passing information is received. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 when receiving the discharge information. The entered ball determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display section 159 . The ball-entering determination means 201 determines "number of balls to be paid out"/"total number of balls to be launched"×100 when the probability of winning a big hit is normal probability state and normal ball-entering state (so-called low probability and low ball-entering state). is displayed on the performance display unit 159 . Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random Number Generation Means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various decisions in the first lottery means 211 , the second lottery means 212 and the normal pattern lottery means 213 . Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number (also referred to as a "lottery value") used in the lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery determination means 222. A range of random numbers is generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 selects from "0" to "255" as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in design determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. A random number in the range of up to is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 uses "0" to "255 ” is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates a random number in the range from "0" to "99" as a random number to be used in the success/failure lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. In addition, "random number" here refers to physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, and pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using random number generation algorithms. It's okay. Alternatively, random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. The random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means. .

<Universal drawing lottery means 213>
The normal pattern lottery means 213 generates a random number used for the lottery of the normal pattern and the random number used for determining the stop pattern of the normal pattern when the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. 202 to execute a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. holding a table and The correspondence relationship between the lottery value for win/fail lottery and the hit is defined in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol determination table. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. The normal pattern lottery means 213 determines the stop pattern of the normal pattern with reference to the normal pattern determination table when the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern corresponds to the hit, and the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern is determined. If it falls under the deviation, always determine the aspect of the 1 deviation symbol. If the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is a win, and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, determines the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 which will be described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined upper limit number reserved by the reservation control means 240 .

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game. A means 231 is included, and a first win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second propriety determination means 222, a second pattern determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning lottery is executed as a winning lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212 , the second special symbol 52 is displayed in the second special symbol display section 42 by the main display control means 250 . Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG.

<First Lottery Value Obtaining Means 216 and Second Lottery Value Obtaining Means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Specifically, the first success/failure lottery value for success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern A first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquiring means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generating means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . Specifically, the second success or failure lottery value for success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern A second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means.

The first success/failure determination means 221 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success/failure lottery value. The second success/failure determination means 222 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the second success/failure lottery value. In the success/failure determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating transition to a special game, "small hit" indicating transition to a small hit game, " It is determined whether it corresponds to "out of". The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 hold a right/wrong judgment table referred to in the right/wrong judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the success/failure determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation from the prior success/failure determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "the success/failure determination as the main determination". In this specification, when the term "table" or "selection criteria" is used, the relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined in the table structure. It not only refers to data, but also broadly includes implementation by a program structure that derives a second parameter from one or a plurality of first parameters as such a correspondence relationship. The concept including them is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

The first right/wrong determination means 221 and the second right/wrong determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective right/wrong determinations as right/wrong determination tables referred to in the right/wrong determination. Specifically, a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 (also referred to as a "first right/wrong determination table") and a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 ("second (also referred to as "validity judgment table") is held, and a table to be referred to is selected according to the validity judgment to be executed. Judgment results of big hits, small wins, and misses are associated with winning/failing lottery values in a plurality of winning/failing determination tables, and winning/failing probabilities are determined according to the range setting of the associated big wins. In addition, a plurality of types of win/fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small win, and a loss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a winning/failure determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a propriety determination table. This figure shows a win-or-fail judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win-or-fail judgment table corresponding to setting 6. FIG. In the hit/fail determination table of this figure, the determination results of big wins, small wins, and misses are associated with the win/fail lottery values. is determined. The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 refer to the right/wrong judgment table of this figure in the right/wrong judgment as the main judgment. In both of the first success/failure lottery by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure lottery by the second success/failure determination means 222, a big win is usually made only when the success/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0-299. When the odds are variable, the range of big wins is expanded, and the big wins occur not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-299, but also when it falls within the range of 300-2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In the base technology, even if the win/fail lottery value does not fall within the big win range, it will be a small win if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example of this figure, if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it becomes a small hit, and the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first win/fail lottery has a wider range of small wins than the second win/fail lottery, and the small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, when it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "missing", but in the example of this figure, the winning or not lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit among the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit is especially expressed as "outside". In other words, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "whether it is a big hit or not", "minor win" may be included in the broad sense of "loss" in the sense of "not a big hit". Further, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "minor win" and "big win" may be included in the broad definition of "hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the determination table for whether or not the big hit is made and the determination table for whether or not the small win is made are realized in the form of a single winning or not judgment table. good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning lottery value for each set value. FIG. 1(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determination means 221 and the win/fail determination result. FIG. 2(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determination means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit at normal time and probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " 0 to 296 if the set value is "3", 0 to 297 if the set value is "4", 0 to 298 if the set value is "5", and 0 to 299 if the set value is "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a big win in the normal time, and the probability of winning a big win in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit only at the time of probability change (that is, the loss in normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959 if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", and if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, the greater the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a big win at the time of variable probability, and the higher the probability of winning a big win at the time of variable probability. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal big win probability of winning a big win in a normal time and the big winning probability of winning a big win in a variable probability is constant irrespective of the set value. In this figure, the range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the variable probability jackpot probability is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values "1" to "6". . In addition, the range of win/fail lottery values is determined so that the probability of winning a small win is constant regardless of the set value. In all set values "1" to "6", if the range of the first winning lottery value falls within 56500 to 65535, it will be a small hit, and if the range of the second winning lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535, it will be a small hit. It hits. The range of win/fail lottery values outside the range of a big win or a small win is "off". In this figure, the big win probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/fail judgment result may be determined so that the big win probability is the same for different set values.

<First Symbol Determination Means 226 and Second Symbol Determination Means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol fluctuation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning/losing determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the results of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination results. A first win/fail determination means 221 holds a first pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to when winning big, a first symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a first symbol determination table for loss to be referred to when losing. A second win/fail determination means 222 holds a second pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referred to for misses. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination to be executed when the symbol variation is started from the prior symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately called "symbol determination as the final determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a miss, and FIG. 7(c) is a This is a table to be referred to when the result of winning/failure determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of big wins, small wins, and misses, respectively. "10" corresponds to an out. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combining segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a big hit and probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R jackpot with a probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with “0 to 99” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and “0 to 99” in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "real 4R hit") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first design lottery value, and in the case of the second design lottery value It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with variable probability, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 16R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot. Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and whether or not there is a change in probability thereafter) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special patterns, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special patterns, it is possible to increase the number of types of patterns and increase the number of jackpots. You can set less types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into a larger number of types of jackpots corresponding to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined so as to correspond to each of the types of special symbols selected in the first lottery and the types of special symbols selected in the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of the probability change to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value of the entire range when the winning/losing determination result is out. Therefore, it is decided that the same special symbol should always be stop-displayed in the case of being out. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of being out.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In the base technology, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table also in prior symbol determination in order to save the storage area in the main board 200 . The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination, indicating that the value is the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending. As the pre-symbol determination table, a table that is further subdivided so that a complicated determination can be performed, or a table that summarizes and simplifies the determination range of the jackpot symbols for executing a similar special game may be used. . In addition, when the pattern is uniformly determined at the time of loss as in the underlying technology, a specific pattern is determined without referring to the acquired pattern lottery value and without preparing a pattern determination table for the time of loss. You may

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 obtains from the random number generating means 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination means 232 uses the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 as the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on this, it is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main substrate 200 include a variation pattern table to be referred to in order to determine the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a start port. Each holds or shares a pre-pattern determination table used to generate information for determination of execution of look-ahead processing at the time of ball entry. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type. That is, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is substantially determined for each pattern as a termination condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. is stopped from changing. Incidentally, the variation pattern determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative design to be described later, it may be defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table of this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of this figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the success/failure determination result is out of the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select the "normal 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" and "no reach out" are selected. As "no reach out", different variation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0 to 2, 7 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 3, number of holds is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which five types are mainly classified according to the variation time will be described. A plurality of variation performance patterns are prepared for each variation pattern on the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation performance patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No Reach Out" also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" narrows, and the lottery value of "no reach out" Wider range. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the probability that the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

If the success/failure determination result is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, it selects "Super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6". If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal 2”.

In the normal state, when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, it selects "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) is It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is the lottery or the second lottery, and the number of pending lotteries. In the configuration shown in FIG. 8, the preliminary pattern determination is exemplified so as to have a table for each success/failure determination result. It is also possible to derive only information about whether or not it is positioned within the range, and control may be performed on the control means side of the sub-board 300 so as to determine what kind of variation is to be performed together with the preliminary suitability determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as in FIG. "No reach out, shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the "no reach out" in FIG. 8(a). "Reach without reach shortening" also selects a different variation pattern depending on the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0, 1, 1 second variation pattern when the number of holds is 2 to 4 are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is given priority over the first lottery, the ball-entering state is easy due to the time saving. A situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time (for example, 10 seconds) fluctuation pattern that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations is referred to. You can do it.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4 , the reservation control means 240 includes a special figure reservation means 241 and a normal figure reservation means 242 . When the special figure holding means 241 newly acquires the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value, the symbol variation corresponding to the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value acquired before that. is displayed, the start of pattern variation corresponding to the newly obtained first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is suspended, and the win/fail lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding pattern. Here, for the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, and the first success or failure lottery value, the first pattern lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored. A second lottery value, a second pattern lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern lottery value acquired by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The numbers of these reservations are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure reservation display portion 71, the second special figure reservation display portion 72, and the normal figure reservation display portion 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

The lottery value of the second success/failure lottery retained in the special figure retention means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first success/failure lottery, and the pattern variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big win lottery value is reserved as the first win/fail lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery, the pattern variation corresponding to the big win lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big win is reserved in the first win/fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big wins can be obtained by continuing to beat until the big win is held in the second win/fail lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 , a second special figure control means 252 and a general figure control means 254 . The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first winning lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special figure control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win-or-fail lottery or the second win-or-fail lottery made before is completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special figure control means 252 also makes the completion of the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery performed before that a new symbol variation start condition.

The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure lottery when the success/failure lottery value of the second success/failure lottery is stored by the special figure retention means 241.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success or failure lottery regardless of whether or not the success or failure lottery value of the first success or failure lottery is stored by the special figure reservation means 241.例文帳に追加Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the pattern variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value reserved in the first success/failure lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second success/failure lottery becomes zero, and the symbol variation does not start.

The 1st special figure control means 251 and the 2nd special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the variable display of the 1st special symbol 51 and the 2nd special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. The normal pattern control means 254 causes the normal pattern display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as the fluctuation display of the normal pattern.

<Special Figure Adjustment Means 276>
The special figure adjustment means 276 waits the start of the other variation display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 is the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special pattern 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

In addition, the special figure adjustment means 276 in the modified example changes the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display fluctuates in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the success or failure lottery value. Which special symbol should be varied is determined according to the order of entry of the game balls, that is, the order of retention of the winning lottery value in the retention control means 240, so the player can easily grasp the order of variation visually.

Even if the special figure adjustment means 276 in another modification displays the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 . For example, when both the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Which special symbol should be varied is simply alternated regardless of the order of game ball entry, so the player can intuitively grasp the order of variation.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special figure adjusting means 276 waits for the other to start the variable display. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols is not started while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The prior determination means 235 includes a first lottery prior determination means 236 and a second lottery prior determination means 237 . First lottery pre-determination means 236 includes various random numbers acquired by first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various determinations by first success/failure determination means 221, first symbol determination means 226, and first variation pattern determination means 231 Before the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol control means 251 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the second lottery value acquisition means 217 various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before executing various determinations by the second success/failure determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 Before the start of the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 by using the information about the variation is determined in advance.

The first lottery prior determination means 236 uses the first prior lottery lottery value determination table, the first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and the first prior variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for prior determination of the first lottery means 211. hold the table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information about the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub board 300 by command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination. The first lottery prior determination means 236 (preliminary success/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the preliminary suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary determination regarding the first game) is performed by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is the first lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, and the like.

The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success/failure determination for the second game) refers to the second prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. If the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary suitability determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64000 to 65535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second preliminary variation pattern random value judgment table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern judgment result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-determination of whether or not the second game is appropriate) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. (Indicating that it is a second lottery), information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of 4, similarly to the number of reserved storages. It should be noted that the pre-determination result may be stored using the reservation storage area that the reservation control means 240 stores. The information may be erased based on transmission of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for preliminary determination, the determination table for main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. A part or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing this table with other determination tables, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main board 200 . It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of acceptance or rejection, for example. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 without being judged by the advance judgment means 235, and the sub-board 300 may be configured to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The prior determination means 235 may refer to a prior success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the success/failure lottery value and the prior success/failure determination result differs according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170 . As with the win/loss determination table described above, a plurality of types of pre-win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set values of the game settings. In addition, a pre-win/fail lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-determined by a combination of the set value of the game settings and the value of the pre-win/fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior success/failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 4(a) is a prior determination table referred to by the first lottery prior determination means 236, and FIG. 4(b) is a prior determination table referred to by the second lottery prior determination means 237. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the result of the prior win/fail determination is "11", indicating that all the settings 1 to 6 will result in a big win. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the result of prior win/loss determination is "12", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 2 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the result of prior win/loss determination is "13", which indicates that a big hit is achieved with the normal setting of 3 or more or with all the settings during the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "14", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the result of prior win/fail determination is "15", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the result of prior win/loss determination is "16", which indicates that a big hit is achieved with the normal setting of 6 or all the settings during the variable probability. In addition, when the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "21", indicating that all the settings at the time of probability change will result in a big win. If the win/loss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the result of prior win/loss determination is "22", indicating that a big hit is achieved at the setting of 2 or higher at the time of variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the prior win/loss judgment result is "23", which indicates that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 3 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the result of prior win/loss determination is "23", indicating that a big hit is achieved when the odds are set to 4 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior win/loss determination result is "25", indicating that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 5 or more. When the win/loss lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the prior win/loss determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability variation will result in a big hit. Furthermore, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary judgment result is " 30”, indicating that it will be a small hit in all settings. Also, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the advance judgment result is " 40”, indicating that it is out in all settings. By using such a prior success/failure determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate prior success/failure determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. A special game is executed by determining that a condition is met and opening the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in indicating the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. A special game is executed by determining that a special game operating condition is satisfied and opening a big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening 20 is continued a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 16 times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated twice. The 16R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 16R big win and 4R big win, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the big prize opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. Even in the case of a 2R big win, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big winning opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 16R big win and 4R big win.

<Small hit game control means 265>
A small winning game control means 265 operates a small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. A small winning game is executed by judging that the conditions are established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, when the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 controls the small hit when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small win mode. A small winning game is executed by determining that a winning game operation condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning hole 20 for only about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big winning hole 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the ball easy state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state and an easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special pattern is a pattern of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to a variable probability. The variable probability state, the time saving state and the easy ball entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally shortened. do. However, in a normal state, reference is made to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of retentions of the lottery value by the retention control means 240, and as the number of retentions by the retention control means 240 decreases, a variation pattern with a longer variation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, both the probability variation of normal symbols and the opening extension of the second starting port 12, or only the opening extension of the second starting port 12 are performed. That is, the specific game control means 270 makes the second starting port 12 open extended state when the specific jackpot is obtained, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. It shifts to a probability variable state higher than the normal probability state. During the variable probability state, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20 . The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 when the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short or long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second start port 12 with a long opening time in the easy-to-enter state. 2 Open the starting port 12 . The ease of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 is enhanced so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning gate solenoid 92 to open the big winning gate 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution unit 280, main power failure processing execution unit 282, main error detection unit 284>
The main initial process execution means 280 executes a control start process for the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The main power-off process executing means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the main substrate 200 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200 . The control start process, the abnormality handling process, and the abnormality detection process of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Changing Means 286, Setting Confirming Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state described above. The setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is changed to the setting change state. The setting change unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . , the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173 . When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state described above. The setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing a lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. In addition, the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173 when numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub-controller that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control and the like to the sub-board 300. A command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the judgment of the entering ball into each winning hole by the entering ball judging means 201 . Sends a command that indicates the status of an error that occurred in The sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command when starting the symbol variation.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 varies at the timing when the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. Also, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303 . After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display corresponding to the lottery starts immediately, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start opening 11, second start opening It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the type information of the port 12), the information of the number of reservations, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, on the side of the sub-board 300, it is possible to speculatively recognize the result of winning or losing before the turn of starting the symbol variation, based on the received preliminary determination result, so-called "prefetching" is realized. Processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. Sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by special game control means 260 information on the special game, information on the small winning game by small winning game control means 265, information on the lottery result by normal figure lottery means 213, setting change means 286 setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300 . Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits various kinds of control in the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial process executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284, information on errors, and the like. information about various signals and the like to be sent to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes pattern mode determination means 301, pattern storage means 302, effect determination means 303, effect control means 304, timer means 307, effect setting means 308, sub initial process execution means 360, sub power interruption process execution means 362, A sub-error detecting means 364 , a command receiving means 370 , and a sub-side prior determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of production patterns in which the content of the production image to be displayed on the production display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 is changed. The performance patterns include a plurality of variable performance patterns in which the variation process from start to stop of variation in the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 and the performance process are determined, and the degree of expectation for the big win displayed separately from the variable display of the decorative pattern. and a plurality of forewarning effect patterns that foretell the height of the variable display before stopping.

Command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from command communication means 205 , and sub-side prior determination means 371 holds the prior determination results transmitted from command communication means 205 . The effect determination means 303 includes normal effect determination means 373 and prefetch effect determination means 374 . The normal effect determination means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker 108, decides the content of the presentation to be output to the decoration lamp 111 and the like. The effect determination means 303 determines the content of effect according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and is selected from among a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. Either one is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302 . The normal effect determination means 373 sends the information of the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304 . The normal effect determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that there may be a case where the variable effect pattern is determined by the normal effect determining means 373 with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the contents of the prefetch effect determined by the prefetch effect determining means 374 are varied. A production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the prior determination result from the command communication means 205, the past prior determination result and game state information held in the sub-board 300, and determines the determination result. Based on the results obtained, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before this determination, and the execution details are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the prior determination result prior to the prior determination result received this time. determine whether or not to Based on the judgment result, it identifies the result of this judgment related to the pre-judgment result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution content of the pre-reading effect based on the specific result. . Note that the effect determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other.

In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of the effect image having the same variable time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols 61 based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the variation performance pattern of the design. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304 . The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three patterns. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 indicates a shift to a 4R big hit or a 16R big hit special game. , a specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. A specific combination such as "357" is also selected when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations of three symbols. It doesn't have to be. If the result of the judgment is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination of three patterns such as "312" or "946" that does not match, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R big hit or a small hit. Non-applicable combinations are selected. If the hit/fail judgment result is not a 4R or 16R jackpot, and if a variation pattern that indicates an outlier with a reach is selected, a combination that does not have a single symbol such as "191" or "727" to select.

The variation display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the performance process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation is defined in the variable performance pattern of the decorative symbols. The variable effect patterns include a pattern for displaying a normal winning pattern, a pattern for displaying a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state in which one more pattern is aligned, and a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state. Contains patterns for when In particular, the pattern when passing through the reach state includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. A performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols having the same variation time as the special symbols according to the variation pattern of the special symbols.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 determines the variation for which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for time saving is an effect in which a background image or sound is output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is a effect pattern for temporarily displaying a specific character or motif image, animation, video, or the like, a effect pattern for moving a character, or a effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The performance by the foretelling performance pattern is executed in parallel with the pattern variation, and preliminarily suggests that the degree of expectation that the pattern variation is stopped in a jackpot mode is high. For example, there is a normal announcement effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group announcement effect in which a group of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, a step-up notice performance is further included in which the display process of the notice performance is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (post-reach notice) for predicting the final stop state of the pattern by executing the effect at the timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern 61. There is also a pattern (prior notice before reach) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not always stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the preliminary performance on the performance display device 60 according to the determination result of the success or failure lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preliminary lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and should display it. To decide a notice performance pattern. A performance determining means 303 holds a preliminary announcement determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the preliminary performance, and a preliminary announcement type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of the preliminary performance pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the success or failure lottery or the result of advance judgment, and the advance notice effect is displayed at a higher probability when the lottery is successful than when the lottery is lost. As described above, the correspondence relationship between the determination result of the win/fail lottery and whether or not to display the advance notice effect is determined. Thus, the display of the advance notice effect itself can suggest a high degree of expectation for the big win.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of the new decorative pattern. When the effect determining means 303 determines to display the advance notice effect, the effect control means 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation. Let

A performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery when the win/fail lottery value of the second win/fail lottery is stored, and whether the win/fail lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is stored. The symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery is started regardless of whether or not. As a result, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes 0, and the decorative design does not start to change. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61. - 特許庁

The performance control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66 . The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305 , sound control means 306 and lamp control means 309 . Effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60 , and sound control means 306 controls sound output from the speaker 108 . The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decoration lamp 111 .

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is varying. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, is regarded as the main performance content in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the pattern is fluctuating by variably displaying the substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller in size than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and the normal decorative pattern It is displayed in a more simplified variation process than The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

A plurality of substitute patterns displayed in place of a plurality of normal decorative patterns suggest a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be in an advantageous state for the player due to the combination of stop modes at the end of variation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggest that the likelihood of a big win in the variation is high when two of the three alternative symbols are in a ready-to-win state. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state are “3” and “7”, which indicate that the expectations are relatively high, and the expectations are “1” and “2”. The degree of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a pattern of a type that suggests a relatively low degree. It should be noted that the alternative pattern does not appear to be in a definite stop state, but is in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the display periods may overlap instead of exclusively displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the variable alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative design, the special design is fluctuating in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 while the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 are changing, with an image that is about the same as or smaller than the alternative design. A simple symbol suggesting that there is something may be variably displayed. The simple design may consist of a variable display of a combination of three patterns in the same way as the normal decorative design, or may consist of a variable display of a single design, or may be a simple symbol ("O", "X", etc.). may be configured in such a manner that they are sequentially switched. The simple design is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative design or alternative design, it displays a constant variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special design, and when it is stopped, it is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative design. may be displayed as It should be noted that the simple symbols may be changed as long as the indication that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbols are reported at least, and the simple symbols may be displayed in a combination of two symbols or the like. In addition, the simple design may also be called "sub-decorative design", "sub-design", "mini-decorative design", "mini-design", and the like. Aside from the effect display device 60, variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern that shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern by means of a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) in the event that a problem occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth pattern, the LED lights up in sequence as "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Alternatively, the variable display may be suggested by blinking in a single color according to the type of the special pattern, and the luminescence color when stopped display may suggest the type of loss or big hit.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for games. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that incorporates a battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or during a power failure may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that slight differences may occur in the time of each game machine due to individual differences or time lags. is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the pattern fluctuation and the game state. The synchronization performance period lasts for several minutes, and its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronizing effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music piece and video is determined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

Synchronization performance is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or during a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, the "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and (2) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are not displayed in variable display and the standby demo screen is not displayed. , and (3) ``Normal game during display of standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the variable display of symbols. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for control such as volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). can be different from when Also, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The synchronization effect is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined musical piece or video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "synchronization effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be the time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from the time the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time on the hour or half past the hour based on the standard time. may be Alternatively, times may be set that may vary depending on the date or day of the week, not at regular intervals such as "every hour", but at different intervals such as one hour later, then three hours later, and so on. Intervals may vary by date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be designated by a game clerk for each game parlor. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival of a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are powered on at the same time in an amusement arcade. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronizing effect is executed on the plurality of game machines all at once. As a result, the performance is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same music and images are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect with a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect is obtained.

The function of synchronized performance is similarly built in other game machines of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously turned on by the game clerk every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronization performance start time almost at the same time, so that the synchronization performance can be executed all at once. This is called multi-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized across multiple units, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized across multiple units. increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of effect results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the number of balls that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability variations, and the number of time reductions. Unlike game profits, the history of performance results is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance and the right to make it easier for specific types of performance to appear. It is information such as the score of For example, in order to convert the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, etc. into a score and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the mobile terminal of the player via the two-dimensional code will be described later. It should be noted that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items increases.

Effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, a pattern storage means 302 prepares a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters and music to be displayed as performance patterns to be displayed during special games, and the player is allowed to select which performance to display. It is assumed that Alternatively, a plurality of kinds of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting means 308 selects the contents of the selection. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308. - 特許庁

The sub-initial processing executing means 360 executes control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored. The sub-power-off process executing means 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300 . When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power interruption, the sub power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player is registered as a user by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 causes the screen of the performance display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 encoded with the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. - 特許庁Character information (also referred to as "password information") in which the player's identification information and performance score history are coded from the dedicated site is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through button operation such as the cross key 110 . The performance setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the identification information of the player and the performance score history, so that the player's previous game contents and performance score state can be handed over. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko game machine 100, with the progress of the game and the performance, the performance setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as a profit in the performance at any time and accumulates it as a performance score history, and the player , it is possible to carry out production customization at any time and select and set favorite elements as various production elements. Scoring in performance is basically added for each pattern variation, and a higher score is given to a performance type with a higher degree of expectation for shift to a special game, and a higher score is given when shifting to a special game.

As effect customization, the player utilizes a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and according to the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that constitute the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 are changed. You can change production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable production element, and a different value is set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance is given to increase the customizable items. When a player operates a button to instruct the end of a game or performance customization, a performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and controls the performance display. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60 . The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354 . Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to a game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via transmission means such as display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. It is possible to take over the contents of the game and production in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increase, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. As shown in FIG. The main substrate 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292, and the like. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 , and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A ball entry signal from each ball entrance and a payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the lottery, the determination result of the pattern, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a two-byte configuration consisting of a combination of one-byte command type data called MODE data and one-byte command content data called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300 . The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 requires two transmissions of 1 byte each to transmit 2-byte command data due to the specification of transmitting 1-byte data per data transmission. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main circuit board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the sub circuit board 300 reads the same data twice in a row, the completion of transmission and reception of the data is confirmed. . The main substrate 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in succession, and transmits it up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining a effect process and display pattern data defining a effect display process. A sub-control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the performance pattern data, and outputs the display. , voice output, lighting of lamps, and performances by character actions. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and sound pattern data to effect control device 313 . In the base technology, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but are separated and connected to each other. It may also be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 , a display control circuit 326 and an audio control circuit 314 . The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding raw material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as a effect object indicating the result of winning or failing lottery determination. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and characters' words that are output during the presentation.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read out from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display is performed using the effect image data and motion data. is executed by the control CPU 320 . As a result, a command, effect image data, and motion data relating to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits commands and audio data relating to audio output to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332 , a drawing memory 334 , a drawing circuit 336 , a frame buffer 338 and a display circuit 340 , each connected via a bus 330 . For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure generically represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332 . The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60 .

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 . At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "general display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, in the general display pattern data, a rough flow of a series of effect display processes is defined, such as the start and stop timing of variation of decorative patterns, the order of reproduction of a plurality of moving images, and the timing of start and stop of reproduction. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order for each frame to display moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the process from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other. ”. For example, when the effect control means performs specific processing based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, even if the display pattern data is not divided into the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324, good.

In the base technology, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 and a display control circuit 326 . In a modification, control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320 , the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324 . For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is supposed to be performed by the decoder 332 , the drawing circuit 336 and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326 . Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338 . In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the display control circuit 326 in the effect control device 313, in this case, the processing to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU320, the control RAM322 or the data ROM324 may be

Further, in the base technology, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes the sub-CPU 310 , the sub-RAM 311 and the sub-ROM 312 as well as the effect control device 313 . In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU310, the sub RAM311 or the sub ROM312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320 , the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322 , and the sub ROM 312 may function as the data ROM 324 . In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. may

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process executing means 280 . When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as settings of built-in registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y of S122), setting change processing is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N of S122), setting confirmation processing is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is OFF (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Subsequently, according to the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power interruption information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power interruption recovery process is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power interruption information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N of S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the process was completed normally when the power was turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. The data in the main RAM 291 are inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 are not normal (N of S112), the data in the main RAM 291 are initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y of S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initialization of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Next, it clears the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off, and requests the command transmission of various information indicating the game state. Subsequently, a performance command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big prize winning port 20 are restored to the states before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) ends, a count value is set to start an interrupt process, which will be described later, and an interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) thereafter, and interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the setting change state is entered (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden to make the setting values invisible (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N of S160), the processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y of S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. to make the set value invisible (S162), and return.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate 158, the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off memory. In the process, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the power-off process. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. When the value of the power interruption confirmation flag does not match the power interruption confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, An initial value random number update process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is disabled (S202-S208), the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed after the timer interrupt is enabled in S210.

When power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the contents of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data was not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, when the power is turned on next time, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the loop continues until the power is turned off. Note that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 .

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operating condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd start port effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), Abnormality detection processing (S336), Ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), Game state display processing (S340), Handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), Launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch attached to the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal are monitored. , data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291 . The data indicating this input state consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt, and input port data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch for which switching is observed by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value of each random number, the maximum value, and the initial value are read out from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. Also, when the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is completed. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to zero. A similar process is performed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting opening valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting opening 12 is set. A normal electric accessory 90 is arranged in the second starting port 12 as a base technology, and an effective period during which prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball and a lottery related to a second special symbol is executed, An invalid period is set in which the payout of prize balls and the lottery relating to the second special symbol are not executed even if the game ball enters. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, so the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the big winning opening 20, the first working opening 31, the second working opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "ordinary electric accessary product in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is valid is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. When the state of the normal symbol is not "ordinary electric accessory in operation", the second start for timing the effective period for detecting the residual ball inside the normal electric accessory 90 entered just before the operation of the normal electric accessory is finished. If the value of the effective extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is valid is stored in the second starting opening effective period flag, and the value of the second starting opening effective extension timer is 0. If there is, data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port effective period flag. In addition, as a modification, the normal electric accessory 90 may be provided in a winning opening other than the second starting opening 12. In that case, the second starting opening valid period setting process and the It is configured to have valid period setting processing, which is equivalent processing.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), it is checked whether the game ball has passed through the switch. If so, update the win counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation opening 31 and the second operation opening 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32. Then, if the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number relating to normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291 .

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, the process relating to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal design is "normal design fluctuation", normal design fluctuation process is executed, and when it is "normal design stop design display", normal design stop design display process is executed, "normal electric If it is "in operation", the normal electric role product operation process is executed, and if it is "demonstrating the end of normal electric role product operation", the normal electric role product operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is performed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "Normal". Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is over, the operation end setting of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal pattern to "normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time of normal electric accessory operation start, and start normal electric accessory operation Execute the operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time. In the case of loss, the normal design state is set to "normal design fluctuation standby". When it is determined that the winning number of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessories 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings by monitoring the winning of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessories 90 of the game ball in the normal electric accessories operating process. , executes the operation end setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winning prizes of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored. When it is determined that the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening is completed, and the opening of the entrance of the series of normal electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the normal electric accessories 90 and the second start opening valid Execute extension time setting. When it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the ordinary electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol Set to “Waiting for fluctuation”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if the value of the normal symbol operation pending ball number is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is determined to start When it is determined to start the normal pattern variation, the number of normal pattern operation suspension balls is decremented, hit determination, stop pattern determination, normal pattern variation pattern number setting, and normal pattern variation time setting are executed. . After that, the state of the normal design is set to "during normal design fluctuation", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal design state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a special symbol per random number used in big hit determination. In addition, as the random number which relates to the special design, it acquires and remembers the design random number and the fluctuation pattern random number. When the reservation of the second special design is prioritized over the reservation of the first special design, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed. In addition to updating the pending status of the winning, the total pending number is updated and the winning order is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number to be stored at the time of start-up winning, the state of the game machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is a command transmission period, a hit notice effect request, a winning pattern notice effect request, and a pattern notice Execute production requests in order. Here, (1) when the random number related to the first special symbol is stored in a situation where the jackpot game is not executed and the state is not easy to enter, (2) the jackpot game is not executed, and (3) When storing random numbers related to the second special symbol during a big hit or a small win; Then, it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of activated balls of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, pre-determination information (pre-appropriateness determination information, pre-symbol determination information, pre-pattern determination information), the number of pending balls (the number of pending balls of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 1 information that can be identified by a command) are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, if there is a ball entering the starting hole, it is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub-CPU 310 may make various judgments such as whether it is a period or not. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is valid, the first starting opening winning prize is determined. In the same way as in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then a control process relating to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessary product is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "standby for special symbol variation", end the special symbol control general-purpose processing, and if "variation start", special symbol variation Start processing is executed, and if ``special symbol fluctuation is in progress'', special symbol variation in-process is performed, and if ``special symbol stop symbol display is in progress'', special symbol stop symbol display in-process is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub board 300 starts the effect display. Request a command for additional pattern information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special pattern to ``during special pattern variation'', and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special pattern variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation is performed, the variation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the special symbol state is changed to "special Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In the special pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is over, the operation end setting of the special pattern corresponding to the result of the hit judgment is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special design, the state of the special design is set to "waiting for special design fluctuation", the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, and the probability of special design The variable function, the variable time shortening function for special symbols, the probability variable function for normal symbols, the variable time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric accessories are deactivated, and the state of the game machine is prepared for the opening of the big winning mouth. Set to medium, set the winning start demonstration display time, command request for winning start demonstration effect, and command request for firing position specification effect (command request to execute effect that suggests recommended firing position such as "right shot") to run. When the result of the hit determination is a small win, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", set the state of the gaming machine during the small winning start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, set the winning start demonstration effect Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of hit determination is lost, the end of operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is determined. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation" and a command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors control process (S330), in order to execute the processing related to the special electric auditors, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and the condition device is in operation or the special electric auditors are in operation When it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, processing during preparation for opening the special electric accessory, processing during operation of the special electric accessory, processing during closing of the large winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, small winning special electric In-operation processing, small-hit big winning opening closed processing, and small-hit end demonstration processing are executed.

In order to save the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening 20 in the big winning opening valid period setting process (S332), when the value of the big winning opening valid time is 0, the big winning opening valid period flag is set. Stores the mouth invalid period data, and when it is other than 0, stores the big winning mouth valid period data in the big winning mouth valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start varying. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbols is the priority digestion of the second special symbols, (1) not during the big hit or the minor hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) that the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) that the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all are satisfied, the special symbol is in a state where variation can be started. I judge. In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls with special symbols must be other than 0, and (6) the relevant When the judgment is satisfied with the order of execution, that is, the order of winning, it is judged that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special pattern is ready to start fluctuating, the number of operation reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, determine the pattern. In the determination of the pattern, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit pattern is decided based on the special pattern per pattern random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit pattern is decided, and if it is a loss, it is a losing pattern. is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit pattern determined in the design determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined, and the special symbol is determined. The game state after the end of the big win is set, such as the operating contents of the variable time shortening function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Subsequently, the settings during the big win are executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big prize opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of normal symbols, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big win. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the small hit, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame opening signal, and detects any change in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state presentation of the game machine. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display the error state rendering is not executed.

In the entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect the entering ball passing time abnormality, and measures the continuous ON time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that is incremented at each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the entry passage time abnormality, the command transmission request, and the security information output to the external information output terminal 160 Create an output claim in order. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, security output request creation is not executed.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessary product operates continuously, the error state, the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols, and the number of operation pending balls of special symbols, respective displays are displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. Update, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and request to send a steering wheel state rendering command. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of activated balls of the special symbol, the number of activated suspended balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are displayed continuously. Initialization of the display to display the number of times it operates, display the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the hitting division, display errors, and display the prize ball ratio , acquisition and output of display data.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the firing of game balls, the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the setting of the prohibiting/permitting the firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test equipment is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data output. The operating flag and operating timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operating flag and solenoid operating timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid activation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub board 300, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired, and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

Random numbers used in the operation process of the main substrate 200 will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include random numbers per normal symbol and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal symbols, and random numbers per special symbol (hard random numbers) as random numbers related to special symbols. , special symbol per soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, as the random number for giving the initial value of the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, which is the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft default random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The random number per normal symbol is, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, the normal number of reserved symbol variations. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol random number is used for determination of hit determination and stop symbol when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt processing, the normal symbol variation is suspended. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is obtained when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is activated and suspended is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the two are added and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol hit random number is used for executing the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol per symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The special symbol per symbol random number is generated in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). , and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine a big hit symbol in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process, when the hit determination is a big hit.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is set to a predetermined number in the main RAM 291 when the game ball winning is confirmed when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol activated is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special per symbol soft initial value random number are the same values as normal per symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol are the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the special random number per symbol in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). When updating soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. be. That is, the normal per symbol random number, normal per symbol variation pattern random number, special per symbol random number, special per symbol soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the period from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer is calculated. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state, etc., the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) may be replaced with various random number update processes (S306) or initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing control start processing of the sub board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process executing means 360 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process executing means 360 . When starting to control the sub board 300, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initialize the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and stored in the sub-RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. Thus, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes, as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority, processing upon power-up and reset processing upon occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is enabled. As interrupt processing of priority level 7 with the next highest execution priority, there is processing of a command received from the main substrate 200. As interrupt processing of priority level 3, which has the next highest priority, detection of CPU runaway by a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The interrupt processing of priority level 2, which has the next highest priority, is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320. The interrupt processing of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, is communication processing with the real-time clock. and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts having the highest priority set in advance for each type of interrupt are preferentially executed. The processing shown in the figure consists of the highest priority level interrupt, which is processing at power-on and reset processing upon occurrence of various errors, and the reset processing upon detection of CPU runaway, which is priority level 3 interrupt. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the relevant model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). . All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main processing of S518 does not return to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check in the main processing of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative patterns is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a counter, in the case of the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the missing symbols. , the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as will be described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), A preliminary lottery is executed (S548). In addition, the advance notice lottery in S548 transmits the notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the pattern fluctuation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not processed in one loop, but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect to appear immediately after the start of pattern fluctuation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command is immediately after analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random numbers are updated as low-priority processing that can be performed during idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation effect pattern is determined in the processing of S552, and when the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is drawn. In the case of the method of determining the outlier pattern of the decorative pattern by using, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is decided in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200 . The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the highest priority next to reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main substrate 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is determined as a new command (Y of S600), and the determined command becomes the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606) and the original routine is returned to. By obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interrupt of a main command from the main board 200 in this manner, the randomness of the value is enhanced without generating periodicity in the timing of obtaining the random number. If the data read in S600 do not match two times in a row (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N of S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N of S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y of S608), the command buffer (command data (S610), and stores the first command and the second command in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If the first command has not been received in S608, the process after S610 is skipped (N in S608) and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command relating to effect display from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data transmission to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating normal reception on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the processing after S624 is skipped and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320 . This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been received normally. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, solenoid and motor control for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since the interrupt is of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure. , input/output of ports for inputting/outputting drive signals to devices to be controlled such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to the port in S642, and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. update (S646), update the timer for managing the effective input time of the production button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. to create a 16 ms period (S650).

Note that the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, in the case of counting a relatively long period of time, such as error reporting for 30 seconds, if one interrupt (1 ms) cycle count is used, the count value will be longer than necessary. The count value can also be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control has 16 kinds of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 . Lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that turns on and off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is running out of control, and the sub CPU 310 sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as error notification for 30 seconds, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol variation display. When the second success/failure lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second success/failure determination means 222 reads out the second success/failure lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 wins or fails (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command is issued along with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub board 300 and the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 is started (S716).

If the second lottery value is not reserved (N of S700), but the first lottery value is reserved (Y of S708), the first success determination means 221 performs the first lottery. The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the first A variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 along with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not reserved, the process from S710 to S722 is skipped (N of S708).

The special symbols are processed for variable symbol display (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time passes and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display stops after the predetermined variable time passes. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbols is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the contents of the effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbols according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and success/failure determination result of the special symbols. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the premonitory setting is turned on by prior determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern is a pattern that includes specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758), and if it is not a symbol change that triggered the turning on of the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is executed. If it is the symbol variation that triggered the turn-on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not ON (N of S756), or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y of S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

After that, the variable effect display of the decorative symbols is started (S766), the variable effect display process of the decorative symbols (S768), and the display process of the notice effect are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N of S772), and when a variation stop command is received (Y of S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774 ), and ends the decorative symbol variation effect (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the special game effect processing (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N of S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has passed ( Y in S804), but the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning hole. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N of S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y of S810), effect display. The control means 305 terminates the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, ie, variable probability, short working hours, easy entry state (S818). ).

Here, the special game effect processing start (S800) is the effect time for informing the player of the start of the game related to the big hit (special game in which the special electric role product continuously operates based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device). Standby processing to ensure , and when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game is a specific game state (probability variation game or time saving game), the normal game state (probability fluctuation function, time saving function is turned off state), the processing of setting the contents of the jackpot game to be executed, and the processing of setting the sub-control command. On the other hand, the processing related to the end of the special game effect processing (S814) is the end of the big hit game, and the standby processing and sub-control for securing the effect time to notify the player regarding whether or not to shift to the specific game state. Command transmission processing is executed. The start of special game effect processing (S800) and the end of effect processing (S814) are called "big win (both sides) start demo" and "big win (both sides) end demo".

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the big winning opening 20 is opened (S820), the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has elapsed (Y of S822), the big prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the set number of times of opening and closing has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of times of opening and closing, and the process returns to S820. (S828), if opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is terminated.

It should be noted that, when executing a small winning game, similar control related to time called "start demo" and "end demo" may be performed in the same manner as the above-described big winning game. It should be noted that when executing the small winning game, unlike the big winning game even if it is the start of the small winning game in the specific game state, unless the specific game satisfies other end conditions, the small winning game There is no transition to a normal game triggered by the execution of (the probability variation function and the time saving function are not turned off).

In the base technology, the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game, that is, one jackpot in the second game is more than in the first game. , but in another example, the first game may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls is higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected values of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50%. Also, in any case, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and if the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the second game results in a big hit is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game performed when the first game results in a big win. is high, and the probability that the normal game in the variable probability state is executed after the special game is finished may be configured to be high. For example, there are a first win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area. It may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second prize than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of getting the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of getting the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Base technology 2)
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technology.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. FIG. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types of slots provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. a device; The housing door portion 1104 is a door attached to the opening of the housing base portion 1102 so as to be freely opened and closed. Form. The housing door 1104 is locked during the business hours of the amusement arcade to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010 . Only when the cabinet door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the amusement arcade, access to the interior becomes possible.

A transparent window 1132 is provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the housing door portion 1104 , and the reel rotating inside can be visually recognized through the transparent window 1132 . An effect display device 1130 for displaying effect content is provided on the front upper portion of the housing door portion 1104 . A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a checkout button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door portion 1104. be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for betting one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is the maximum bet number of three. It is a button for placing a medal. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medals inserted from the medal slot 1110 and stored as stored medals or bet medals. The cross key 1118 and the production button 1120 are operation input means for receiving the player's operation input as production. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reels. On the right side of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c are provided for respectively instructing stoppage of rotation of the three reels. A medal payout opening 1108 and a medal receiving tray 1106 are provided in front of the medal payout opening 1108 under the housing door portion 1104 , and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout opening 1108 . A plurality of production lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer circumference of the housing door portion 1104 .

A status display lamp, a number display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the upper portion (not shown) of the effect display device 1130 . The status display lamp lights when, for example, a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when finished. The number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of bonus games, the number of AT executions, and the like. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The number-of-payouts display lamp is a seven-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination is established. The number-of-payouts display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010 . For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage compartment full error, a spinning drum stop error, a set value error, and the like. A hopper empty error is an error when game medals in the hopper tank 1162 become empty. A game medal payout error is an error when game medals are paid out at a timing different from the original. The game medal retention error is an error when game medals are jammed inside the medal slot 1110 . The game medal reverse flow error is an error when the game medals advance in a direction different from the original route, such as when the game medals enter from a position different from the medal slot 1110 . The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. Spindle stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. A set value error is an error that occurs when a set value is outside a predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 31 is a rear view of housing door portion 1104 exposed when housing door portion 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially in the center. A sub-controller 1300 called a so-called sub-board is installed on the upper part to control the effects in the game. Below the transparent window 1132, a medal selector 1150, a medal guiding path 1152 on the right side thereof, and a medal return path 1154 on the lower side are provided. A medal selector 1150 distributes a medal inserted into a medal insertion slot, which will be described later, to a medal guidance path 1152 if it is ready to be received, and to a medal return path 1154 if it is not ready for reception. The medals distributed to the medal guiding path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank, which will be described later, through the medal guiding path 1152 .

FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal structure of housing base 1102 exposed when housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160 a , a middle reel 1160 b , and a right reel 1160 c are rotatably provided at substantially the center of the housing base 1102 . The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of patterns printed on their outer peripheral surfaces. visible to the player.

A main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102 to control the progress of the game. A setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side of main controller 1200 . The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing six stages of game specifications, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, and a setting memory for storing set values. Of the six levels of set values associated with different game specifications, the larger the value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications are for the player. When an amusement store employee inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the button can be operated to change the setting.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the bottom of the housing base 1102 , and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from a payout opening 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162 . A power board 1166 for supplying power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided to the left of the hopper tank 1162 .

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement on reels. Symbol rows as shown in the table are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals on each reel. When a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line among these symbols becomes a predetermined same symbol or a predetermined combination that establishes a predetermined combination, winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the lines on which symbols are arranged include combination lines which are not set as valid lines and are not treated as wins of a winning combination even if predetermined same symbols or predetermined combinations stop.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player inserts one to three medals from the medal slot 1110 to bet on medals. When medals are stored as credits, the player presses the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113 to bet one or three medals. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start to rotate, and the symbol rows on the reels move vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in an arbitrary order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stops in the order corresponding to the pressing order. One of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. If the combination of symbols stopped on a predetermined activated line corresponds to one of a plurality of types of combinations, it is determined as a ``win,'' and the number of medals corresponding to the type of the combination is paid out, or a game state is reached. migration is performed.

FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 1010 has a main controller 1200 and a sub controller 1300 . Main controller 1200 is electrically connected to reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a-b, checkout button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a-c, setting change switch 1168, and sub-controller 1300 is a production lamp. 1124 , effect display device 1130 , speaker 1122 , cross key 1118 and effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control unit 1200 and the sub control unit 1300 each include elements such as ROM and RAM for storing data and programs and CPUs used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware. I will explain the functional blocks from this perspective.

Note that one of the functional blocks included in the main controller 1200 may be installed in the sub controller 1300 instead of the main controller 1200 . Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-controller 1300 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the main controller 1200 instead of the sub-controller 1300 . However, since data transmission/reception between the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 is unidirectional from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300, the entire operation is realized by such unidirectional data transmission/reception. Each configuration is arranged in the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 so as to be performed. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300 is maintained in this way, it is possible to transmit data from the configuration included in the sub-controller 1300 to the configuration included in the main controller 1200. and cannot request data transmission. Therefore, information generated by main controller 1200 cannot be referred to by sub controller 1300 unless main controller 1200 unilaterally transmits it to sub controller 1300 .

The main controller 1200 includes a combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a winning flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game. A control means 1218 and a setting change means 1220 are provided.

Triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 by the player, the combination lottery means 1202 executes a combination lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of combinations, and transmits the result of the combination lottery to the sub-controller 1300. do. The types of winning combinations include minor winning combinations, special winning combinations, and replay winning combinations. There are a plurality of types of small wins, and the number of medals corresponding to the types is paid out. The special role includes regular bonus (first class special role, also known as "RB") and big bonus (first class special role works continuously "BB", second class special role is "BB"). Continuous operation is also called "MB"). The replaying combination is also called "replay", and is a combination in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting new medals, and the game can be played again. The random number determining means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the combination lottery as the lottery value. It should be noted that the "random numbers" referred to in the present application may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. The combination lottery means 1202 determines a winning combination by determining whether or not the lottery value obtained by the random number determination means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each combination.

Winning flag control means 1206 turns on a flag corresponding to a winning combination among a plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a small combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special combination, the winning is carried over to the winning, so the flag is kept turned on until the winning, and the flag is turned off when winning. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a replaying combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

When the start lever 1114 is operated, the reel control means 1208 controls to start rotating the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c, and sends information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114. Send to control device 1300 . The reel control means 1208 selects one of a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c in response to the pressing of the left stop button 1116a, middle stop button 1116b and right stop button 1116c. In addition to performing control, information indicating that the stop button has been pressed is transmitted to the sub-controller 1300 . The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c by controlling the driving of the stepping motors respectively provided.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 selects the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and order of pressing the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c. to determine the stop position of the The operation order detection means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects reference positions of the rotational positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by photo sensors corresponding to each.

The stop position determination table 1210 includes the result of the lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a-c when the stop buttons 1116a-c are pressed, the order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c, and the plurality of reels 1160a-c. A correspondence relation is determined as to which of the symbols is to be stopped on the pay line. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small combination, the type of special combination, and the type of replay combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210 . When any winning combination is won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, when the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 The stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is aligned on the activated line. Even if any combination is won, if the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning condition, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not line up on the active line. If none of the wins are won, the reel control means 1208 controls the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c so that the symbol combination corresponding to the win does not line up on the effective line, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the win. to decide.

In this specification, the term "table" simply refers to data in which the correspondence relationship between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Instead, it broadly includes the case of implementation by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. These are also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate as a concept substantially synonymous with "table". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

Winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is aligned on the activated line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the prize determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164.例文帳に追加Also, when the winning combination is a replay combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals placed in the previous game are placed again. Winning determination means 1214 transmits information on winning and information on the number of payout medals to sub-controller 1300 .

A special game control means 1218 performs control to shift from a normal game to a special game when a special role is won, and to shift from a special game to a normal game when a condition for ending the special game is satisfied. As special games, there are an RB game that shifts when RB wins, a BB game that shifts when BB wins, and an MB game that shifts when MB wins. The RB game ends when predetermined symbols or predetermined combinations stop eight times on the activated line, or when 12 game results are obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of medals obtained by payout due to a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stopping on the activated line exceeds 285 medals. The MB game ends when the total number of medals obtained by payout due to a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stopping on the activated line exceeds 153 medals. In addition, as a special control of the special game, the time from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the corresponding reel is shortened during the MB game, and the game start operation is performed even if the RB is not won during the BB game. It is also possible to have a control to internally shift to RB at the same time as (lever operation).

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specifications corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six stages of game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each combination in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 1202 . In the game specifications of six stages, the winning probability is higher as the numerical value among setting 1 to setting 6 is larger. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the setting value is incremented by one in the order of "setting 1"→"setting 2"→"setting 3"→...→"setting 6"→"setting 1", and " Cycle the increments by going back from setting 6 to setting 1. Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the setting value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub control device 1300 includes pattern storage means 1302 , effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 . Pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern includes the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 according to the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern to be output from the speaker 1122, and the like. The effect determination means 1304 receives information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning lottery, information on winning, information on the number of payout medals, and other information from the main controller 1200. receive. Effect determination means 1304 is triggered by the operation of start lever 1114 or stop buttons 1116a-c or the stoppage of reels 1160a-c. One of a plurality of stored performance patterns is selected. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display contents to the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, etc. according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. When the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the performance by the performance pattern, the performance control means 1306 cancels the performance being displayed, and the performance determination means 1304 starts a new game. A corresponding production pattern is selected, and the production control means 1306 starts production according to the selected production pattern.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c have yet rotated (N of S1010) and no medals have been betted (N of S1012). In this state, if medals are accumulated as credits (Y of S1014), if either bet button 1112a or 1112b is pressed (Y of S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. Set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is exited and the rest of the processing is skipped until medals are inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, then S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated while the bet is set (Y of S1020), the role lottery means 1202 executes the role lottery and the advantageous game lottery (AT lottery etc.) (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206. turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination according to the result of the lottery combination (S1024), and selects the stop position determination table 1210 according to the result of the lottery combination (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not passed since the end of the previous game, it waits (N of S1026). S1028), exiting the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 is not operated at S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processes are skipped (N at S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to 1160c is spinning (Y in S1010), if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination; The reel stop position is determined based on the stop button pressing timing, the pressing order, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N of S1030). When all the reels 1160a to 1160c are stopped (Y of S1036), it is determined whether the winning combination wins based on their stop positions (S1038). is paid out (S1040). When the payout is completed, the state control processing (S1042) relating to the advantageous game is executed, and when the conditions for transferring to the advantageous game (AT, etc.) are satisfied, the transition to the advantageous game section is performed, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous game are satisfied. To execute control related to the end of the advantageous game section. If all reels are not stopped, S1038, S1040 and S1042 are skipped (N of S1036).

As the reel stop management process, a wait time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting for the start of rotation is generated and written in the command buffer, and an initial value of various data used for accelerating the reel is set to a predetermined value. stored in the storage area of It is determined whether or not all the reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and confirmation of all the reels is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed, or when it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the checking of all the reels is terminated.

In addition, when the payout cannot be stored in the payout of medals, the hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, the hopper is driven and waits until the payout is detected (if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses, a hopper empty error occurs). When the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, whether or not the payout is completed is determined, and if the payout is not completed, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is completed, the driving of the hopper is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of main controller 1200 and sub-controller 1300. As shown in FIG. Main controller 1200 includes electronic components such as main CPU 1250 , main RAM 1252 , and main ROM 1254 . The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating insertion of medals, a signal indicating pressing of bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a signal indicating pressing of checkout button 1113, a signal indicating operation of start lever 1114, a signal indicating pressing of stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and reels 1160a to 1160b. A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls external devices such as stepping motors for the reels 1160a to 1160c by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub-controller 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button and lever.

The sub-controller 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 1350, sub-RAM 1352, sub-ROM 1354, effect display control unit 1360, and the like. The sub ROM 1354 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining the effect process and display pattern data defining the effect display process. It is a hardware configuration that functions as A sub-control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 1354 into the sub-RAM 1352, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown), and is connected by two-way communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted multiple times, and the effect display control unit 1360 sends an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350 as soon as the command is properly received at least once. By replying, a communication error due to noise or the like is avoided. If a plurality of commands are received in a different order than normal, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without replying, and replies only to appropriate commands. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 according to the reception of the signal or the number of times it has been received. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and controls the effect by sound output. Sub CPU 1350 also transmits display pattern data to effect display control section 1360 . The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 are a hardware configuration functioning as effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 in FIG. In the base technology, an example in which the sub-controller 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described. may be formed as separate substrates connected to each other through

FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of effect display control section 1360. As shown in FIG. The effect display control section 1360 includes a control CPU 1362 , a control RAM 1364 , a data ROM 1366 and a display control circuit 1370 . The data ROM 1366 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and object definition data of three-dimensional images in a data-compressed state. It is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302 . The effect image data is an image used for effect display as a effect object indicating the result of winning determination, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects and a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. Object definition data is data that defines the shape of a three-dimensional object.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data designated by the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362 . As a result, the control CPU 1362 transmits commands and material data relating to the effect display to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 performs display control. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a and 1112b or the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and transmits a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 are a hardware configuration functioning as the effect determination means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 referred to in FIG.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374 , a drawing memory 1376 , a drawing circuit 1378 , a frame buffer 1380 and a display circuit 1382 which are connected via a bus 1372 . Bus 1372 in this figure is a generic representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 1374 . The drawing memory 1376 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 1374 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate display images. Store in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130 . It should be noted that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be configured by a single VRAM and formed by dividing the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of video signals in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The slot machine 1010 is powered by a power board 1166 that functions as a power supply. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are sent to the main CPU 1250 . The power switch is a switch that receives power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010 . The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit or the like mounted on the main controller 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010 or the like. Power from the power supply is supplied to main controller 1200 and sub controller 1300 . On the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300, there is provided a power monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting a power failure in which the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. When the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, the power monitoring means determines that the power is cut off, and outputs a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350 . Note that the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the main controller 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the sub controller 1300, and is set to a value higher than that of the sub controller 1300. Main controller 1200 executes a programmed process (power-off process) to be executed at power-off.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010 . In the game control process executed by the main controller 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and as a start condition, the number of bets matches a specified number, and If the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y of S1104), the lever acceptance processing is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N of S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, a winning combination determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute a freeze (effect) as a freeze lottery process and the effect mode during freezing are determined (S1110). Further, an advantageous game lottery, which is a lottery related to transition to an advantageous game section, is executed according to the combination lottery result and the current game state (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a wait time is executed (S1114), and a stop display pattern determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this figure.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in main controller 1200 . In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, etc. It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, inhibiting interrupts, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not a power failure has been detected. A disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power-off processing, saving of registers, saving of stack pointer, saving of interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, the holding of the information on the combination determination result and the information on the RT game state stored in the predetermined storage area, the calculation and storage of the checksum, and the like are processed. If no power interruption is detected (N of S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). Timer measurement measures the elapsed time of any timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (update of the display value of the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal inputted to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, the reel driving control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc. of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all the reels are finished (S1214). Next, port output processing for exciting output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. is executed (S1216), and control command transmission processing is executed (S1218). Outer edge signal data stored in a predetermined storage area is read out and an outer edge signal is output (S1220), interrupt termination processing (restore of register, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and interrupt return is performed. do.

Another control process executed by main controller 1200 is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process performed when power supply to the main control device 1200 is started (at the time of power-on), a temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, a check, etc. are performed, and a power return process is executed. processed as possible. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the winning combination determination result, the information on the RT game state, etc., which were stored in a predetermined storage area when the power was turned off.

(First embodiment)
The pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-described base technology. In the following, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements explained in the underlying technique are given the same reference numerals and explained.

Further, in the following description, the process of displaying an effect image on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determining means 303, but as described above, the effect determining means realized by the sub CPU 310 303 (sub-main) transmits a command relating to an effect image to be displayed to effect control means 304 (sub-sub) realized by control CPU 320, and effect control means 304 controls display control circuit 326 to display effect image. is displayed on the effect display device 60 . Therefore, in the following description, the operations described mainly by the effect determination means 303 may be expressed mainly by the effect control means 304 or the display control circuit 346. FIG. In the following description, the configuration for displaying an image can be appropriately replaced with a configuration for outputting information indicated by the image by voice.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment includes a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and one big winning opening, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the underlying technology. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the underlying technology, changes the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter also referred to as "special figure 2") to the first special symbol 51 ( Also referred to as "Special Figure 1" below. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology in that it has a function of a small win V.

In the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery is executed, and the determination result of the lottery is A special game is started in which the big winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened when a big win is achieved. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery is a predetermined result called a small win, a small win game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for a short period of time. This small winning game is distinguished from the big winning because it has only one unit game that is repeated multiple times in the case of a big winning.

When a game ball entering a big winning opening enters a specific area called a V zone in the big winning opening when a small winning game is being executed, a special electric accessory is continuously operated to execute a big winning game. A special game is executed in which a conditional device for operating the accessory continuous operating device is activated, the winning is promoted from a small winning to a big winning, and the big winning opening is opened for a long time. A so-called small hit V occurs. That is, the special game control means 260, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win, or when the game ball entering the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game A special game is executed when passing through. Therefore, the small winning game in the first embodiment has substantially the same operation as the second type pachinko game known in the past. As a difference between the model that adopts the small hit V and the second type pachinko game, in the small hit V, depending on the stop display mode of the special symbol that triggered the execution of the small hit game (so-called type of hit) 2. It is possible to change the condition device (character continuous actuating device) that is activated when the ball enters a specific area, and to change the profit obtained by one V winning.

When the special game ends, the game shifts to a specific game called a variable time reduction game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction") with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). The reduction in working hours is continued until a new big hit occurs after the special game is finished, or the number of variations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number. The time saving of the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the ball into the second start winning opening is higher than in the normal state, and corresponds to the easy entering state in the underlying technology, and is also called an electric chew support. Shortening of time includes (1) shortening of variable time of special symbols, (2) probability variation of normal symbols, (3) shortening of variable time of normal symbols, and (4) extension of open time of normal electric accessary 90 . The ordinary electric accessary 90 is a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

Further, as will be described later, in the win-or-fail lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the second start hole 12, the probability of being judged as a small hit is set high. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during a short time period when the ease of entering the ball into the second starting hole 12 is increased, and the possibility of the small hit V occurring is also increased. It should be noted that the big win that is compared with the small win V, and the big win that starts the special game when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the big win is hereinafter also referred to as the "big win". In the normal game in the normal state (non-time-saving state), it is difficult to enter the second start port 12 except for the situation of the chance production (first hit of the normal symbol) described later, so first enter the first start port 11. Make a ball, get a special pattern 1 big hit, and shift to a short time. Then, the ball is entered into the second starting port 12 in a time-saving manner to obtain a small winning V or a big winning pattern, and the short winning V and the big winning pattern are aimed at continuously by continuing the time-saving even after the end of the special game. becomes. As in the first embodiment, in a pachinko game machine that adopts a small win V, when a setting function is installed, a big win that develops from a small win that is not affected by the set value is the main game purpose in a specific game. As a result, compared to the specific game (probability variable state) in the model equipped with the probability variable function related to the winning lottery of the special symbol like the underlying technology, it is possible to suppress the setting difference of the game property during the specific game. Specifically, when performing a specific game that continues 100 times, in the case of a model that adopts a small hit V (small hit probability 1/100), the possibility of getting a big hit from a small hit during a specific game is about Although it is 63%, in the case of a probability machine like the underlying technology (probability during probability: setting 1 = 1/100, setting 6 = 1/80), the probability of hitting a big hit during probability is 63% (setting 1) ~ It changes greatly to 71% (setting 6).

FIG. 40 shows the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, during the normal state (during the normal game in the normal state), the ball is entered into the first starting port 11, and the aim is to acquire the symbol jackpot by the special figure 1.例文帳に追加The symbol jackpot of special figure 1 can be said to be a so-called first hit, and includes a 15R jackpot that gives nine times of working hours, a 4R jackpot that gives nine times of working hours, and a 4R big hit that gives one time of working hours. One of these multiple types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of jackpot symbol.

When the time saving 9 times is granted, it shifts to the normal game in the time saving state after the special game ends, and the time saving state is when a big hit (both the pattern big hit and the small hit V) occurs, or the normal game It means that it ends when the special figure 2 variation in is executed 9 times. In addition, when the time saving is granted once, the transition to the normal game of the time saving state after the special game ends, and when the time saving state occurs a big hit, or the variation of the special figure 2 in the normal game is executed once means to exit if Incidentally, the time-saving end condition described here is described assuming that the game is played preferably in order to obtain a ball in the design of the gaming machine, and the detailed end condition will be described later.

In the case of a jackpot that gives 9 times of working hours, after the special game is completed, it is shifted to the normal game of the working time saving state, and during the period when the variation of special figure 2 is executed 9 times, and at the end of it, the remaining 4 reserved pattern variations. While (typically four variations of special figure 2) is executed, the rush effect is displayed. Also, in the case of a jackpot that gives a time saving once, it is shifted to a normal game in a time saving state after the special game ends, and during the time when the variation of the special figure 2 is executed once, and at the end of it, there are 4 pending Chance production is displayed while symbol variation (typically four variation of special figure 2) is executed. If a big hit does not occur in the symbol variation during the time saving and the symbol variation for the reserved 4 pieces, it returns to the normal state.

In the pattern change during the time saving, or the pattern change four times after the end of the time saving, the small hit V (special figure 2 small hit V) triggered by the special figure 2 variation result becoming a small hit, special figure A 2-symbol jackpot or a special 1-symbol jackpot can occur. The special figure 2 small hit V is distributed to any of the 15R big hit that gives 9 times of working hours, the 10R big hit that gives 9 times of working hours, and the 5R big hit that gives 9 times of working hours. The special figure 2 pattern jackpot is a 5R jackpot that gives 9 times of working hours. The special figure 1 symbol jackpot is distributed to either a 15R jackpot that gives 9 times of working hours or a 4R jackpot that gives 9 times of working hours. When these big hits are finished, the game returns to the normal game (rush performance) in the time saving state, and the player aims to obtain another big hit by changing the pattern during the time saving or four times the pattern changing after the time saving is finished.

The pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment can open the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time with the hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Then, the chance performance (general electric opening performance) is displayed during the long opening of the normal electric accessary 90 and during the pattern variation of the special figure 2 reserved during that time. In the variable performance related to the special figure 2 suspension that occurred during the normal game in the normal state, it is a big chance to win a small hit V, so it is a special performance that is different in appearance from the variable performance of the special figure 1 executed in the same state. is executed. Even during this special figure 2 reserved pattern variation, a special figure 2 small hit V, a special figure 2 pattern big hit, or a special figure 1 pattern big hit can occur.

FIG. 41 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. The first starting port 11 is the central lower part of the game area 81 and is provided at the lower position of the center decoration 64 . The first operating port 31 is provided above the first starting port 11 . The first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 allow or facilitate entry of a game ball launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words, left-handed hitting). position. On the other hand, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 20, and the second operating port 32 are different in strength from the first strength (relatively strong strength in the first embodiment, in other words, right-handed). It is provided at a position where a ball can be entered or can be easily entered. In the first embodiment, the left-handed game ball is prevented from entering the second starting hole 12, the big winning hole 20, and the second operation hole 32, and the right-handed game ball is prevented from entering the first starting hole 11. A game nail and a pinwheel are arranged in the game area 81 so that the ball does not enter the first operation opening 31, and a flow path for the game ball is set.

Inside the big winning hole 20, a specific area is provided in which a small hit development big hit occurs when a game ball passes through. detect that A specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member so as to open the specific area when the result of the lottery (which can be said to be the result of the judgment of success/failure) is a small hit according to the control of the opening/closing control means 275 . When a ball entering a specific area is detected, a decision is made to shift to a special game. When the ball entering the specific area is not detected, the game returns to the normal game after finishing the small winning game.

In the special game according to the first embodiment, there is a first special game (symbol jackpot) that is executed when the symbols at the time of stop become a jackpot, and a small win after the symbols at the time of stop become a small win. There is a second special game (small win V) that is executed when the game develops into a big win. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the underlying technique, that is, triggered by the symbol jackpot. The second special game is a special game associated with the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device triggered by the fact that the game ball passed through the specific area during the small winning game (also called "V winning") is.

A status display lamp 502 for indicating the gaming status of the gaming machine 500 is provided at the outer right lower position of the gaming area 81 . The status display lamp 502 is, for example, composed of two lamps. The lamp indicates whether or not it is a game state in which right-handed hitting should be performed (ordinary electric accessary easy ball entry state or special electric accessary actuation state). The first lamp lights up when the normal game is in the time saving state, and is turned off when the normal game is in the normal state. The second lamp is turned on when the game state is the right-handed game state, that is, when the time-saving state, the small winning game state, or the special game state, and is turned off when the normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed indicator lamp, and indicates whether or not the game state should be right-handed in a certain display mode.

In the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the special figure 1 symbol jackpot and the special figure 2 symbol jackpot probability are both 1/319. Since the pachinko game machine 500 does not have a function of varying the probability of special symbols, the probability of a big winning symbol does not vary, and a lottery is always drawn with a constant probability for each probability determined by a set value. Moreover, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of special figure 1 may be greater than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value smaller than the small hit probability of special figure 2 at least.

In addition, in the small winning game, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 for a predetermined time of 1.8 seconds or less (for example, 1.6 seconds), and during that time, the specific area inside the big winning opening 20 is also open. controlled to be It is preferable that the large winning opening 20 adopts a sliding attacker type (a type in which a game ball can roll on the lid member of the large winning opening and can enter the ball when the lid member is opened). The upper part of 20 or the flow path near the big winning opening 20 is configured, for example, in a zigzag shape so that a plurality of game balls stay in the vicinity of the entrance (cover portion, etc.) of the big winning opening 20 . Furthermore, the opening pattern of the big winning hole 20 is repeated 13 times with a predetermined closing time interposed between the opening of 0.124 seconds. It is preferable to design it so that Thereby, when the big winning hole 20 is opened for a short time in the small winning game, the ball entering the big winning hole 20 and the small winning V can be generated with high probability. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is configured such that if a small hit occurs, a small win V can be obtained.

FIG. 42 shows the breakdown of big hits in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The special figure 1 pattern jackpots include nine time-saving 15R jackpots, nine time-saving 4R jackpots, and one time-saving 4R jackpots, and the distribution probabilities are 1%, 49%, and 50%. It should be noted that the 4R big hit of one time reduction during the time reduction is the same control as the 4R big hit of nine times of time reduction. Therefore, all the big hits during the time saving are provided with the time saving nine times. The special figure 2 pattern jackpot will be a 5R jackpot with 9 times of working hours. The small hit V of the special figure 2 includes a 15R jackpot with 9 times of time reduction, a 10R jackpot with 9 times of time reduction, and a 5R jackpot with 9 times of time reduction, and distribution probabilities are 60%, 10%, and 30%. In this embodiment, the maximum number of times of time saving is 9 times, but it is possible to perform a lottery with a small winning probability of 1/10 9 times. It is about 61%, but as a premium hit, a small hit V that reduces the time of 100 and a pattern jackpot are provided to virtually guarantee the next continuation (approximately 99.9% probability of the next small during the time saving) There may be a game state that gives the player a sense of security that he or she can get a win, including a case where a win or a big win with symbols can be obtained.

1. Configuration related to time saving and open lottery (normal pattern lottery):
There are three types of open lottery results: loss, first win, and second win. The first win is a win accompanied by the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (special symbol fluctuation conversion). The second win is a win accompanied by the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 for a short time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the time-saving state, the probability of winning the first win is about 10/11, and the probability of winning the second win is zero.

The opening/closing control means 275, in the normal game in the normal state, when the open lottery becomes the first hit (winning probability 1/590) and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first win, a plurality of game balls. is fired for a predetermined time (hereinafter also referred to as “long opening time”). The normal electric accessory 90 is controlled in the open state so that Here, the time interval (shortest time interval) at which two game balls are continuously shot may be 0.6 to 0.8 seconds. The long open time is less than 6 seconds, and is a value equal to or greater than the time interval at which the upper limit number of game balls (4 in the first embodiment) held in the special figure 2 (second lottery value) is fired. may In addition, the long open time, after starting the launch of the game ball, may be a value of more than the time assumed to be required until the special figure 2 suspension increases from 0 to 4. The long open time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

The opening/closing control means 275 is the normal game in the time saving state, even when the open lottery is the first win (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first win, the above long During opening time, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened. The long open time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the normal state and the long open time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the time saving state may be different, but each time is a plurality of (preferably four) games It is set to a value greater than or equal to the time interval at which the sphere is fired. In this way, by opening the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to accumulate a plurality of special figure 2 reservations even in the normal state. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a chance of winning a small hit V multiple times. For example, in the game flow of FIG. 26, it is possible to provide a route that shifts from the normal state to the contiguous state through winning of normal symbols.

In addition, the open time ("short open time") of the normal electric accessory 90 when the result of the open lottery is the second hit is a time shorter than the long open time, and the ball entering the second start port 12 is the maximum. can be set to one or two possible times. Also, the short opening time may be set to a time when it is substantially difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 12 .

The operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 90 is that the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second start port 12 is the special figure 2 (here, the second winning lottery value). This is because the upper limit of the number of reserved items (4 in the first embodiment) has been reached. The opening/closing control means 275 controls (1) when the elapsed time from controlling the normal electric accessory 90 to the open state reaches the long open time (in the case of the first win) or the short open time (in the case of the second win). and (2) when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches four, the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the closed state. In other words, the state of the normal electric accessory 90 is switched so that the ball cannot be entered into the second starting port 12 (difficult as a modified example).

The long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 in the normal game without going through the jackpot (time reduction) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). Due to the above operation end conditions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excessive small wins V in normal games that do not go through the big wins (shorter time) that are exceptional game flows, making it easier to stabilize the ball output rate within the design range. . In addition, when the normal electric accessories 90 are long opened in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is prevented from exceeding the assumed value of 4 times, and the ball output rate on the assumption that the special figure 2 fluctuates 4 times becomes easier to realize.

The conditions for ending the time saving are (1) that a big hit or a small hit has occurred, (2) the number of changes in the special figure 2 is 9 times (in the case of 9 times of time reduction) or 1 time (in the case of 1 time of time reduction) Reached, (3) The number of fluctuations of special figure 1 has reached 7 times, (4) The total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 15 times (in the case of giving 9 times of short time) or 7 times (In the case of one time reduction) is satisfied when any of the conditions is met. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to shorten the time, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the time saving respectively. The specific game control means 270 terminates the time saving when the above termination conditions are satisfied. When any of the above (2) (3) (4) is established, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

In this way, the value of one time reduction can be secured by setting each of the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 as the end condition of time saving. That is, before the variation of the special figure 1 reaches 7 times, it is possible to expect the ball to enter the second start opening 12, which is long open, and if the ball enters the second start opening 12, the special figure 1 The special figure 2 fluctuates more preferentially, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be obtained with a high probability. The number of fluctuations of special figure 1 in the time saving end condition 7 times is the upper limit of the number of reserved special figures 1 that can exist at the end of the special game (4 pieces), and the first start that can occur if you hit left by mistake It is the sum of the insurances (three pieces) against the ball entering the mouth 11 .

As will be described later, the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment because the variation of special figure 1 during time saving is only super shortening variation. As a modification, if the variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving is longer, the number of insurance may be less (eg, one).

Specific game control means 270, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied by the variation of the special figure 1 or special figure 2, at the time of stop display of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 in the variation (in other words, at the end of the fluctuation time) The time saving is ended and the game state is returned to the normal state.

Here, one design variation time (that is, one variation time of special figure 2) triggered by the ball entering the second start port 12 in time saving is open lottery (in other words, normal symbol lottery) is continuous. It is set to a value equal to or longer than the time during which at least two normal symbol hits can occur when the game is executed. In other words, the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects a variation pattern that defines a variation time longer than the time at which at least two normal symbol hits can occur as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 during time saving. For example, the variation pattern table is configured to select, as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 during time saving, a variation pattern that defines a variation time longer than the time during which at least two normal symbol hits can occur. good too.

As described in the underlying technology, for example, one variation time of normal symbols in time saving may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time during which at least two hits of normal symbols can occur is about 10 seconds (time of two fluctuations of normal symbols+one operation time of normal electric accessories). In 1st Example, 1 time of fluctuation|variation time of the special figure 2 in time saving is set to the predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modification, one time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long opening time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the normal symbol is the first hit.

Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal design at normal time, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to four times. This is because when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the reserved number of the special figure 2, the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed. On the other hand, in the normal game after the time saving 1 time 4R jackpot ends, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to 5 times in the time saving 1 time and 4 times after the time saving end. The normal electric accessory 90 opened by the first hit of the normal symbol in time saving is temporarily closed when the number of balls entering the second start port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4) of the reserved number of the special figure 2. . However, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the time in which the normal symbol hit can occur twice or more, the second normal symbol first hit occurs and the normal electric accessory 90 is released, and the second This is because it is possible to enter a further ball into the 2 starting port 12 (typically, the special figure 2 hold is increased by one).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the chance via the jackpot given once in a short time is more advantageous for the player than the chance based on the normal symbol win at the normal time. Even if the time saving is the minimum one time, by making the possibility of obtaining the small winning V higher than the normal winning of the normal symbols, the player's consciousness of trying to obtain the big winning can be heightened. , can reward the player who wins the jackpot.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252, when the time saving ends at the time of the stop display of the special symbol variation in which the lottery result is out, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a predetermined special figure. To lengthen a special pattern fixing time when fixedly displaying only a fixed time. In other words, the next pattern variation based on the retained winning lottery value (typically the second winning lottery value) is not started until the special figure fixing time set to be particularly long elapses after the end of time saving. The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 determine whether or not it is the fixed display timing of the special symbol, (1) that the specific game control means 270 has finished the time saving (jackpot symbol, small It is determined by detecting (except for the case where the time saving ends due to the stop of the winning pattern). As a modification, (2) may be determined by counting the number of variations of the special symbol (special figure 2) in the time saving. However, in the pachinko machine 500, the time-saving end conditions are defined independently for each of the special figures 1 and 2, and since the special figure 2 fluctuation may be performed at normal times, the method of (1) is It is more suitable.

The special figure fixed time at the end of the time saving when the success or failure lottery result in the first embodiment is out is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal symbol wins immediately before the end of the time saving, the opening (5.9 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 90 ends before the special symbol fixed time elapses. As a result, the special figure 2 suspension will increase more than expected (as a situation, if there is no special figure fixed time of 6 seconds, when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts during the operation of the normal electric accessory, the special figure 2 Since there is one pending vacancy, it is possible to suppress the 5th variation of the unintended special figure 2 after the end of the time saving), that is, the small hit V can be suppressed from occurring beyond the design range .

The effect determination means 303 executes the advance notice lottery when the result of the open lottery is lost or the second win, and according to the result of the notice lottery, the first win occurs and the chance state (the length of the normal electric accessory 90) A forewarning effect (also called a "fake forewarning effect") is displayed to make one expect that the game will enter into the open mode. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display a fake advance notice effect with a predetermined probability when the result of the open lottery is a loss or a second win. In addition, in the first embodiment, the false notice effect is not displayed based on the result of the lottery for the special figure.

Effect determination means 303, during the variation of the special figure 1 in the normal game of the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit (long open), the effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 ( A general electric opening effect (corresponding to a holding charge effect described later) is displayed in a mode corresponding to the execution state of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61, etc.). The general electric opening effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting entry into a chance state (hereinafter also referred to as a “rush effect”). In addition, the general electric open effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as "right-handed navigation") that encourages right-handed driving. The right-handed navigation may be the content that prompts to shoot the game ball aiming at the entry ball to the second start port 12, or the content that prompts to save the reservation of the special figure 2. Here, if the normal electric accessory is activated immediately after the stop display of the normal symbol, there is a risk that the player will not be able to fully hold the right hand even if he sees the "right hand navigation" and starts the right hand. , Set a longer time such as the normal pattern fixing time until the normal electric accessory is opened after the stop display, the normal electric accessory operation start demonstration time, etc., and use that time to "right-handed navigation" It is preferable to make a presentation. It should be noted that the execution start timing of the normal electric opening effect is said to be stopped and displayed in a manner in which the normal symbol indicates the first hit, but if the right hitting is not executed, the normal electric accessory (special 2 start opening) On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball, it may be possible to execute from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the remaining 5 seconds of the normal symbol fluctuation time At the timing of , a normal symbol winning performance, which is a success pattern for the above-mentioned false notice performance, is executed, and in the remaining 5 seconds, a right-handed guidance performance is performed to make the player understand the situation in which he/she should hit to the right).

Effect determination means 303, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 at normal time (during non-time-saving game) is not established or normal reach is established, along with the display of the fluctuation production (for example, superimposed on the fluctuation production), rush An effect may be displayed and right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is during super reach establishment, the rush effect may not be displayed, and the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size. That is, the effect determination means 303 may display the reach non-establishment or the priority of normal reach<general electric open effect<super reach. It should be noted that the first hit of the normal symbols can be established even while the special symbols are not changed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the variable effect is not being displayed, the electric open effect can be displayed. In the drawing process for the effect display device 60, the display priority may be set such that a display to be superimposed on the foreground is treated as a high priority, or a display with a large effect display area is treated as a high priority. Any display mode, such as multiple, may be used as long as it is intended to be viewed by the player preferentially.

2. Configurations related to multiple variation pattern modes:
FIG. 43 shows multiple types of variation pattern modes. The pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the variation pattern selection tendencies of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are different. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are determined with reference to different variation pattern tables for each variation pattern mode. Hereinafter, the variation pattern table referred to in mode N will be referred to as a mode N table.

The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores mode 0 to mode 7 tables. The first variation pattern determination means 231 selects one of the mode 0 table to mode 2 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects one of the mode 0 table and the mode 3 table to mode 7 table according to the game state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. . In other words, after the end of the special game, the mode states of the variation pattern tables of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are individually switched according to the number of variations. By doing this, among the time-saving end conditions provided for each of the special figures 1 and 2, refer to the timing at which you want to make a special effect, such as the final variation of the time-saving game of special figure 2. It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be displaced by executing the variation of the special figure 1.

The first variation pattern determination means 231 selects a variation pattern by referring to the mode 1 table for 7 variations of the special figure 1 after the 4R jackpot of one time reduction (after the end of the special game), and then selects the mode 0 table. Select the variation pattern of special figure 1 with reference. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231, in the case of nine time-saving jackpots (15R, 10R, 5R, 4R), 7 variations of the special figure 1 after the end of the special game, the variation pattern with reference to the mode 2 table , and then select the variation pattern of special figure 1 by referring to the mode 0 table. The 7 fluctuations of the special figure 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 as the time saving end condition. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define variation patterns for ultrashort variation (approximately 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the Mode 1 and Mode 2 tables are set such that ultra-shortening variation is selected.

When the variation pattern of mode 1 or mode 2 is selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231, the effect determination means 303 displays an effect indicating that the rush effect (the effect mode of the time-saving game) is being prepared. good too. In addition, the effect determination means 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and an advance notice effect pattern, hereinafter the same) for displaying a dummy round effect, and display the dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be content to make it appear as if the special game is currently in progress, or may be content to make it appear as if the final round of the special game is continuing. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a win, it may be possible to select "win notification effect variation (10 seconds)" other than "super shortened variation". The decoration pattern display on the effect display device 60 regarding the variation of the special figure 1 selected by these mode 1 table and mode 2 table is preferably performed so as not to be conspicuous in the corner part of the display area. When the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table change for the fifth time, etc., there is a risk that the player may have hit left without understanding the game characteristics, so a special right-handed guidance effect is displayed. can be anything.

As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. If mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, the change of special figure 1 will occur at the time of left-handed hitting when the series ends due to the change of special figure 2 (except when the time saving ends due to the change of 7 times of special figure 1) This is because there is a possibility of super-shortening variation. In addition, as another modification, when mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, a dedicated effect corresponding to the super-shortened variation of special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determination means 303 is determined in special figure 1 variation after the end of the continuous villa state You may display the exclusive production.

The second variation pattern determination means 232 refers to the mode 3 table to select the variation pattern of the special figure 2 at the first variation of the special figure 2 after the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then select the variation pattern of special figure 2. Since the variation of the special figure 2 in the normal state is a chance to acquire the small hit V, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 in the mode 0 is a variation pattern for chance production. When the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects the variation pattern for the chance performance, the performance determination means 303 selects the variation performance pattern for displaying the chance performance and displays the chance performance.

Also, the mode 3 table is set so that a variation pattern for chance production is selected. The chance production includes a pending charge production. The pending charge production is a production of the content that encourages to accumulate the holding of the special figure 2. The pending charge effect may be (1) a content that encourages shooting a game ball aiming at the second start port 12, (2) a content that encourages hitting to the right, or (3) hitting to the right. The content may suggest that failure to do so will result in a disadvantage. When the variation pattern for the chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and selects the chance effect (holding charge effect) as the special figure change effect. ) are displayed.

The variation pattern of the mode 3 table is a new launch of the game ball in the time saving ~ passage of the operation port ~ open lottery, normal pattern fluctuation ~ normal pattern per ~ normal electric accessory 90 It is assumed that the fluctuation time is longer than the time required to open. stipulate. Here, if there is a loss in the open lottery, it is preferable that the above-mentioned open lottery and normal symbol fluctuation are set for two or more fluctuations as insurance. The reason for this design is that the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 90 includes "when 4 balls (special figure 2 upper limit of the number that can be reserved) are entered", and mode 3 This is because four reserves of special figure 2 cannot be accumulated unless the normal electric accessory 90 is operated at least once while the table is being changed. In addition, if the variation in the case of the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, the time-saving game state will be entered even after the special game, so the effect of immediately notifying the hit is displayed in a shorter time than the above. or may include what is executed.

The second variation pattern determining means 232, in the case of a time-saving 9-time jackpot, (1) refers to the mode 4 table once, (2) refers to the mode 5 table once, (3) refers to the mode 6 table 7 times, (4) Refer to the mode 7 table four times, and select the variation pattern for 13 variations of the special figure 2, for four holdings during the time saving and after the end of the time saving.

The mode 4 table defines the variation pattern for the jackpot end demonstration effect as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 initial variation in time saving. When the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects the variation pattern for the big win end demonstration performance, the performance determination means 303 selects the variation performance pattern for displaying the big win end demonstration and displays the big win end demonstration performance. The jackpot end demo effect includes content that indicates the end of the jackpot (such as the current number of consecutive houses and cumulative acquired ball display), content that indicates entering into time saving, content that encourages hitting to the right, and the rush production mode selection screen (normal character selection such as type, advance notice type, one-time notice type, etc.). The reason why the big hit end demonstration effect is displayed in the special figure 2 first time fluctuation in the time saving is to encourage the right hitting and save the special figure 2 reservation. As another effect, it becomes easy to hide the special figure 1 variation executed before the special figure 2 variation, and it becomes easy to shorten the time from the end of the big hit to the start of the special figure 2 variation as seen from the player.

The effect determining means 303 performs a round effect (for example, the effect of the final round of a special game) when receiving a command (not information including the variation pattern of the mode 4 table) instructing execution of a jackpot end demonstration from the main substrate 200. may continue. In this case, when the player stops shooting the game ball in the final round, the special figure 2 suspension does not occur, and there is a possibility that the end demo (special figure 2 fluctuation effect by the mode 4 table) will not be transitioned forever. Therefore, the effect determination means 303, after a predetermined time has passed since receiving the command for instructing execution of the jackpot end demonstration, produces a content that urges a right-handed shot, in other words, a content that urges a shot aimed at the second starting port 12. may be displayed. Especially when it is the first hit (non-time-saving jackpot) and shifts to the game state of 9 times of working hours corresponding to the rush production, there is often no suspension of special figure 2, so only at the first hit Alternatively, the ending demonstration performance may be executed during the actual jackpot ending demonstration time of the main board 200, in which case the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the variation on the mode 4 table is a big win or a small win, instead of (or in addition to) the big win end demo, the number of rounds (out) obtained in addition to the number of rounds (number of balls out) of the previous special game The number of balls) may be notified, and an effect such as two big wins and two small wins in succession may be provided. Furthermore, at the time of the start demonstration of the previous big and small wins, by executing an effect in advance to notify that the winning will be included in the hold, it is possible to change the change of the hits in the mode 4 table from the end demonstration without any sense of incongruity. However, at that time, in the production of the start demonstration, by setting the type of the subsequent winning to be non-notified, the notification performance of the winning type can be executed when the actual variation of the subsequent winning is executed. Even during the big hit, the players can be made to stand by with an increased sense of anticipation without knowing how many additional balls will be released.

The mode 5 table to mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of effects (first stimulating effect, second stimulating effect, third stimulating effect, ..., normal effect, etc.), and the selection probability of each effect A table in which different values are set for is also acceptable. By dividing the variation pattern table, it is possible to change the appearance frequency of the effect, and for example, it becomes easy to avoid the end of the continuous villa state without even a single fan effect. As a modification, the 2nd variation when the time saving 9 times is given to 4 variations after the time saving omission may determine the variation pattern of the special figure 2 in one variation pattern table. Also, if the variation time of mode 5 > the variation time of mode 6, the order of mode 5 and mode 6 is changed in order to secure a long variation time of the final variation in the time saving and accumulate the hold of special figure 2 to the upper limit may

In the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment, there is no variation pattern table dedicated to the final variation for informing the player of the payout ball at the end timing of the time-saving game, which is often seen in general pachinko game machines. The final variation in this embodiment is a variation where the special figure 2 hold after the end of the time saving is 0 (mainly the 4th variation after the end of the time saving), typically the final variation of the special figure 2 in the continuous state . The reason is that the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is as high as 1/10, so it is better not to make a difference with other fluctuations during the rush until then. In addition, if a variation pattern table dedicated to displaying balls is provided, in an irregular situation such as when the time saving ends due to the special figure 1 fluctuation or when there are only 3 special figures 2 pending at the time of the time saving end, normal During the special figure 2 fluctuation associated with the normal symbol per time, there is a possibility that the ball output notification effect will be displayed (originally a chance effect). In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a variation pattern table dedicated to informing of the released balls.

Here, the configuration of the ball-out notification will be described. The effect determination means 303 is, (1) when the fluctuation of the special symbol that triggers the end of the time saving ends as a result of being out, or (2) the second winning lottery value remaining after the end of the time saving (that is, special figure 2 pending) When the variation based on the above ends with a result of a failure, the effect related to the ball output up to that point (hereinafter referred to as "ball output notification effect") is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The display time of the ball-out notification effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are cases in which the production state to be controlled by the production determination means 303 returns from the time-saving state (rush production) to the normal state. Moreover, the above (1) is a case where there was no suspension of the special figure 2 at the time when the final variation of the time saving ended. When the variation in (1) or (2) results in a big hit (including a small win V), the ball-out notification effect is not executed until the next time-saving end.

The ball-out notification effect is (1) ball-out during special games, (2) ball-out in small winning games, (3) ball-out during time saving (special figure 2 start-up, general prize-winning, etc.) ball), the content to notify only (1), the content to notify (1) + (2), the content to notify (1) + (3), or (1) + (2) + (3) It may be the content to be notified. The notified ball output may be the total ball output during the continuous game period when one or more special games are continuously executed with one or more short time intervals interposed. In addition, the reported number of balls is the sum of the number of balls released during the first hit and the consecutive state shown in FIG. It can be the total.

Also, the number of balls paid out may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of prize balls), which is obtained by subtracting the number of out game balls from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase number). The effect determination means 303 may acquire the number of put-out game balls from the pay-out control board 155 and the number of out-balls from the out-out detection device 39 to count the number of put-out balls.

Effect determination means 303, when the special symbol (that is, special symbol 1) indicating the result of the success/failure determination based on the entry into the first starting port 11 is fluctuating, the ball is put out in a manner with higher visibility than the variable effect. Display the notification effect. Specifically, the effect determination means 303 may temporarily hide the variation screen of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation except when the decorative pattern 61 is stopped and displayed, and display the ball-out notification effect. . Moreover, the effect determination means 303 may display the ball-out notification effect in an area different from the variation display area (stop display area) of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. In addition, when the performance determination means 303 displays the ball-out notification effect, the special figure 1 fluctuation is displayed on a screen smaller than the normal screen (wipe etc.) or a screen smaller than the display screen of the ball-out notification effect. good.

According to this aspect, the variable performance related to the special figure 2 with a relatively high probability of a small hit is displayed without hindrance by the ball-out notification performance, and the time-saving performance mode (rush performance) ends according to various situations. In this case, it is possible to notify the ball to be released in a suitable timing and manner. It should be noted that the effect determining means 303, after the end of the time saving, (1) when both the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are not executed for a predetermined time, or (2) when the variation of the special figure 1 is started (Excluding the case where 10 minutes or more have elapsed after the end of the rush effect), it may be determined that it is the ball-out notification timing, and the ball-out notification effect may be displayed.

3. Configurations related to Chance Production:
Effect determination means 303 is during special figure 2 variation when the variation pattern mode of special figure 2 is mode 0 (in other words, when special figure 2 variation pattern of mode 0 is selected by second variation pattern determination means 232) , to display the chance effect. The chance production is (1) displayed when the special figure 2 reservation occurs when the normal symbol is the first hit in the normal time of FIG. 26 . In addition, (2) after the 4R jackpot of the time saving once, it is displayed during the digestion of the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold) after the end of the time saving. In any case, 4 variations of special figure 2 are assumed.

In addition, when the above (1) and (2), after the 9 times of time saving, when the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold) after the end of time saving is being digested, the game state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state ), but since the variation pattern modes are different (different variation patterns are selected from different variation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is a chance production, and the latter is a rush production.

The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the pending charge effect when the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state. The effect determining means 303 may display a pending charge effect while the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state. The pending charge effect may include the effect of notifying the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 (general electric release effect). In addition, the pending charge effect may include an effect (chance rush effect) that foretells entry into the chance effect.

The pending charge effect and the chance rush effect have a high priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determining means 303 (for example, error display, right-handed display, decoration pattern at the time of stop display, display of the number of reservations, etc. The priority is lower than the information necessary for the game, and the priority is higher than other notice effects during fluctuation). This is because, in the pachinko game machine 500, whether or not the small hit V is acquired greatly affects the ball output, and it is important to accumulate the special figure 2 reservation for the acquisition of the small win V. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is provided with a role (herein referred to as a "special role") with a high probability (for example, about 70%) of expecting a big hit when operated in a specific mode, the special role You may perform the production|presentation by giving priority to the pending|holding charge production|presentation and the chance rush production|presentation. In addition, during the display of the pending charge effect and the chance entry, the effect of activating a role other than the special role (a role with a lower expectation of a big hit than the special role) may be canceled.

Effect determination means 303, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started during the display of the reserved charge effect at normal time, after the display of the reserved charge effect is finished (after the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 is finished), the special figure 2 fluctuation The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is started. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 based on the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2 from the middle. In addition, during the pending charge effect display, the effect determining means 303 may display the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change in an area different from the display area of the pending charge effect in a smaller size than usual. It may be displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the charge effect (wipe display, etc.).

As described with reference to FIG. 43, during the time saving after the 4R big hit of one time saving, the pending charge effect is displayed in the first variation of the special figure 2. - 特許庁The effect determination means 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving (displays a small decoration pattern 61 to make it identifiable that it is in the process of variation). This is because the special figure 1 fluctuation during time saving is fixed for 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly linked to the ball output are not displayed.

The performance determining means 303 suspends both when the normal pattern becomes the first win (long open) in the normal state, during the time saving after the 4R big hit of the time saving one time, and in the case of the first variation of the special figure 2. Display the charge effect. However, the former is an effect during the opening of the normal electric accessary 90, and the latter is different in that it is an effect during the special figure 2 fluctuation. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the normal electric accessory 90 is open, the effect determination means 303 displays the pending charge effect, and changes the special figure 1 (including deviation fluctuation) The variable performance of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is displayed smaller than the reserved charge performance (wipe display, etc.).

The display priority of the pending charge effect in the normal state is set according to the situation of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. For example, if the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is not of high importance such as super reach, the performance determining means 303 displays the pending charge performance in a relatively highly visible mode, and the variable performance of the decorative pattern 61. may be displayed in a manner with relatively low visibility. A highly visible aspect is one of a large display size, conspicuous color (high brightness, high saturation, etc.), addition of effects, and drawing in front of other effects. may contain. In addition, if the variation pattern of special figure 1 is of high importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed, and the pending charge effect is displayed small in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60 (simply made small Instead of things, the form may be changed, such as simplifying the display), and the super reach effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation may be displayed in a large size.

The performance determining means 303 suspends both when the normal pattern becomes the first win (long open) in the normal state, during the time saving after the 4R big hit of the time saving one time, and in the case of the first variation of the special figure 2. A charge performance is displayed, and after the pending charge performance is completed, a chance performance is displayed as a variable performance of the special figure 2.例文帳に追加The effect determining means 303 basically progresses the chance effect based on the player's button operation, but a dedicated effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when a player operates a button, the chance effect develops into a ready-to-win effect via a plurality of advance notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, and the like. On the other hand, when the player does not operate the button, the chance effect develops into a ready-to-win effect through multiple notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc. It is a special effect at the time of operation, and it is not displayed at the time of button operation. A performance determining means 303 may draw a lottery for the performance of the notice 4 when there is no operation when the valid period of the button has passed, or draw lots for both performances to be executed when the button is operated or not when the variation starts. As a specification to do so, it is possible to make it possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a special button image display or a mini character icon display) in which the notice 4 appears without operation during the button valid period.

The performance determining means 303 displays the pending charge performance both when the normal pattern is the first hit (long open) in the normal state and when the special figure 2 is the first variation during the time saving, but the pending charge is displayed. Regarding the special figure 2 suspension that occurred during the display of the effect, it detects whether it hits or misses (so-called look-ahead) based on the prior determination information (previous right or wrong determination information in the first embodiment). A performance determining means 303 prefetches the presence or absence of a symbol big hit and a small win in a normal state, while prefetches only the presence or absence of a small win in a time-saving state. This is because the symbol jackpot of the special figure 2 in the time saving state has a lower profit than the small hit V.

As described in the base technology, the effect determination means 303 displays a pending lamp image indicating the pending number of the special figure 1 and the pending number of the special figure 2 at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 . The effect determination means 303 displays the above-mentioned look-ahead result as a pending change. For example, as a result of the look-ahead, if a certain special figure 2 reservation is a small hit (or a big hit in the design), the production determination means 303 changes the reservation lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation from the normal mode to the small hit (or the big hit in the design). ) is changed to a special mode indicating For example, if the hold lamp image shows a gift box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

Moreover, the production|presentation determination means 303 may further perform the prefetch of special figure 1 reservation. A performance determining means 303 cancels the prefetching result and the prefetching performance being executed until then when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs while executing the prefetching of the special figure 1 suspension, and performs the pending charge performance. may be displayed. As an exception, a look-ahead effect that changes the lottery mode of the variable effect pattern, such as a transition of effect zones that changes the tendency of the effect (types of characters appearing, view of the world, etc.), may be executed as it is.

In addition, even if the effect determining means 303 detects a big hit in the pre-reading of the special figure 1 reservation, if the big hit is achieved by another change in the reservation before the big hit reservation, the subsequent big hit reservation will be performed in the future. The performance for announcing the big hit is not executed. In the state that the special figure 1 big hit is fixed, when a small win V occurs from the first win of the normal pattern, the special figure 1 big hit is digested without accumulating the special figure 2 suspension during the time saving and the number of times of shortening the time is reset. because it becomes possible. This is because, for example, there will be a strategy that increases the possibility of a new small win V by changing the time-saving one time to nine times.

4. Configuration related to Renzhuang state:
The continuous state is a mode in which a direct transition is made at 50% of the normal special figure 1 big hit, and a direct transition is made at the small hit V after the normal normal symbol first hit. Typically, 9 times of time reduction + 4 times of remaining hold are executed during the time reduction in the consecutive house state, and the special figure 2 lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 is executed a total of 13 times. The probability of getting a small hit or a big hit during the 9 times of short time is about 61%, and the probability of getting a small hit or a big hit in the remaining 4 times is about 34%, so the probability that the continuous state will continue is It is about 75%.

A performance determining means 303 displays a jackpot end demonstration and a pending charge performance (right-handed navigation) in accordance with the variation pattern of mode 4 at the first time variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving state of consecutive mansions. Production determination means 303, in the time saving of the continuous state, the variation of the special figure 1 is executed before the first variation of the special figure 2 (if the special figure 2 reservation is 0), and if the special figure 1 was a big hit, special During the final round effect of the game (or during the final demonstration effect), a predetermined accessory (special accessory, etc.) may be operated to output an effect as if the big win had been extended. As another aspect, the production determining means 303 suspends the round production of the special game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 that becomes a big hit, and rewinds and reproduces it. You can make it look like In addition, when the special figure 2 variation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit, the same effect can be executed.

A performance determining means 303 displays a rush performance as the variable performance of the special figure 2 during the time saving of the consecutive villa state. The rush effect is designed assuming that the maximum number of special 2 reservations (4 pieces) will remain at the end of the time saving. In the pachinko game machine 500, the expectation of the small hit V is high even with the remaining hold after the time saving ends (small win probability 1/10), so it is important that 4 special figure 2 holds are accumulated at the time of the time saving end time. . Therefore, the effect determination means 303 displays the pending charge effect even in the special figure 2 variation of the final round (9th time) in the time saving of the consecutive villa state.

The holding charge effect in the time-saving special figure 2 final variation is also the content that encourages the launch of the game ball aiming at the second start port 12, like the holding charge effect in the time-saving special figure 2 initial variation. The effect determination means 303 may display the reserved charge effect in the special figure 2 final variation of the time saving superimposed on the corner of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加In the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display the pending charge effect only for the final fluctuation (the first fluctuation is separate), but the special figure for a short time in the final fluctuation When adopting a specification in which 2 variations can be selected, the pending charge effect may be displayed from the 7th or 8th variation.

It is assumed that a player accustomed to a type 1 type 1 game machine that does not have a small hit V is likely to stop during a long time fluctuation, but at least by displaying a pending charge effect at the final fluctuation , the player can be prevented from missing an opportunity to obtain a very large profit such as the small win V.

In the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment, the final variation (9th variation) of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to have a long symbol fixing time. The symbol fixing time is the time during which the stop display of the special symbol continues from the time when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and is the time for delaying the start of the next symbol variation based on the pending lottery value. The symbol fixation time of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving is set to the opening time (6 seconds) or more of the normal electric accessory 90 associated with the first hit of the normal symbol, and is set to 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The design fixing time at other times may be shorter than the design fixing time of the special figure 2 final variation in time saving, and may be 1 second or 0.5 seconds, for example.

On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by the special figure 2 fluctuation, here when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 reaches 9 times, the special figure Terminate the time saving at the stop display of 2. In other words, the time saving is ended before the pattern fixed time transition. Therefore, even if the normal symbol becomes the first winning just before the end of the time saving, the long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixing time. And, in the special symbol fixed time, since the time saving state has ended, even if the normal symbol starts to change anew, the probability of winning the first prize is as rare as 1/590. This prevents the special figure 2 suspension of +1 from occurring with respect to the special figure 2 suspension 4 pieces at the end of the time saving. This is because when the special figure 2 suspension of +1 occurs, it is undesirable in that the possibility of occurrence of a small hit increases more than designed, and in that the chance presentation is displayed immediately after the rush presentation. In addition, when the normal pattern becomes the first hit at 1/590 after the end of the time saving, the holding charge effect, which is the normal electric opening effect, may be executed in the same way as the normal time. In such a case, The variation of the special figure 2 additionally generated after the 4 variations for the rush performance is the variation of the mode 0 table, and the chance performance is continuously executed after the rush performance. Although the production data will increase, if it is possible to provide a variable production pattern for rush production even for the fluctuation pattern of the mode 0 table, the production determination means 303 can establish continuity with the rush production. may be determined, and control may be performed so that the rush effect is continued even when the mode 0 table fluctuates.

The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before the end of the time saving and after the end of the time saving. For example, the effect determining means 303 selects the variable effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect of the same or similar contents in both the mode 6 variation pattern and the mode 7 variation pattern, To display a rush effect with the same or similar content. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the time is being reduced (state in which right-handed hitting is advantageous) even after the end of time-saving (state in which left-handed hitting is advantageous).

The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a "recommended right-handed image") that urges the player to hit right during time saving. The production determination means 303 starts from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production (that is, the 1st variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the time saving), or after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production. From a fixed time, instead of the right-handed recommended image, an image urging the player to hit left-handed (referred to as a "left-handed recommended image") may be displayed.

However, since the contents of the production are the same before and after the end of the time saving, it may cause confusion for the player if the left hand is strongly recommended, and after the end of the continuous state, the ball notification effect is displayed. Therefore, it is not desirable to accumulate special figure 1 reservations in advance. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image smaller than the right-handed recommended image so as not to stand out. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the left-handed shot recommendation image momentarily or for a short period of time, or may display it temporarily or at predetermined time intervals.

In addition, the production determination means 303 hides the right-handed recommended image from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production, or from the symbol fixing time after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush production. , the left-handed recommended image may also be hidden. In this case, left-handed hitting may be recommended based only on the lighting mode of the status display lamp 502 . It should be noted that the timing of starting to display the left-handed recommended image conspicuously as an effect is preferably at the same time as the ball-out notification effect or after the ball-out notification effect. At this time, when the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, it is preferable to display the left-handed recommended image in accordance with the timing when the decorative pattern stops and the timing which does not overlap in order to notify the game result. .

The fluctuating production pattern for the rush production can include (1) 4 to 8 times of pseudo-fluctuation production (minimum of 4 times), (2) advance notice production, and (3) ready-to-win production (only some fluctuation production patterns). , (1), (1) + (2), (1) + (2) + (3), the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special figure 2 ends. Generally, in the small-hit high-probability pattern (special figure 2) in the small-hit V spec, only the look-ahead information regarding the success or failure can be notified in advance. Further, regarding the reserved lottery value, the design and variation pattern are unknown until the design variation based on the lottery value is executed. On the other hand, players are accustomed to the continuous look-ahead effect including symbols and variation patterns in conventional machines, and may feel uncomfortable without such a look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 500, the degree of expectation is displayed by a pseudo look-ahead effect during a pseudo-fluctuation effect that is similar in appearance to the look-ahead effect of the conventional model. In the pseudo-fluctuation effect, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped (temporarily stopped) for a time less than a predetermined reference value (0.5 seconds, etc.), and then the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern 61 is resumed. Although it is a change of times, it looks like it has been changed multiple times. Along with the temporary stop or re-fluctuation of the pseudo-variation, (2) a notice effect and (3) a pseudo-forecast effect suggesting the execution expectation level and execution content of the ready-to-win effect are performed. As an example of the pseudo-read-ahead effect, the combination of decorative patterns categorized into the same type (color, form, character, etc.) is continuously temporarily stopped, and the effect pattern displayed around the screen is temporarily stopped. There is an effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to a high-expectation one for each re-variation.

A performance determining means 303 responds to the variation of the immediately preceding special figure 2 according to the advance determination information of the lottery value corresponding to the next pattern variation as a prefetch performance in the original sense that affects the next pattern variation. A zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation effect. The zone shift symbol stop look-ahead effect is a content that foretells that the next symbol change will be displayed in the high expectation effect mode. In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays the zone transition pattern stop look-ahead effect with the current change when the next change is a small hit of the special figure 2 or when it is out (executes a guess), and on the other hand, the next time If the propriety of the variation is the special figure 2 symbol jackpot, it is not necessary to execute the zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect in this variation (because it is low profit). Also, even if the next variation is a small hit, if the current variation develops to (3) reach production, the result of the variation (decorative pattern stop mode) is focused, so the zone The look-ahead effect using the transition pattern may be excluded from the lottery. Therefore, this look-ahead performance determines whether or not the next holding is appropriate each time the variation of the special figure 2 is started, and controls to execute a look-ahead lottery according to the type of variation pattern of the variation to be started. On the contrary, when the final stop symbol of the variation is the zone transition symbol in spite of the reach variation, a method of announcing that the next variation is determined to be hit may be employed.

The effect determination means 303 hides the holding lamp image during the rush effect. This is because if the number of pending games is notified by the pending lamp image, the significance of the above-described pseudo-fluctuation effect is lost. On the other hand, the effect determination means 303 displays the remaining variation frequency of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during time saving). For example, in the second variation of special figure 2 in time saving (first variation of rush production start), since the number of remaining variations of special figure 2 is 8 times, "8 + extra" is displayed, and special figure 2 For the second variation, "7+Extra" is displayed. "Extra" shows the fluctuation due to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving. It should be noted that the production determining means 303, when the special figure 2 suspension digested after the time saving is actually occurred, for example, when the suspension 4 occurs after the 6th variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving, "extra ” may be displayed. In addition, the display of the number of remaining fluctuations may be the number including the current fluctuation or the number of fluctuations up to the end of the time saving excluding the current fluctuation. In addition, the remaining number of times display may not be expressed directly as "remaining N times", but may employ a roundabout expression such as "Nth day/8th day + extra". At this time, time elapses such as Nth day (morning), Nth day (noon), Nth day (night), 10:00 AM on Nth day, 2:00 PM on Nth day, and 8:00 PM on Nth day. Along with the display, the (1) pseudo-fluctuation period, (2) notice effect period, and (3) ready-to-win effect period may be separately displayed. Furthermore, the minute part (and the hour part) of the time in the 12-hour notation is advanced for each pseudo-variation, and the expectation level of the hit in the case of a certain timing "PM 5:55 on the Nth day" It is also possible to adopt a method of notifying that the value is high or that the win is certain.

5. Configurations related to the game standby demo:
The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a predetermined game standby demonstration image when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not changed for a predetermined standby demonstration transition time. The game standby demo may be a moving image showing themes, motifs, stories, outlines, etc. in the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 500 .

The standby demonstration transition time is set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal pattern when the normal pattern holding means 242 reserves the normal pattern lottery value to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of pending normal drawing lottery values is 4, and the maximum fluctuation time (normal state) of 1 fluctuation in the case that the normal pattern is off or the second hit is 10 seconds, and the first The maximum time for one fluctuation in the case of winning is 15 seconds (in normal conditions). In this case, when the normal pattern lottery value is suspended to the upper limit, the longest time when the first hit (long open) of the normal pattern under the situation where the special pattern is not executed is notified the latest. is 45 seconds (10 seconds x 3 pending + 15 seconds x 1 pending). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set longer than 45 seconds, for example, 60 seconds.

As described above, the effect determination means 303 determines whether the game ball aiming at the second start port 12 is released for a long time due to the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Display a pending charge effect that encourages firing. By setting the standby demo transition time longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal pattern when the normal pattern lottery value is held to the upper limit, the normal pattern becomes the first hit during the display of the game standby demonstration. It is possible to avoid the accessory 90 from being released for a long time, in other words, it is possible to avoid the display of the pending charge effect during the display of the game standby demo. As a result, it becomes easy to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to obtain the small win V without noticing the pending charge effect. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the first hit of the normal symbols has a great influence on the game performance, it is preferable to treat the variable display of the normal symbols as a state in which the game is progressing. To prevent the progress state of a game based on variable display from being erroneously recognized as non-playing due to the display of a game standby demonstration.

As a modification, the effect determination means 303 determines that the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of prize winning openings or the ball entry opening provided in the game area 81 is not detected during the standby demonstration transition time, and If special figure 1 or special figure 2 is not fluctuating, an image of game standby demo may be displayed. The plurality of winning holes or ball-entering holes include a first starting hole 11 , a second starting hole 12 , a big winning hole 20 , a first working hole 31 , a second working hole 32 and a general winning hole 33 . The presence or absence of a winning ball may be detected by a sensor (first starting winning detection device 16, second starting winning detection device 17, etc.) provided in each of the winning opening and the winning opening. This modification also has the same effect as the above embodiment.

As another modification, the pachinko game machine 500 is provided with the first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 close to each other in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has passed through the first operating port 31 is almost certainly (or 100% ) The game area 81 (game nail, pinwheel, etc.) may be configured so that the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Also, the game area 81 may be configured so that the game balls that enter the first start hole 11 are limited to the game balls that have passed through the first operation hole 31 .

in this case,
The standby demo transition time may be set so that the average variation time + standby demonstration transition time for digesting 4 reserved special symbols (here special symbol 1) > the maximum variation time for 4 reserved normal symbols. For example, if the maximum fluctuation time of 4 reserved normal symbols is 45 seconds and the average fluctuation time for digesting 4 reserved special symbols is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds, etc.) ) may be set. This modification also has the same effect as the above embodiment.

The present invention has been described above based on the first embodiment. The first embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications are possible in combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. Modified examples are given below.

Modification 1 will be described. As already described in part in the first embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays the pending charge effect when the normal electric accessory 90 is released with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. may Then, during the display of the pending charge effect, the effect determining means 303 may reduce (wipe display) the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. - 特許庁For example, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the pending charge effect. Also, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the pending charge effect is not executed.

In modification 1 as well as in the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of special figure 1 in the normal game during time saving is shorter than the average fluctuation time of special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment ). In the modification 1, the effect determination means 303 continuously displays the jackpot end demonstration and the pending charge effect from the end of the final round in the special game to the end of the first time fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time saving. The performance determining means 303 hides the variation performance of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 while displaying the pending charge performance in the normal game during time saving.

In addition, during the time saving, the effect determination means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1, and only the stop mode, which is the result of the variable effect, is a simple pattern (smaller than the normal decorative pattern 61 symbol). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be indicated by simple symbols. Further, when the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 occurs during time saving, the effect determination means 303 may report the symbol jackpot by the operation of the special role described in the first embodiment.

In this way, the effect determination means 303 of the first modification reduces the visibility of the variable effect of the special figure 1 during the time saving more than during the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 accompanying the first hit of the normal symbol at the normal time. display. In this way, when the importance of the variable performance of the special figure 1 is relatively low, by displaying the variable performance in an inconspicuous manner or by hiding it, the player can make a profit such as a pending charge performance. It is possible to emphasize and present other renditions that are more important for obtaining .

Modification 2 regarding the second starting port 12 will be described. 44 is a perspective view of the starting port unit 510. FIG. The starting opening unit 510 is a component in which the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the plurality of general winning openings 33 are integrated. The starting port unit 510 is provided below the center ornament 64 . That is, the second starting port 12 of this modified example is provided in the central lower part of the game area 81 . FIG. 45 is a top view of the starting port unit 510, with the front at the bottom.

46 is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 510, more specifically, a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 45. FIG. The left-handed flow path 512 is a flow path that guides left-handed game balls to the left out port 514 . The right-handed flow path 516 is a flow path that guides the right-handed game ball to the right out port 518 . A game nail, a pinwheel, etc., in the game area 81 are set so that only a game ball that has been hit to the right, in other words, that has flowed through the right channel of the center ornament 64 can flow into the right-handed channel 516. .

The slide plate 520 functions as the normal electric accessory 90 , and in this modified example functions as a guide member that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right-handed flow path 516 to the second start port 12 . When the slide plate 520 is retracted, the game ball (the game ball 524 in FIG. 46) flows from the right hitting channel 516 to the right out port 518 and does not flow into the second starting port 12 . The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and protrudes so as to block the entrance of the second starting port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. This reliably prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 12 . Further, the blocking member 522 is in a retracted state when the slide plate 520 is in a projecting state, and opens the entrance of the second starting port 12 .

When the normal pattern is hit, the opening/closing control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the normal electric accessory 90 to the open state, but the opening/closing control means 275 of the present modification causes the slide plate 520 to protrude. In addition, the blocking member 522 is controlled to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right out port 518 is blocked, the entrance of the second starting port 12 is opened, and the game ball rolling in the right hitting flow path 516 flows into the second starting port 12 . According to this starting port unit 510, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 12 in other situations while allowing the ball to enter the second starting port 12 at the time of winning the normal symbol.

Modification 3 will be described. When the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (typically at the time of the first hit), the production determination means 303 cancels the pending charge production (general electric open production). It may be displayed. This is for displaying the pending charge performance in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the time saving after the end of the big hit. If you save the special figure 2 hold first, it will be easier for the special figure 1 hold to remain at the end of the continuous state due to the special figure 2 priority digestion, but at the end of the continuous state, a special This is because it is better not to execute the FIG. 1 variation as much as possible. According to this configuration, when the first win of the normal symbol is stop-displayed during the variation of the special figure 1 and the pending charge performance is not displayed in spite of that, the big hit of the special figure 1 is determined. It should be noted that, in the normal state immediately after the end of the continuous state, if the pre-reading of the special figure 1 reservation is prohibited, it can be said that the important production related to the special figure 1 fluctuation is difficult to display during the ball notification production, so the special figure 1 A pending charge effect may be displayed during hit variation, and special figure 2 pending may be accumulated. In addition, the timing when the normal pattern becomes the first hit is not during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, but in the look-ahead of the special figure 1, the hit is confirmed (for example, it is a premium pending display, and the number of time reduction after the big hit is undefined) is being executed, it may have a prohibition pattern that prohibits display. By doing so, before the hit confirmation suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, the hit of the special figure 1 is shortened to 9 times when the small hit or the big hit of the special figure 2 is shifted to the rush state. This is because

Modification 4 will be described. If the continuous state (time saving + 4 reservations) ends in an irregular manner, specifically, if the time saving ends with 7 changes in special figure 1, or if the special figure 2 at the end of time saving ends 3 times In the case of less than 1, the variation pattern mode of special figure 2 at normal time can be for rush production (mode 3 to mode 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal pattern occurs at normal times, the variation pattern for the rush performance or the variation pattern for the pending charge performance is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 variation, and an unintended performance is displayed due to design. There is a possibility of doing so.

In order to cope with this, the effect determination means 303 is after the special figure 1 fluctuates a predetermined number of times after the time saving transition or after the time saving end (for example, after the special figure 1 fluctuation ends 10 times after the time saving transition), rush in the normal game in the normal state When the variation pattern for production is selected, the variation pattern for chance production may be selected as an alternative to display the chance production. Alternatively, the effect determination means 303 may display a telop or the like indicating that the effect/display is irregular while displaying the rush effect under the above circumstances.

Modification 5 will be described. Time saving game, as described above, because it may end in any of the special figures 1 and 2 variations, for example, when the variation pattern table of special figure 2 is in the selection state of mode 6, special figure 1 When the time-saving game ends based on the variation, and when the time-saving game ends based on the variation of the special figure 2 when the special figure 1 is mode 2, a small hit is won and the ball enters the specific area. It may be controlled to set the mode of the variation pattern table of special figure 1 and special figure 2 to "0" when it is not done. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected in the special figure 2 reserve generated from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

Modification 6 will be described. In the rush effect of the first embodiment, 9 fluctuations in time reduction are fixed, and 1 fluctuation is relatively long (10 seconds or longer), so it is assumed that the player will make a stop shot (stop firing). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of times of time reduction in the continuous state is made indefinite (for example, it is determined from 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 9 times, 13 times, etc. according to the winning pattern from among multiple types), and 1 variation is also compared It may be set to a relatively short time (about 5 seconds). In this way, it is possible to suppress the stop strike by setting the specification with a risk that the special figure 2 reservation cannot be saved when the stop strike is made.

Modification 7 will be described. It may be configured to easily create the fifth variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the time saving. For example, (1) the opening end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be set to the reservation upper limit number of special figure 2 +N (N is a positive integer). Also, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of the time saving may be set to the same length as the normal time or a shorter length than the normal time. In addition, (3) the ball sensor (second start winning detection device 17) of the second start opening 12 is placed at the back position away from the entrance of the second start opening 12, and the fourth special figure 2 after the time saving end After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new special figure 2 hold may be more likely to occur. Moreover, the above (1) to (3) may be combined. In addition, in the case of the configuration of the modification 4, instead of preferential digestion of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be drawn in parallel, or may be drawn in order of winning.

Modification 8 will be described. When the effect determining means 303 detects, by prefetching, that there is another small win in the remaining reserve at the time of pattern change to win a small win (at the time of small win V change, hereinafter referred to as "current time change"), this time change. A special big-hit performance different from the normal big-hit performance may be displayed for the big-hit performance (for example, a special game performance) associated with the small win V. The special big-hit performance may include the content of informing that it is confirmed that two 15R big-hits will occur. When adopting the modification 7, the small hit V in the special figure 2 may be only the 15R big hit.

Also, when the small win V in the special figure 2 is distributed to a plurality of types of big wins as in the first embodiment, the fact that the small win V accompanying this time variation is the maximum profit is reported by the big win performance, and after the big win is finished. It is also possible to display a continuation performance to make it look as if the big win is continuing, and to display a big win performance to make it look like an extra win at the time of the next small win V.例文帳に追加In this case, the number of rounds of the next small win V (additional amount for the extra win) is unknown at the time of the previous small win V and cannot be notified. Additional amount (number of rounds) for extra per may be notified at the start of symbol variation related to small hit V.

Modification 9 will be described. A specific example of the production will be described here. (a) and (b) of FIG. 47 are chance effects in normal times (effects displayed in accordance with the long opening of normal symbols in a normal game in a normal state, and can also be said to be a general electric opening effect, a rush effect, and a pending charge effect. ) shows an example. FIG. 47(a) shows a mode of the chance production 530 when the variation production of the special figure 1 is not a predetermined content with a high degree of expectation such as super reach. In the chance production 530 of FIG. 47( a ), a special figure 2 reserved image 532 indicating the contents of prompting to hit to the right and the number of reserved special figures 2 (two pieces in the figure) is displayed in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect 536 of the special figure 1, which had been displayed in a large size in the center of the screen before the display of the chance effect 530, is reduced and displayed in a wipe 534 which is a small area in the corner of the screen. Also, even if the special figure 1 and special figure 2 fluctuation effects are not executed, the normal standby screen is wiped and displayed, and even if the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are started, the chance production Display the variable effect as it is on the wipe screen until is completed.

FIG. 47(b) shows a display mode of the chance production 530 when the variation production of the special figure 1 is a predetermined content with a high degree of expectation such as super reach. In the figure, a super reach variable effect 536 including a super reach object 538 such as a character battle image is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed small on a wipe 534 in the corner of the screen. 47(a) and 47(b) show the proper use of the chance effects during normal times, but the timing for judging these proper uses is properly used in the form of the variable effects that are executed at the start timing of the chance effects. For example, in the variation where the variation production of special figure 1 becomes super reach, if it is before the transition to super reach, the variation production is executed with the wipe display shown in FIG. continues to be displayed (at the end of the chance presentation, that is, at the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory 90, the screen returns to the super reach screen). It should be noted that the specification is not limited to this example, and the specification may be such that the mode of FIG. 47(a) is changed to the mode of FIG. In addition, it is possible to change the aspect of the chance production depending on whether or not a high expectation pattern such as super reach is selected as the variable production pattern of the special figure 1, but if it is configured in such a way, It becomes a specification that the transition to high-expectation production can be detected first immediately after the fluctuation starts before the transition to super reach.

FIG. 48 shows an example of a chance effect (for example, an effect displayed when the variation pattern mode is mode 3, which can also be called a pending charge effect) during the time saving game. Even in the chance production 530 during the time-saving game, the content of prompting the player to hit to the right and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the variation production of the special figure 1 is hidden during the time saving game, and the chance production is made to appear as the variation production of the first variation of the time saving game of the special figure 2. there is Therefore, the change effect 536 by the wipe 534 is not displayed, which is different from the normal chance effect. The reason why the chance effect is issued as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is that if the variable effect is executed only to notify the success or failure, especially in the case of one time reduction, the game property of accumulating four reservations. This is because the player cannot be fully understood, and the player may be disadvantaged. It should be noted that, during the variation production when the first time-saving variation of the special figure 2 is a hit, the chance production may be non-executed, or the production for winning or failing notification may be executed after the chance production. may

(Second embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko game machine 500 of the second embodiment has, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko game machine 500 of the first embodiment, a feature related to control or performance around small win development big wins. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the first embodiment, and omits the description of the common points. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 500 of the second embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements described in the base technology and the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals.

An overview of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has the following five features as main features.

Features 1. Acquisition of balls in small winning games:
Conventional machines equipped with small winning development and big winning have used two large winning openings, one for obtaining a V having a specific area and another for obtaining a large number of balls to be released. Since the opening of the V-acquisition big prize-winning opening and the opening of the ball-getting big prize-winning opening are due to the operation of different special electric accessories, the number of prize balls and the number of entering balls (regular count number) is configured to be small, the small winning game is terminated early, and the big winning game is started early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment (small winning development big winning machine), the number of special electric accessories (big winning opening) is one. By opening a big winning hole 15 times at maximum in the small winning game, many prize balls can be obtained in the small winning game, and new playability and amusement are realized.

Feature 2. Small hit game production:
To execute a performance for making a player understand the possibility of winning a ball in a small winning game (that is, the first round of a small winning development big winning) after winning a V prize in the small winning game (that is, after acquiring the right to win the big winning). to prompt the player to shoot.

Feature 3. Small hit development Jackpot production:
From the first round of the big win (that is, the small winning game), it is possible to expect to win prize balls equivalent to one round of the big win. , the display of "1 round" is started in order to notify that prize balls equivalent to one round in the big hit can be obtained.

Feature 4. Production at the start of the jackpot in the small hit development jackpot:
Between the 1st round (small winning game) and the 2nd round (first unit game of the special game) in the small winning development big winning, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain is executed.

Feature 5. Small hit ahead:
By foreseeing the holding of the small win, the fact that the next small win development big win can be acquired in a short time is notified until the current small win development big win is completed.

The above five features will be described in order below.
<Feature 1. Outgoing ball acquisition property in small winning game>
FIG. 49 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the second embodiment. The second starting port 12 has an ordinary electric accessory 90 which is a ball entry variation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of a game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called a so-called electric tulip (electric chew), and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be any of a slide type (for example, a slide member advances forward or retreats backward to make it easier to enter a ball), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

The special game control means 260 operates the special electric accessory 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 causes the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 to open the big winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small winning game control means 265 operates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small winning game. The small winning game control means 265 causes the opening/closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506, and opens the big winning opening 20 multiple times during one small winning game.

The big prize winning port 20 includes an opening/closing member (slide plate 540 described later) for switching between an open state and a closed state of the big prize winning port 20 . When the big winning hole 20 is closed, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view schematically showing the configuration of the big prize winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. The slide plate 540 can also be said to be an opening/closing door of the big prize opening 20 . The slide plate 540 has two states: a closed state covering the big prize opening 20 (box-shaped member 542) as shown in FIG. can be displaced between When the slide plate 540 is in the closed state, the large winning opening 20 is also in the closed state, and when the sliding plate 540 is in the open state, the large winning opening 20 is also in the open state.

The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20 . A slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the big winning opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined downward to the left with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 tends to accelerate, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game ball cannot be successfully guided inside the box-shaped member 542. Fear arises.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by making the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 progress in a zigzag manner, the moving distance of the game ball is increased and the momentum of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 is reduced. By doing so, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the big winning hole 20 is repeatedly opened for a very short time, the time for which the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 is lengthened, and the game ball enters during the short time opening. make it more likely.

FIG. 50(a) shows the big winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is closed. As shown in the figure, within the range where the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. A plurality of projections 546 a on the game board side and a plurality of projections 546 b on the transparent plate side are alternately arranged along the flow path on the slide plate 540 . A plurality of projections 546 b on the transparent plate side are attached to a transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542 . By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 covering the front side of the game board 80, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate 103 is opened for maintenance of the game machine. It is possible to prevent it from becoming easily damaged. Further, by forming the transparent plate 544 from a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the big winning hole 20 from being impaired. In a modified example, the slide plate 540 may be provided with protrusions or recesses for forming a zigzag flow path.

By alternately providing a plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b on the slide plate 540, the game ball can be moved in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game ball tends to decelerate. For example, game balls are continuously shot (for example, one ball is shot at an interval of 0.6 seconds) toward the big winning hole 20, rolls on the slide plate 540, and falls to the left side of the big winning hole 20. If the speed is decelerated so that it takes 2 to 3 seconds to complete, there will always be about 3 to 5 game balls on the slide plate 540 . As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short period of time, a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided inside the big winning hole 20 as shown in FIG. 50(b). Game balls falling into the inside of the box-like member 542 pass through the passage port 548 one by one, and winning is detected.

The number of game balls staying on the slide plate 540 and the staying time can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the big winning opening 20, the number and intervals of the protrusions 546a and 546b, and the like. In this embodiment, it is designed so that 1 to 3 game balls stay on the slide plate 540 when continuous right-hand shots are continued, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short period of time (for example, 0.052 seconds). , the box-shaped member 542 is adjusted so that approximately 1 to 3 game balls enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short-time opening. Therefore, according to the configuration of the big winning hole 20 of the present embodiment, if an appropriate shooting operation (for example, right hitting) is performed at an appropriate timing during the small winning game (for example, after the right hitting notification), the game ball can be thrown into the big winning hole. 20 can almost certainly enter the ball.

Note that the configuration of the large prize winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 50 is merely an example, and a large winning prize opening 20 having a structure different from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening/closing member (slide plate 540) of the big winning slot 20 may include a plurality of opening/closing members provided at separate positions, and the opening/closing of the plurality of opening/closing members may be controlled simultaneously.

FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the large winning opening 20, and particularly showing the configuration of the lower area 550 of the large winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the large winning opening 20 according to the control of the large winning opening solenoid 92 . The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to open state, and operates the sliding plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the large winning opening 20, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the large winning opening 20. and The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to a closed state, and operates the sliding plate 540 so as to block the entrance of the large winning opening 20, thereby preventing game balls from flowing into the large winning opening 20. and The game balls entering the big winning hole 20 once flow to the left and flow into the lower region 550 of the second big winning hole 22 from the passage hole 548 through which the balls can pass one by one. The big winning detection device 25 detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20 in order to award a prize ball. do.

A discharge path 554 is provided in the lower area 550 of the big winning opening 20 . The ejection path 554 is a path for ejecting game balls that have entered the large winning opening 20 to the outside of the large winning opening 20, and is typically a path for discharging to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 500. . Further, in the lower region 550 , a specific region opening/closing device 552 is provided in the middle of the flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554 . The specific area, which is the condition for transitioning to the small hit development big hit, corresponds to the area under the specific area opening and closing device 552, and when the specific area opening and closing device 552 is opened, it becomes possible to pass through, and the specific area opening and closing device 552 is closed. Passage is not possible if

The specific area opening/closing device 552 operates to switch between an open state that allows passage through the specific area and a closed state that disables passage through the specific area. The specific area opening/closing device 552 has a slide member or valve member that operates according to the control of the specific area opening/closing solenoid 506 . The specific area opening/closing device 552 operates to open the flow path to the specific area, thereby entering an open state in which the passage of the game ball to the specific area becomes possible, and operates to block the flow path to the specific area. This results in a closed state in which passage of the game ball to the specific area is disabled. The specific area opening/closing device 552 shifts to an open state with the opening of the large winning opening 20, and after the large winning opening 20 is closed, it is expected that the game balls inside flow down to the position of the specific area opening/closing device 552. After waiting for the designed value, the large winning opening is delayed from the closed state transition to the closed state.

The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided below the specific area opening/closing device 552 and detects passage of a game ball in the specific area. The specific area passage detection device 504 generates specific area passage information indicating the passage of the game ball when it passes through the specific area. Upon receiving the specific area passing information, the entering ball determining means 201 of the main substrate 200 determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area.

In the second embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the small winning game end when the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, both the operation end condition of the special electric role product 556 in the unit game of the special game and the operation end condition of the special electric role product 556 in the small winning game, the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 10 pieces. Including. Specifically, the special game control means 260, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed for one unit game of the special game, or when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 reaches 10, the end condition is satisfied and terminated. The small-hit game control means 265 terminates the small-hit game when a predetermined time elapses or when the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 reaches 10, assuming that the end condition is satisfied. Note that the V winning is not a condition for ending the small winning game, and the small winning game continues until the ending condition is satisfied even after the V winning.

One opening time of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加In addition, the small winning game control means 265, in one small winning game (during one operation of the special electric accessory 556), via the opening and closing control means 275, to open the big winning opening 20 for a short time. It can be repeated a predetermined upper limit number of times. This upper limit number is the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 (that is, 10) or more, which is the condition for ending one unit game and the small winning game in the special game (in other words, the condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory 556). is the number of times In the embodiment, the number of hits is 15, which is more than the number of hits. When the number of balls entering the large winning opening 20 during the small winning game reaches 10, the small winning game control means 265 even if the number of times the large winning opening 20 is opened during the small winning game is less than the upper limit number (15 times). , at that time, the big winning opening 20 is closed and the small winning game is ended.

The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning hole 20 for a short period of time (opening time 0.052 seconds), and Repeat the set of short closures (closure time 1 second). In addition, the small winning game control means 265, for opening the big winning hole 20 for the 13th time and the 14th time in the small winning game, opens the big winning hole 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds), , a set of long closures (closing time of 4 seconds). In addition, the small winning game control means 265 executes the operation of opening time 0.052 seconds for opening the 15th big winning opening 20 in the small winning game, and when the 15th opening is completed, or the operation end condition 3.5 second closing is executed when a specified number of game balls enter.

According to the configuration of feature 1, only one big winning hole is arranged in the game area 81, in other words, the big winning hole for obtaining the V prize and the big winning hole for increasing the number of balls to be put out are shared. Thus, it becomes possible to secure a wide board surface area for displaying effects, activating accessories, etc., and enhancing the interest of the effects. Also, in the small winning game, since the same special electric accessory 556 as during the special game is activated, the common number of prize balls is paid out, and the small winning game is controlled in the above-described open mode. Based on this, it is possible to expect a predetermined number of balls to be entered, which is the condition for terminating the operation of the special electric accessory, so that it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as in one unit game of the special game, and sufficient balls are paid to the player. can give you a feeling.

As described with reference to FIG. 50, when the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the big winning hole 20, so that one time of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected to enter. However, for reasons such as the player not noticing the start of the small winning game, there is a possibility that the right hitting of the game ball will be delayed. Therefore, the number of opening times of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game is set to be equal to or more than the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20, which is the condition for ending the small winning game (in the embodiment, the number of times is larger than the number of entering balls). Then, in the small winning game, it becomes easy to obtain the same number of balls as the one-time unit game of the special game.

Further, the closing time of the 13th and 14th openings of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game is relatively lengthened, thereby prompting the player's awareness and allowing the small winning game to be played without shooting the game balls. end, that is, the opportunity to win the small win development is missed, and the time saving ends based on the occurrence of the small win game, so that the occurrence of the small win (small win V) is originally high probability. It becomes easy to prevent the fluctuation of the received second special symbol from becoming difficult to execute. However, if the number of times of closing for a long time is increased too much, the number of out balls (so-called waste balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20 increases when the player continuously shoots game balls. Therefore, by closing the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game twice for a long time, it is possible to suppress the end of the small winning game without winning the V prize and suppress the increase in the number of out balls.

In the second embodiment, the opening time of each opening of the big winning opening 20 during the small winning game is 0.052 seconds. may differ from other opening times. For example, the small winning game control means 265 may open the big winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the big winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small winning game. . In other words, it is sufficient that the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20 is opened ten times or more during the time when it is assumed that at least one game ball enters the big winning opening 20 .

<Feature 2. Small hit game production>
A performance determining means 303 causes a performance display device 60 to display a predetermined performance image during the small winning game, and changes the display mode of the performance image according to the entry of the ball into the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game. . This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determination means 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, with a predetermined probability). As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small winning game.

The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small winning game. As described above, the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 (that is, the prescribed count number), which is the condition for ending the small winning game, can be said to be the upper limit of the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 during the small winning game. It is 10 balls, which is the same as the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20, which is the condition for ending the unit game in the game.

FIG. 52 shows an example of an effect during a small winning game. The performance determining means 303 causes the performance display device 60 to display a small winning game performance screen 560 during execution of the small winning game. The small winning game effect screen 560 includes a right hitting instruction image 562 for prompting the player to hit to the right, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and a ball entry number notification image 566 as a first effect image. The V notification image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number-of-entered-balls notification image 566 includes the same number of treasure chest images as the number of balls entered into the big-winning opening 20 (10 balls), which is the condition for ending the small-hit game. In FIG. 38, unopened treasure chests are indicated by rectangular parallelepipeds, and opened treasure chests are indicated by stars.

A performance determining means 303 switches one unopened treasure box image to an opened treasure box image each time a ball entering the big winning opening 20 is detected by the ball entering determining means 201 during the small winning game. . This suggests to the player that it is possible to enter 10 balls into the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game, in other words, that many balls can be obtained during the small winning game. A player can be urged to shoot a game ball during a winning game.

The second effect image will be explained. The second effect image is an image (hereinafter also referred to as an "expectation level image") indicating the degree of expectation suggesting a high profit (possibility of obtaining a large number of balls) in the subsequent suggestive effect. The expectation degree image can also be said to be an image suggesting that there is a possibility of obtaining many balls in a later game. A detailed description will be given below.

As with the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 42), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment also stopped in a mode in which the symbol variation indicates a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small winning pattern"). In that case, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit differs according to the small hit pattern. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds of the small win development big win is distributed to either 10 rounds or 4 rounds according to the small win pattern (in both cases, the first round is the small winning game).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of time-saving continuations (in other words, the number of continuations of electric chewing support) differs according to the small winning pattern. Specifically, if the small hit pattern is of a specific type, it will be a small hit development jackpot of 10 rounds and 100 times of short time continuation, and if the small hit pattern is of another type, it will be a small hit of 10 rounds and 9 times of short time continuation. It will be a hit development big hit, or a small hit development big hit with 4 rounds and 9 times of short time continuation. When the number of continuous times of time saving is 100 times, the next small hit is almost certainly generated during time saving (during rush production) and becomes a series of games.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 pattern jackpot, (1) 10 rounds and 9 times of time-saving continuation times jackpot, (2) 4 rounds and time-saving continuation It is divided into 9 big hits and (3) 4 rounds and 1 time-saving continuous hit. The distribution probabilities of (1) to (3) in the example are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The symbol jackpot of special figure 2 is a jackpot of 4 rounds and 9 times of time-saving continuation times.

The effect determination means 303, when the V winning occurs in the small winning game, after the small winning game ends, according to the type of the symbol indicating the small winning (that is, the type of the small winning symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped), the player Any one of a plurality of types of suggestive performances suggesting profit that can be obtained is displayed. For example, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are associated with one of a plurality of types of small winning patterns, and each number of rounds of small winning development big hits determined by the small winning patterns, each number of times of short-time continuous after the end of small winning development big hits, or , It may be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of continuous time reduction. In addition, the contents of the multiple types of suggestive effects (motifs, characters, colors, etc.) differ according to the amount of profit that the player can obtain. Note that the suggestive effect will be described later in the description of feature 4.

The effect determination means 303 provides an expectation level image indicating the level of expectation that a high profit (for example, 10 rounds of big wins or 100 times of reduced working hours are given) is suggested in the above-described suggestive effects during the small winning game. is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display an expectation degree image instead of the ball-entering number notification image 566 on the small winning game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. may be displayed. Further, the V notification image 568, which is an image for notifying that the player has won a V prize, in other words, is an image for notifying acquisition of the right to win a big win, may be used as the degree-of-expectation image.

A performance determining means 303 changes the degree-of-expectation image in accordance with the entry of a ball into the big winning opening 20 during the small winning game. The effect determining means 303 may change any one of the shape, pattern and color of the expectation level image according to the ball entering the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game. For example, (1) the expectation degree image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the colors of the V notification image are red, orange, yellow, green, and white in order of the degree of expectation of profit that the player can obtain. , and (3) the small winning pattern corresponds to 10 rounds and 100 consecutive times of time saving. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when the V prize is detected in the small winning game. After the V prize, each time a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball or two balls) entering the big prize hole 20 is detected, the effect determination means 303 changes the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, or red. may be changed in the order of

In the above example, when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 increases during the small winning game, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so the player's expectation for the subsequent suggestive effect and profit state. can increase In this way, as the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the small winning game increases, the accuracy of the expectation level image increases. That is, by entering the ball into the big winning hole during the small winning game, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that high profit is suggested by the subsequent suggestive effect, so the game ball during the small winning game (especially after V winning) A player can be given an incentive to launch a . In addition, even in the small winning game, the player can be made to feel the playability of being able to obtain a ball equivalent to one round of the special game.

Note that the V notification image 568 is an image displayed after the game ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the big winning opening 20, and when the display is started, the game ball already entered in the small winning game is displayed. Since the number (remaining number of possible entries) may vary depending on the situation, the initial display is unified in the manner at the time of entry, such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance-up pattern that eventually becomes more than red), and after that Display of changes depending on the ball according to a predetermined change pattern from the time of the second ball entry to the time of the tenth ball entry, skipping the changes in the middle when changing according to the winning. method can be adopted. In this case, “white (initial)”, “green (3)”, “yellow (5)”, “orange (7)” (numbers indicate the number of game balls entered during the small hit game at which timing changes) ) pattern, when the passage of the fourth ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504, "white" is displayed as the V notification image, and when the next game ball enters (the fifth ball), the V notification image is displayed. is "yellow". By adopting the method of skipping the display mode in the middle in this way, there is no need to have an effect determination table depending on how many balls have passed through the specific area, and furthermore, when the ball is entered, the result is fixed as a lottery result. Since it is displayed, it is possible to identify whether the display of the initial mode was the chance pattern and the final changed mode. In addition, the pattern that changes according to the ball entering the big winning hole 20 may additionally have a pattern defined for the 11th and 12th balls, which is called over winning with a specified count number or more (usually The final mode corresponds to the 10th ball, and the performance pattern is set such that the over-winning portion is equivalent to the 10th ball or an exceptional premium appears).

Further, the effect determining means 303 may change the expectation level image so that the expectation level image shows contents different from the contents of the suggestive effect with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%). For example, if the content of the subsequent suggestive effect suggests a high profit, the expected degree image may be changed to indicate that the degree of expectation is low. Similarly, if the content of the subsequent suggestive effect suggests a low profit, the expected degree image may be changed to indicate that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the player's sense of anticipation and anxiety can be mixed, or the player can have a sense of surprise, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A modified example related to feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include prize ball counting means for counting the number of paid out prize balls (the number of paid balls). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub-board 300 of the number of awarded balls. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small winning game and the special game based on the number of prize balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200 . Alternatively, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of information indicating that a game ball has entered each winning hole. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small winning game and the special game based on the information indicating the ball entering the big winning hole 20 notified from the main substrate 200. . Incidentally, the number of prize balls is 12 when one ball enters the big winning hole 20 .

The production determination means 303 of this modification displays a small-hit game production screen 560 as shown in FIG. Acquired prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls put out during the game is displayed. Here, the acquired prize ball information is in the form of "departed from ○/departed from x". "○ shots" indicates the number of prize balls that have been paid out so far in the current hit. "X" indicates the maximum number of prize balls that can be paid out in the current win, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the current win.

As described above, the small winning game of the second embodiment is designed so that the specified count number (that is, 10 balls) can be entered while the big winning hole 20 is repeatedly opened for a short period of time 15 times. Therefore, "120 shots", which is the number of prize balls in the prescribed count number (12 prize balls per one hit x 10 hits), may be displayed in "x shots" during the small winning game. However, since the small winning game is a specification that repeats short openings and it is not certain that the winning balls will be won, the effect determining means 303 of this modification can , the initial value is set to "0 shots", and 12 shots are added each time a ball enters the big prize winning opening 20. - 特許庁This makes it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied even when 10 balls are not entered into the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game due to the opening/closing timing of the big winning hole 20 or the like.例文帳に追加

As will be described later in relation to feature 4, the effect determination means 303 displays a suggestive effect suggesting the jackpot type (number of rounds, etc.) at the start of a special game in the small win development big win. The effect determination means 303 of this modified example updates the winning prize ball information "x shot" to a value corresponding to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggestive effect, in other words, at the timing of suggesting the number of rounds. Specifically, the value of "x departure" so far (that is, the number of winning balls during the small winning game) is (number of rounds - 1) x 12 winning balls per ball x 10 winning balls is set to "X departure". For example, in the case of 10 rounds, the value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of prize balls won during the small winning game is set to "x shots".

According to the configuration of this modification, by presenting the player with the number of winning prize balls for the first round (small winning game) of the small winning development big winning, it is easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of winning balls. In addition, during the special game, the effect determination means 303 may execute a round number promotion effect to increase the number of rounds of the special game (for example, increase from 4 rounds to 10 rounds). In this case, the effect determination means 303 may update "x shots" (add "720 shots" for a difference of 6 rounds when the promotion effect occurs) in accordance with the apparent number of rounds. In addition, the won prize ball information may further include the cumulative number of prize balls during the consecutive game (that is, while the jackpot is repeatedly obtained during the time saving), and the effect determination means 303 calculates The total number of prize balls paid out may be displayed as the total number of prize balls.

<Feature 3. Small hit development big hit production>
As shown in the small winning game effect screen 560 of FIG. 52, when the V winning occurs during the small winning game, the effect determining means 303 displays the V notification image 568 which is the effect for notifying the V winning. In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory 556 has been operated from the small winning game to the special game, triggered by the V winning in the small winning game.

The effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating that the special electric accessory 556 is operated for the first time during the small winning game after winning the V prize. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, a round image 564 showing the first round is displayed. During the small winning game, the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times, but the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory 556 is one. When the small winning pattern corresponds to the 10th round big winning, in the final round of the small winning development big winning, a round image 564 showing the 10th round is displayed.

According to feature 3, an image showing "first round" etc. is displayed even during the small winning game, that is, a series of count display is performed from the small winning game to the special game. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the same number of balls can be obtained in one round of the special game in the small winning game, and the player can be urged to shoot the game ball even after winning V during the small winning game. It should be noted that, if there is no V winning in the small winning game, the second and subsequent rounds (special game) are not executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 under the condition of V winning, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the second and subsequent rounds will continue when there is no V winning.

<Feature 4. Production at the start of the big hit in the small hit development big hit>
As described in part above, the type of the first profit that the player can obtain with respect to the special game executed when the V prize is won in the small winning game, and the player with respect to the normal game after the special game At least one of the types of the second profit that can be obtained differs according to the type of the small winning symbol at the time when the symbol variation is stopped. The first benefit is, for example, the number of rounds of the small win development jackpot, including 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second profit is, for example, the number of times of continuous working hours, including 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

When the V prize is won during the small winning game, the performance determining means 303 determines the large winning opening in the special game executed following the small winning game after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small winning game is completed. Until the first opening of 20, a suggestion performance suggesting the kind of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the kind of the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game. The suggestive effect is at least one of the number of times the special electric accessory 556 is operated in the small hit development big hit, the number of times the accessory continuous operation device is operated in the special game, and the number of times the time is shortened after the end of the special game (for example, 100 times, 9 times, etc.). The content may suggest one or any combination. For example, the suggestive effect may include the content of displaying the bonus names “○○ bonus”, “XX bonus”, and “△△ chance” corresponding to the combination of the number of rounds of the small win development big win and the number of time-saving continuations.

Also, the suggestive effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestive effect may display contents prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 . If a predetermined button operation (for example, pressing a button more than a predetermined number of times) is input while the suggestive effect is being displayed, the effect determining means 303 determines the content suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain, such as the bonus described above. The name may be displayed on the screen of the suggestion effect.

FIG. 53 shows the display timing of the suggestion effect. The performance determining means 303 determines the closing period (3.5 seconds) after the last opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small winning game + the start demonstration time of the role continuous operation device (the combination operation start demonstration time) (10. 5 seconds), in other words, the suggestion performance is displayed between the first and second rounds of the small win development big win. In addition, in FIG. 39, the situation in which the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game is opened 15 times is shown. A small winning game is finished, and a closing period of 3.5 seconds is provided after the opening is finished no matter how many times it is opened. Also, the expectation effect described in feature 2 is executed before the suggestive effect.

According to feature 4, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by suggesting the kind of profit that the player can obtain in relation to the small win development big win. In addition, by displaying the suggestive performance under the condition of the V winning in the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the content of performance from becoming inconsistent with the actual profit when the V winning does not occur in the small winning game.

A modified example related to feature 4 will be described. If there is no V winning in the small winning game, the effect determination means 303 is the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small winning game + the end demonstration of the small winning game (for example, 0.5 seconds). 1 second), a failure effect may be displayed. The failure presentation may have contents suggesting or notifying that the game will not develop into a big win, or may have contents suggesting or notifying that acquisition of the planned profit has failed. It should be noted that in FIG. 53 of the second embodiment, the ending demonstration time of the small winning game is not set when V is won, but this is because the preset end demonstration time ( 0.1 seconds when V does not win a prize) is canceled (not executed as "0 seconds" or substantially not executed as "0.004 seconds (1 interrupt)"). be.

Another modification related to feature 4 will be described. The performance determining means 303 has a special content suggesting that the occurrence of the next small win development big win (in other words, a series of small win development big wins) is substantially determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect may be displayed as a suggestive effect. The special effect may include, for example, the display of "VV bonus" indicating that bonuses (small win development big wins or big wins) are continuously generated. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small-hit development big-hit is substantially determined. Specifically, (1) as described in feature 5, there is information that will be a small hit in the hold due to prefetching, and (2) this big hit (small hit pattern) is given 100 times of time-saving continuation. It may be something that is done.

Yet another modified example related to feature 4 will be described. The performance determining means 303 determines the period during which the suggested performance can be executed, that is, after the final opening of the big winning mouth 20 in the small winning game is completed, the opening of the big winning mouth 20 in the special game executed following the small winning game. Before the first opening, in addition to the suggestive effect, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed (displayed simultaneously with execution of the suggestive effect or after completion of the suggestive effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which a music to be output from the speaker during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. The character selection effect is an effect that allows the character to appear in the effect during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game (that is, the effect mode that is the embodiment of the effect) to be selected from among a plurality of candidates. may be

In the small win development big win, the small win game is the first round, and the number of rounds in which the big win performance (special game performance) can be executed is one round less. Therefore, by enabling the selection of music and characters between the first and second rounds, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the music and characters selected by the player for a longer period of time. If it is considered that the selectable period of music and characters is insufficient only between rounds, the selectable period may extend over the execution period of the second round.

Yet another modified example related to feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestive effect is displayed during the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 20 in the small winning game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the continuous actuating device. . As a modified example, the suggestive effect may be displayed during the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. Also, when a small winning end demo (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of a small winning game in which a V winning has occurred, the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small winning game + small The suggestive effect may be displayed during the period of the winning end demonstration time (0.004 seconds) + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device.

Yet another modified example related to feature 4 will be described. The pachinko game machine 500 may further include vibration detection means for fraud prevention. Vibration detection means detects the presence or absence of vibration when the big winning opening 20 is opened in a small winning game, and when vibration is detected, predetermined fraud notification processing (warning display, notification to an external device, etc.) may be executed. . Generally, in a unit game or a small winning game of a special game that opens and closes a big winning hole having a specific area, it is implemented to make vibration detection effective during the open period and the remaining ball detection period after the end of the open period. , According to the configuration of feature 4, the suggestive effect is performed by removing the timing of vibration detection (if 5 seconds from the transition to the closing period of 3.5 seconds of the big winning opening are the vibration detection effective period, the suggestive effect Since the button valid period is generated after 6 seconds from the start), it is possible to provide suggestive effects that generate vibration, such as effects in which the player presses a button. Note that during the button valid period, an image indicating the valid period is displayed (an image simulating the effect button 109), followed by a display suggesting that the valid period is reached (such as a fade-in display of the button image). However, when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the effective period of the button display introduction effect. is also preferably shifted after the vibration detection effective period ends.

<Feature 5. Small hit ahead>
As described in the base technology and the first embodiment, the prior determination means 235 of the main substrate 200 determines the lottery value (for example, Regardless of whether the pattern variation based on the winning lottery value) starts immediately, the result of the winning judgment (this judgment) based on the winning lottery value obtained with the entry of the ball is a big hit or a small hit. Determine in advance whether it will be a hit or not. The advance determination means 235, when the result of advance determination of the ball entry is a big win or a small win, transmits to the performance determination means 303 the advance decision information indicating that the variation corresponding to the ball entry will be a big win or a small win. . The advance determination information transmitted to the effect determination means 303 is transmitted in such a manner that it is possible to identify whether a big win or a small win will be carried out. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, by transmitting the information indicating the win/loss range "4" as the pre-determination information, it becomes possible to identify the small hit.

A performance determining means 303 determines that a V winning occurs during a small winning game, and the preliminary determination information received from the main substrate 200 regarding the holding of the special figure 2 is that one or more lottery values for a small winning are reserved. If there is, from the V winning to the end of the special game and the start of the normal game, there is a production that gives advance notice of the occurrence of a small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game (hereinafter referred to as "small hit notice ) can be executed one or more times. In other words, the effect determining means 303 determines that at least one or more small wins are executed when the right to shift to the big win is acquired during the small win game and there is a hold that the winning lottery is a small win. A small winning advance notice performance of contents to be suggested or notified can be executed during a period from the end of the big winning to the start of the time saving state. The hold to be the look-ahead target of the small hit is the special figure 2 hold to be the main game during the time saving. In the embodiment, the performance determining means 303 displays V stock images, which look like "V" are stocked, for the number of small wins to be announced, as a small winning announcement performance.

A performance determining means 303 can execute a small winning notice performance at a plurality of notice timings during the period from the V winning to the transition to the time saving state after the end of the small winning development big winning. The plurality of advance notice timings are configured such that the number of advance notices of the small win reserve increases as the number of rounds of the small win development big win increases. Specifically, the plurality of advance notice timings in the second embodiment are V winning, the 3rd round of the small win development big win, the 9th round of the small win development big win, and the time of the big win ending demonstration. The number of small wins announced is limited to one at each of a plurality of announcement timings. That is, the number of V stock images is increased by one in one small-hit advance notice effect.

Therefore, only when the number of rounds of the small hit development jackpot is maximum (specifically 10 rounds), it is possible to execute the small hit notice effect four times, that is, all four reservations (special figure 2 reservation) When it is a small hit, it can be suggested to the player. In other words, when the number of rounds of the small win development big win is 4 rounds, the 9th round small win notice effect cannot be executed, so even if all of the 4 reserves are small wins, a maximum of 3 small wins are announced. stay in A performance determining means 303 determines by lottery how many times the small winning advance notice performance is to be executed and at what notice timing it is executed, with the number of reserved preliminary determination results as the small winning prize being set as the upper limit.

In addition, the effect determination means 303 executes four small-hit advance notice performances when the pre-determination information for all of the existing four reservations is information indicating a small hit, but at least one of the small-hit advance notices is executed. As the effect, a premium effect may be displayed. The premium effect is a rare effect that is displayed only when all of the four reserves are small wins, and may have contents suggesting or notifying that a very large profit can be obtained.

According to feature 5, by suggesting that small winning development big wins can be obtained continuously in a machine equipped with small winning development big winnings, it is possible to make a player aware that there is a high possibility of obtaining a large profit. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

A modified example related to feature 5 will be described. When three small wins are reserved during the previously generated first small win development big win (or during the big win), a performance determining means 303 hides one small win and creates two V stock images. may be displayed. When the second small-hit development jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation immediately after the end of the small-hit development jackpot, the V stock image is updated to reduce to one (At this time, the reserve existing from the first small-hit development jackpot 2 small hits inside). In addition, when one hold that occurs during the variation of the second small win is a small win (the number of small wins in the hold changes to three), the effect determination means 303 determines the second small win. During the small winning game or the big winning game, even if the V stock image is displayed by 2 including the number of reserved small winnings existing during the first small winning developing big winning, the small winning notice performance is displayed. good. It should be noted that the definition of the first small-hit development big hit and the second small-hit development big hit are, as described above, special games that are performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize is won during the small-hit game. However, as the execution timing of this small-hit look-ahead effect includes "at the time of V winning" as described above in the present embodiment, there are those that carry out small-hit look-ahead (V stock notification) during the small-hit game. , In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit look-ahead executed in the "first small hit development big hit" and "second small hit development big hit".

As a method 1 for realizing this, the effect determination means 303, when a small hit or a big hit (for example, when the small hit pattern or the big hit pattern is stopped, or when the V prize is won in the small hit game), Based on this, the number of small wins in the reserve may be identified. The performance determining means 303 calculates the difference between the number of V stocks being displayed and the number of small wins in the reserve, and selects one of the V stock performance patterns that can be notified by lottery with the difference as the upper limit. You may For example, a small-hit advance notice effect that increases the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

In addition, as a method 2, the production determination means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the reserve based on the advance determination information at the time of the small win or the big win, and based on the specified number of small wins, the pattern of the small hit notice production (For example, display timing of small hit notice effect) may be determined. The performance determining means 303 may cancel the display of the small-hit advance notice performance according to the displayed V stock number at the display timing of the small-hit advance notice performance based on the determined pattern, or replace it with the normal performance pattern. good too. For example, when three small hit notice effects (at the time of V winning, 9th round, at the end demo) are decided, and when two V stocks are being displayed from before the small hit, two small hits A winning announcement effect (for example, the 9th round in the back, at the end demo) may be canceled.

According to this modification, in order to specify the number of reserved small hits for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), special production (premium production) when the number of reserved small hits is the maximum (4) can increase the chances of doing In addition, since the timing of displaying the fourth V stock image by the small hit notice effect varies, for example, the effect determining means 303 changes each V stock image to a rainbow color when four V stock images are accumulated. It is preferable to display a special effect (premium effect) in the normal game immediately after the end of the small win development big win.

Another modification related to feature 5 will be described. Even if there is no small hit in the reserve, the effect determination means 303, if the number of continuation of time reduction after the end of the small win development big hit this time is a predetermined value or more than a predetermined value, draws (at a predetermined probability). A small hit notice effect similar to that in the case where there is a small win may be displayed. In this modified example, when the number of continuous time-saving is 100 times, a small-hit announcement effect (that is, a V stock image) can be displayed. This is because the small hit probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko game machine 500 is 1/10, and the small hit will almost certainly occur during 100 fluctuations in the time saving state. Incidentally, the number of continuation times of shortening the time for displaying the small hit notice effect is not limited to 100 times, and may be a value equal to or more than the number of times that the occurrence of the small win is almost certainly expected according to the probability of the small win. It should be noted that the V stock image displayed in the small winning notice effect of this modified example must be deleted to indicate that it is a chance of winning a V prize even in the case of a subsequent big win that does not require a V winning prize. Since there is a risk of misunderstanding about the subsequent game (decrease in reliability of display due to the possibility of occurrence of a situation where there is no small hit even if there is a V stock display), The winning notice effect is called a second minor winning notice effect.

According to the second small win notice performance of this modified example, the V stock image remains even if four reserves are consumed after the small win development big win, so that the possibility of executing the small win (or big win) is extremely high. can be executed continuously, it is possible to realize an unpredictable presentation. For example, the effect determining means 303 superimposes the image of "HOLD" on the V stock image at the time of the fourth holding (losing) after the small win develops the big win, and displays "HOLD" until the big win or fluctuation of the small win. display of the V stock image may be maintained. The effect determining means 303 may end the display of the "HOLD" V stock image at the start of the symbol variation of the big win or the small win, during the variation, or at the end of the variation.

In this embodiment, the V stock display is displayed with a subtraction (display is erased if 0) when notifying that the execution of the small winning game is definite in the execution of the small winning variation. , Regarding the V stock display for 100 times of the time saving of the modified example The reason for deleting the V stock image that has been "HOLD" even if it is a big hit is that the number of time saving continuations is reset when it becomes a big hit, and if the number of time saving continuations is short, a small hit during that time saving This is because there is no compensation for the occurrence of For the same reason, if there is no small win but a big win in the hold, the second small win notice effect is displayed even if the number of continuous time reductions after the end of the current small win development big win is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. don't let Alternatively, even if the player wins the lottery for the small winning notice performance, the execution of the performance is cancelled.

Yet another modified example of feature 5 will be described. A performance determining means 303 has a small win notice performance for notifying the number of small wins in the reserve with a V stock image even when there are small wins and big wins in the reserve and the big win fluctuates before at least one small win. is displayed. The effect determination means 303 determines the number of small wins indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small wins) as a V stock digestion effect during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the small win to the start of the small win game. the V stock image itself) is decremented by one.

On the other hand, the performance determining means 303 does not change the number of small wins indicated by the V stock image during the big win variation, and maintains the number of small wins indicated by the V stock image across the big win period. In addition, if there is a small hit in the reserve newly generated during the big win variation or during the big win game, the production determination means 303 displays a small win advance notice production for increasing the number of small wins indicated by the V stock image during the big win game. You may let

The production pattern of the V stock digestion production executed in the small hit fluctuation in the normal game in the time saving state may include a special mode production pattern such as the V stock image emitting rainbow color and being erased (normal pattern (e.g., white light emission and erasing). If the current small winning pattern brings about a high profit (for example, 10 rounds of small winning development jackpot or 100 time-saving continuation times), the production determining means 303 selects a special mode production as the production pattern of the V stock digestion production. A pattern may be selected to display a special version of the V stock digestion rendition. As a result, it is possible to effectively notify the player that a high profit will be brought. In the present embodiment, the result of pre-determining the holding of the special figure 2 digested in the normal game during the time saving game, which the effect determination means 303 refers to when determining the execution of the small hit notice effect, is the special symbol. It does not include information on the stop display mode (small hit pattern), and only determines in advance whether or not the hold is a small hit using pre-determination information related to random numbers used for success/failure determination. Therefore, at the stage of being displayed as a V stock image, it is not possible to judge the type of small hit development jackpot that occurs at each V winning opportunity, so the number of V winning opportunities is simply displayed. However, as in this modified example, by switching the pattern to the digest effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the effect determining means 303 when the variation is actually started, the V stock can be obtained. It is possible to diversify presentations using images and improve interest.

Yet another modified example of feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 terminates the time saving when a small hit occurs. Therefore, when the V prize is not won in the small winning game (so to speak, when the game is punctured), after the small winning game is finished, it becomes a normal game in a normal state, which is not a time-saving game. If a performance determining means 303 displays a V stock image indicating that at least one small win is reserved at the end of the small win game although the V prize is not won in the small win game, after the end of the small win game. , You may display the production|presentation which looks like time saving is continuing. In other words, the effect determination means 303 may display the effect during the time saving state (or similar effect) as the effect in the normal game in the normal state after the end of the small winning game.

According to this configuration, it is possible to lead to the next small win while maintaining the player's sense of expectation for the series of villas. In addition, in this modification, the effect determination means 303 is an exceptional effect in which the pattern variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in the normal state and the effect pattern during the time reduction (variation effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern) are associated with each other. A pattern table is stored, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the exceptional performance pattern table.

The present invention has been described above based on the second embodiment. The second embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention.

A first modified example will be described. The first modified example mainly shows a configuration for continuing the launch even after winning the V prize, mainly for the feature 3 and feature 4 of the second embodiment. During the small winning game, the effect determining means 303 displays a mission effect such as "Enter the attacker (the big winning gate 20) to accumulate the gauge!" good too. As an example of this effect, in the display area of the effect display device 60, an empty indicator display (or an indicator with a different initial amount depending on the degree of chance) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60 with the occurrence of the small win game. For example, when the ball enters the winning hole 20, an effect (effect of filling the gauge) is executed to expand the area of the expectation level indication display in the indicator display.

In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays an image showing the degree of expectation of the result of the suggestive effect during the 1st and 2nd rounds of the small win development big win in this mission effect, similarly to the display of the expectation degree image of feature 2. , the mode of the image showing the degree of expectation of the profit to be obtained in the small hit development jackpot may be changed according to the degree of achievement of the mission (the degree of accumulation of the gauge in the above example). The display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, and may be the decrease mode, or it may change continuously like an indicator as an effect that encourages the continuation of firing by suggesting the degree of expectation. Instead, it will display whether or not the item will be displayed when the treasure box is opened according to the ball, such as "A chance to acquire item ○○, and a great chance if you can acquire all three items". Alternatively, the expectation level suggestion may be performed based on the number or combination of suggested objects finally displayed.

In addition, the effect determination means 303 is suspended each time a predetermined unit amount (one ball or two balls, etc.) of game balls enter the big winning hole 20, or each time the gauge in the mission effect increases by a unit amount. It may be decided by a lottery whether or not to display an effect (small win advance notice effect of feature 5) for suggesting or informing the number of small wins. When the lottery is won, the effect determining means 303 may display a small win advance notice effect suggesting or announcing the small win if there is an unannounced small win in the reserve.

In addition, when there is a small hit in the reservation, the effect determination means 303 determines the vicinity of the big prize opening 20 with a predetermined probability (for example, 2%) according to the ball entering the big prize opening 20 after the V prize. You may light the light-guide plate installed in . When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determination means 303 provides a special effect (as described above) that suggests that the series of small win development big wins is confirmed as a suggestive effect between the 1st and 2nd rounds of the small win development big wins. VV bonus) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

A second modification will be described. The second modified example also mainly shows a configuration for continuing the launch even after winning the V prize, mainly with respect to the feature 3 and feature 4 of the second embodiment. At the start of the small winning game, the effect determining means 303 includes a character image and a big winning hole image showing the big winning hole 20, and produces a content urging a shot to be aimed at the big winning hole 20 (referred to as a "shooting promotion effect"). ) may be displayed. When the V prize is won in the small winning game, the effect determination means 303 displays the V notification image as shown in FIG. good too. That is, the V notification image and the launch promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

The timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is when a certain period of time has elapsed after winning the V prize, or when the conditions for closing the big prize opening in the small winning game are met (10 balls entered or 15 times opened), whichever comes first. may be Alternatively, the timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is when there is a V prize and three or more balls enter the big prize opening 20, or when the V prize is won after three or more balls enter the big prize opening 20 (+ even after a few seconds) may be).

Note that the effect determination means 303 selects the display object for the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 during the small winning game (such as the number of balls entering notification image 566 in FIG. 52) and the image of the launch promotion effect from the V notification image 568. may also have a higher display priority. For example, the effect determination means 303 draws the number-of-balls notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect on a relatively upper drawing layer among a plurality of drawing layers provided in the effect display device 60. You may arrange|position so that it may not be hidden by other images. In addition, when the display priority of the V notification image 568 is to be increased, the effect determination means 303 places the ball-in notification image 566 and the shot number notification image 566 at positions different from the V notification image 568 so as not to overlap the V notification image 568 . You may arrange the image of promotion production|presentation. Also, the effect determining means 303 may make the size of the ball-entering number notification image 566 and the image of the shooting promotion effect smaller than when the V notification image 568 is not displayed so as not to overlap the V notification image 568 .

Here, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, an example of rendering applicable to the second embodiment and modification will be described. FIG. 54(a) shows a variation effect screen 570 for notifying the occurrence of a small win (or big win), and shows a state in which the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped in a manner indicating a small win (or big win). there is In addition, on the variable effect screen 570 of FIG. 54(a), a character image 572 is displayed in a manner suggesting or announcing a small win (or big win).

FIG. 54(b) shows a small winning game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54(a). The small-hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(b) is displayed as, for example, a small-hit game start demonstration. The small winning game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(b) includes a right hitting instruction image 562 instructing the player to hit right, a big winning opening image 574 imitating the appearance of the big winning opening 20, and a character image 572. . In the small winning game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(b), a character image 572 is displayed in a manner that encourages hitting to the right (for example, pointing to the right).

FIG.54(c) has shown the small hit game production|presentation screen 560 following FIG.54(b). The small-hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54(c) is displayed, for example, after V winning occurs in the small-hit game. The small winning game production screen 560 of FIG. 54(c) includes a V notification image 568 that notifies V winning, a round image 564 that indicates that it is the first round, and prompts to aim at the attacker (big winning opening 20). It includes a message 576 and a gauge image 578 showing the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 . The gauge image 578 corresponds to the number-of-entered-balls notification image 566 of the second embodiment, and changes in color according to the number of entered-balls into the big winning opening 20, for example.

FIG. 55(a) shows a small winning game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54(c). In the small winning game effect screen 560 of FIG. 55( a ), since the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 during the small winning game has reached a predetermined number or more (for example, 7 balls or more), the shot is aimed at the big winning hole 20 . The message 576 and the big winning opening image 574 are hidden.

FIG. 55(b) shows an inter-round effect screen 580 following FIG. 55(a). An inter-round production screen 580 displays an inter-round production displayed from the end of the small winning game (first round) to before the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The effect between rounds corresponds to the suggestive effect of feature 4 of the second embodiment. A performance screen 580 between rounds includes a button image 584 prompting the operation of a performance button 109 or the like, and a bonus suggesting image 582 suggesting the type of the current big win among a plurality of types of big wins with different number of rounds and the number of continuous time-saving. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image imitating a roulette that rotates according to the operation of the effect button 109 or the like. In addition, the effect screen 580 between rounds includes an effect image 586 at the edge of the screen. The effect image 586 may change color over time, and may change to the same color as the gauge image 578 on the small winning game effect screen 560 at the end of the inter-round effect.

FIG. 55(c) shows a big hit effect screen 588 following FIG. 55(b). The jackpot production screen 588 of FIG. 55(c) shows the production of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As partially described above, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564 , won prize ball information 590 , and a V stock image 592 . The V stock image 592 in FIG. 55(c) shows that two small wins are stocked (that is, two small wins are present in the reserve).

A third modification will be described. Time saving termination conditions in the pachinko game machine 500 are (1) the number of fluctuations A of special figure 1 (for example, 7 times), (2) the number of fluctuations B of special figure 2 (for example, 100 times, 9 times or 1 time), ( 3) Including special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation frequency C (eg 100 times, 15 times or 7 times (A+B-1)). As already described in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 switch the variation pattern table according to the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 respectively.

Processing 1 for time-saving termination:
The first variation pattern determination means 231 of this modification switches the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the timing of the time saving end. The number of candidates for the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table for time saving of Special Figure 1 (the number of candidates that can be selected) is small. Therefore, by forcibly switching the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time saving, during the multiple changes after the end of the time saving, the production determined with the change of the special figure 1 hold will be monotonous. can be avoided.

Processing 2 for time-saving termination:
On the other hand, the second variation pattern determining means 232 of this modification, even if the time saving ends, the 4 variations after the time saving ends refer to a different variation pattern table (mode 7 table in FIG. 43), To determine the variation pattern of special figure 2. In the pachinko game machine 500, since the time saving production mode (rush production in FIG. 40) continues while the special figure 2 hold is digested after the time saving ends, the time saving ends exceptionally under the time saving end condition of the special figure 1. This is because it is necessary to select a variation pattern corresponding to the time saving production mode when the special figure 2 reservation occurs.

Process 3 for time-saving termination:
In the case of no V winning (puncture) in the small winning game, which is an exceptional time-saving end, the first variation pattern determination means 231 switches the variation pattern table of special figure 1 to the mode 0 table of special figure 1. In addition, the second variation pattern determining means 232 also switches the variation pattern table of special figure 2 to the mode 0 table of special figure 2.

The above process 3 is performed when a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or when there is a possibility that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1 and the small hit game of the special figure 1 In the same way as special figure 2, it is executed when V can be won. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, but if the opening and closing control of the specific area opening and closing device 552 is performed so as not to win a V prize in the special figure 1 game (small hit in the special figure 1 If the game is designed to be almost certainly punctured), the small hit game of special figure 1 does not perform the above processing 3 and time saving end control. That is, in the small hit game of special figure 1, the reduction of working hours is continued even if V is not won. To avoid the termination of time saving due to puncture of the small winning game when the special figure 1 variation before the occurrence of the special figure 2 suspension occurs at the first hit (at the time of initial time saving) is.

A fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modified example, a modified example relating to the round indicator lamp will be described. As described in the base technology, the game state display unit 76 functions as a round indicator lamp that displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game with the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) displays the game state display section 76 (that is, the round indicator lamp) for both the 10-round pattern big win and the 10-round small win development big win (small win 1R, big win 9R). may emit light in the same pattern. Similarly, the main substrate 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) displays the game state display section 76 in the same pattern for both the 4-round pattern big win and the 4-round small win development big win (small win 1R, big win 3R). to emit light.

In addition, the main board 200 starts a special game state based on the operation of the V prize or the operation of the continuous actuating device after the V prize (small win development) for 10 rounds of small win development big wins and 4 rounds of small win development big wins. The game state display unit 76 may emit light in a common pattern for the small winning game until the start of the big winning. After winning the V prize, the gaming state display section 76 may emit light in the same pattern as the 10 rounds big win and the same pattern as the 4th round big win. This makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between 10 rounds and 4 rounds before winning V.

A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modified example, a modified example regarding the performance display section 159 will be described. The performance display unit 159 calculates and displays the ratio (referred to as the base value) of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, as described in the underlying technology. In this modification, especially the base value during the normal game in the normal state (low probability game state and non-time-saving game state) is displayed. During the special game, it is not treated as count data for display on the performance display section.

In the gaming machines described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the small winning game corresponding to the substantial first round of the small winning development big winning starts, the time saving game is ended, and at the end of the small winning game. It is configured to operate the accessory continuous operating device accordingly. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means that it is in the same state as the normal game in the normal state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state), and the state corresponding to the substantial first round in the small hit development big hit In spite of this, the acquired game balls are counted as the base value during the normal game in the normal state. Under such circumstances, when the base value of the fifth modification is calculated, each time a small hit development big hit that becomes a small hit V occurs, a safe ball equivalent to the ball for the big hit 1R (second embodiment 120 balls) is added to the base value, so in a small winning game that should be treated as a special game, the count data of the performance display unit 159 includes a value that should not be counted. There is a fear that it will happen.

Therefore, as a fifth modified example, the optimum method as the data counting method of the performance display section 159 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment adopting the small hit development big hit will be described below.

With respect to the data displayed on the performance display unit 159 of the fifth modification, the main CPU 290 determines that the execution of the big-hit game is definite when the V prize is won during the execution of the small-hit game with the development of the little-hit. After winning a V prize, it is regarded as equivalent to a big hit, and the total number of prize balls generated by entering the big prize hole 20 after winning a V prize, safe balls and out balls fired after winning a V prize are subject to the calculation of the base value. Adopt a method to control so that it is outside. As a method for satisfying the game state equivalent to the big win after winning the V prize, the flag for the operation of the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device is set to be equivalent to that during the big win based on the fact that the V prize was won during the small win game. You can switch to a value.

By doing so, for example, during the small winning game of the second embodiment, when the game ball that entered the third ball passes through the specific area (V win), from the fourth game ball, It can be regarded as a prize ball generated in a small hit development big hit, and only "36 balls" (12 prize balls x 3 entered balls) as the number of prize balls generated during normal games in the normal state are added for counting. Therefore, in the game machine adopting the small win development big win, the base during the normal game in the normal state is excessively raised based on the occurrence of the small win game corresponding to the substantial first round. can be prevented.

A sixth modification will be described. In each embodiment, the number of rounds of the small-hit development big hit and the number of time-saving continuations after the end of the small-hit development big hit are determined according to the small-hit design. As a modification, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of continuations of time saving may be determined according to the result of the lottery at the time of V winning instead of the small winning pattern (small winning patterns may be involved).

(Third embodiment)
The basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the third embodiment, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 are the same as those of the second embodiment (Figs. 49, 3, and 4). , Fig. 11). In addition, the pachinko game machine 500 of the third embodiment is provided with a setting change device 170 (FIG. 2) in the same way as the pachinko game machine 100 of the underlying technology, and six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are provided as game settings. ), the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery has a set difference in addition to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, and the probability of a small win does not have a set difference.

In the following, the base technology and the differences from the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 500 of the third embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements described in the base technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals. do.

An outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments Then, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as "setting suggestion effect") is executed to suggest the setting values stored in the setting change device 170 (setting memory) to the player.

The setting values of the pachinko game machine 500 may be stored in both the RAM of the main board 200 (for example, the memory of the setting change device 170) and the RAM of the sub board 300. The sub-board 300 may refer to the setting value stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300 and execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the changed setting value to the sub board 300 at the timing when the setting change is confirmed, and the sub board 300 may store the setting value in the RAM. Also, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the current set value to the sub board 300 when the power is turned on and when the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main board 200 may include set value information indicating the current set value in various commands transmitted to the sub board 300 for each pattern change. Similarly, the main board 200 may include set value information indicating the current set values in various commands transmitted to the sub board 300 during special games and error recovery. In this way, by transmitting the set value information at a predetermined opportunity even during the game, the set values stored in the main substrate 200 and the set values stored in the sub substrate 300 can be synchronized even during the game. This makes it easier to maintain the fairness of the game. For example, if an illegal operation is performed to illegally change only the main set values while the sub board 300 is dropped, the set values after the illegal change are reflected on the sub board 300 side, and the set values after the illegal change are played. It can be presented to people, game store staff, etc.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the following four features regarding the setting suggestion effect. These features can be implemented independently, or can be combined arbitrarily, and can also be combined arbitrarily with the features described in the base technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment.

Features 1. Suggestion of end demo setting only at V stock:
Since the setting suggestion effect is not common in pachinko game machines so far, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the special game end demonstration, the setting suggestion effect is in an advantageous state (for example, a specific game There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that it is a suggestion or notification that the transition to Nairenso is scheduled. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment is a special game on the condition that the "advantageous notification effect", which is an effect that suggests or notifies that a transition to an advantageous state is scheduled, has been executed. In the end demonstration of , a setting suggestion effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the setting-suggestion effect, and to prevent the player's expectation that the game should shift to an advantageous state from being spoiled.

Feature 2. Downgrading prevention of setting suggestion production:
If the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed later is lower in the player's profit (in other words, the degree of advantage) than the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed earlier, the setting of the previous time The expectation of the player who saw the suggestive performance is spoiled. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, a higher priority is given to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a content that is more profitable for the player, and after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority , restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being spoiled.

Feature 3. When V is not won, the ending demonstration setting suggestion effect is not executed:
As described above, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small winning game, it does not develop into a big winning, and returns to the normal game after the ending demonstration effect of the small winning game. The execution time of the end demonstration effect of the small winning game is very short, and it is difficult to secure the time of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration of the small winning game, so that substantially meaningless lottery processing and display processing for the setting suggestion effect are performed. execution can be avoided.

Feature 4. Set difference to pending change frequency:
In a pachinko gaming machine, one game (for example, pattern variation) progresses based on the passage of time, unlike a slot machine, which is triggered by a player's operation. Therefore, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of symbol variations by looking ahead of information on the reserved lottery value. In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, a specific effect mode in the effect suggests a set value with respect to the effect by the reserved look-ahead that can be executed over a plurality of symbol changes. As a result, the pending look-ahead effect can be presented to the player as suggesting a big hit and also as suggesting the set value, thereby further enhancing the player's sense of anticipation and the amusement of the game. In addition, since it is executed over a plurality of symbol changes, it is easy to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestive content.

The above four features will be described in detail below.
<Feature 1. Suggestion of end demo setting only at V stock>
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, a V winning occurs during the small winning game, and a small When one or more winning lottery values are reserved, a V stock image is used as a small winning notice performance during a period from the V prize to the end of the small winning development big winning (special game) and the start of the normal game. can be displayed. The small hit notice effect is a effect of adding or adding a V stock image, and is hereinafter also referred to as "V stock effect".

The effect determining means 303 of the pachinko game machine 500 stores two conditions as conditions under which the setting suggestion effect can be displayed in the end demo effect of the special game (also called "jackpot end demo effect"). The first condition is that one or more V stock images are displayed before the start of the end demonstration effect, in other words, one or more V stock effects are executed before the start of the end demonstration effect. is. The second condition is that the player has not won the V stock effect in the end demonstration effect. When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the effect determination means 303 determines execution of the setting suggestion effect during the end demonstration effect with a predetermined probability.

As described in the second embodiment, the effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect, how many times the V stock effect execution timing (for example, V winning, 3rd round of small win development big win, 9th round of small win development big win, at the end of big win demo) is determined by lottery. A performance determining means 303 does not execute a setting suggesting performance in a special game ending demo performance when the result of this lottery is a specific pattern. For example, when the lottery result is a pattern of executing the V stock effect and executing the V stock effect at the time of the jackpot ending demonstration, the setting suggesting effect is not executed in the end demonstration effect of the special game.

In the case of a gaming machine with a variable probability state, the above-mentioned second condition is that the variable probability promotion production (for example, a resurrection production such as a reverse victory in a battle once defeated) is not won as a special game ending demonstration production. It's okay. The reason why such a second condition is provided is to give priority to the display of an effect suggesting/announcing contents directly related to the player's profit over the set value, such as a V stock effect or a variable probability promotion effect. In addition, if the player understands that the appearance of the setting suggestion effect and the V stock effect (or the variable promotion effect, etc.) is clearly different, the second condition is not specified, and only the first condition is specified. , may be displayed at the same time depending on the case.

In addition, the variable promotion effect in the end demo may be designed to lengthen the end demo time in order to secure the scale of the effect, and the stop pattern of the big hit (small hit in the case of small win V) may be carried out on the basis of In this case, the second condition is that the stop pattern of the big win (small win in the case of the small win V) is not a specific mode that executes a production that takes precedence over the setting suggestion production, such as a probability variation promotion production, at the time of the end demonstration. may be The effect determining means 303 may avoid the execution of the setting suggesting effect during the end demonstration effect, assuming that the second condition is not satisfied when the stop symbol of the big win is the specific symbol.

FIGS. 56(a)-(d) show an example of a jackpot end demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 56( a ), the effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the end demonstration screen 600 . The effect determining means 303 causes the ending demonstration screen 600 to display a wallpaper image 602 showing the contents (the motif, the type of the character, etc.) according to the number of times of the consecutive villas. Although not shown, the effect determination means 303 may cause the end demo screen 600 to display the number of consecutive games during the advantageous period and the total number of winning balls during the advantageous period.

FIGS. 56(b)-(d) show setting suggestion effects. As shown in FIG. 56(b), the effect determining means 303 displays a character image 604 on the end demonstration screen 600, and displays an action (animation) in which the character image 604 removes the wallpaper image 602 that has been displayed up to that point. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the effect determining means 303 displays an action in which the character image 604 selects a setting. Finally, as shown in FIG. 56(d), the effect determining means 303 displays an votive panel image 606, which is an object with content suggesting the setting value.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 pre-stores votive panel images 606 in a plurality of types (shapes, patterns, colors, etc., which can also be called appearances) corresponding to a plurality of set values. The effect determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of votive panel images 606 according to the set value stored in the setting change device 170 and a predetermined selection probability. A plurality of types of votive picture images 606 have appearances set corresponding to "setting 6 fixed", "setting 4 fixed", "setting 4 or more", "setting 2 or more", "setting value is an odd number", etc. including. As a result, the expected value of the set value changes depending on the aspect of the votive panel image 606 presented in the setting suggesting effect. Note that the effect determination means 303 changes the display mode (for example, in a band display mode) of the number of consecutive games and the total number of won prize balls displayed in FIG. By continuously displaying it in the corner, it is possible to check the number of consecutive games and the total number of won prize balls on the performance screens after FIG. 56(b).

FIG. 57 is a time chart relating to the jackpot ending demonstration effect. FIG. 57(a) shows a normal time chart in which neither the V stock effect nor the setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 57(b) shows a time chart when the V stock effect is executed during the end demonstration effect. FIG. 57(c) shows a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the end demonstration effect. The time of the jackpot end demonstration effect is 13 seconds in any of the normal time, the execution of the V stock effect, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that the time of this jackpot end demonstration production is, for example, a production executed in accordance with the time of the special game end demonstration time (S814 in FIG. 28) in the main control device, and the type of jackpot game It is determined for each special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot symbol), and if the time for the jackpot end demonstration effect is insufficient to perform the setting suggestion effect, etc., such a type It may be configured not to perform the setting suggestion effect or the like in the big hit of .

As shown in FIG. 57(a), normally, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive residences is displayed for 6 seconds, the character string for entering the rush effect is displayed for 6 seconds, and the transition to the background image is displayed for 1 second. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 57(b), when the V stock effect is executed, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of times of consecutive residences is displayed for 3 seconds, the character and V stock image addition are displayed for 9 seconds, and the background image is displayed. Display the transition for 1 second. Also, as shown in FIG. 57(c), when the setting suggesting effect is executed, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of times of consecutive residences is displayed for 2 seconds, the character image 604 and the rotation of the votive tablet are displayed for 6 seconds, and then stopped. The votive panel image 606 is displayed for 5 seconds. Although not shown, in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), regarding the notification of rush effect entry, in order to notify the player of the subsequent game state, a mode different from the normal time of FIG. 57(a) is displayed. (For example, a telop or icon display at the corner of the screen) may notify the rush effect.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine 500 of the third embodiment, a setting suggesting effect in which the character moves by animation is displayed. Therefore, compared to the case where the background image of the jackpot end demonstration is simply replaced with a special background suggesting the set value, the effect can easily attract the player's attention. On the other hand, since the performance is based on animation, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that it is foreshadowing a profit for the player, such as a big win (small win V) or a shift to a specific game such as a probability variation. In addition, unlike the slot machine, the pachinko game machine 500 terminates the jackpot ending demonstration at the timing of the time, so that when a special effect occurs without involvement of the player's operation, it also announces the pending continuous operation or the probability change transition. It is easy for the player to misunderstand that it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, an effect that foretells that it is already in an advantageous state (this is an effect that foretells the profit to the player as described above, and in the third embodiment, the V stock effect ) has been executed, the setting suggestion effect is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the player's sense of expectation.

The effect determining means 303 continues to display the votive panel image 606 presented in the setting suggesting effect at the time of the end demonstration at the corner of the effect screen (in other words, the corner of the effect display device 60) even in the subsequent game. By doing so, it is possible to provide the next player with information on the set values even when there are no players left, which leads to an increase in the desire to play and motivation to play. However, during the small winning game, during the big winning game (excluding the end demonstration with setting suggestion), and during the super ready-to-win effect, the votive picture image 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect is not displayed. display. The effect determining means 303 may display an effect of replacing the votive panel image 606 presented in the past setting suggesting effect with a new votive panel image 606 at the time of the end demonstration winning the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the effect determination means 303 determines when a plurality of types of votive picture images 606 with different appearances are presented in a plurality of setting suggesting effects, in other words, when a plurality of types of votive picture images 606 suggesting different setting values are presented. , the plurality of types of votive panel images 606 continue to be displayed even in subsequent games. As described above, the votive panel image 606 of the third embodiment (1) indicates that the set value is an even or odd number (or that the even or odd number is highly expected), and (2) the set value (3) that the set value is a specific value (or that the expected value that is a specific value is high) ). Therefore, by combining a plurality of votive panel images 606, it becomes possible to narrow down the actual set values, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Even when a plurality of votive picture images 606 are displayed, displaying multiple ema images of the same type described in (1) to (3) may result in displaying contradictory suggestions. When votive panel images 606 of the same type that are difficult to connect are displayed, some of the votive panel images 606 of the same type may be hidden based on the priority to be described later.

As a modification, when the effect determining means 303 displays a plurality of votive picture images 606 having different appearances in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, the votive picture image 606 having the highest priority among the plurality of votive picture images 606 (in other words, Only the votive panel image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect with the highest priority may be displayed in subsequent games. Priority will be described later. Also, the effect determination means 303 may display only the votive panel image 606 suggesting the highest set value in the subsequent game instead of or together with the priority. In this modification, even if only one votive picture 606 is displayed during the game, the effect determination means 303 will display the big win history and each big win in response to the operation on the menu screen during the game standby demo. The votive panel images 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect may be arranged and displayed in a list, or by operating the cross key 110 or the like, the displayed votive panel images 606 may be displayed in the order in which they were displayed or in a predetermined display. The votive panel image 606 may be configured to be sequentially switched and displayed in order (the votive panel image 606 that is not displayed as a setting suggestion effect is not displayed).

As another modified example, the effect determination means 303 does not always display the votive panel image 606 in the game after execution of the setting suggestion effect, but displays the votive panel image 606 only during the game standby demo or on the menu screen. good too.

As yet another modified example, the effect determination means 303 does not execute the V stock effect in the current big win (small win development big win or pattern big win), but as a result of executing the V stock effect in the previous big win, the V stock image is displayed. If it remains, the setting suggesting effect may be displayed at the end demonstration of this big hit. For example, if the V stock image resulting from the execution of the V stock effect in the previous big win is displayed on the current big win effect screen, the effect determining means 303 causes the setting suggestion effect to be displayed at the end demonstration of the current big win. good too.

In addition, as another modification, the votive picture image 606 that is continuously displayed during the normal game is not only updated by displaying a new votive picture image 606 at the end of the jackpot demonstration, If the advance notice lottery is won, an effect of replacing the votive panel image 606 with another image may be executed. For example, the effect is equivalent to the pending change effect in which the pending lamp image is switched by involving another object image in the pending lamp image, and the other object image is involved in the votive panel image 606 instead of the pending lamp image. A certain amount of points is added when the ema image 606 is replaced with the image displayed, when a special reach effect (SP reach) is missed, or when a specific effect occurs. For example, the votive panel image 606 is replaced (or a lottery for replacement) is performed based on the value. It should be noted that when such replacement is performed, it is preferable to perform control so as to prevent downgrading of the setting suggestion effect (votive panel image 606) shown in Feature 2 described later.

The feature 1 and modifications of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010. FIG. For example, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 performs an advantageous notification effect (for example, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") winning effect) before the start of the end demo in a special game such as a big bonus. When executed, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the end demonstration effect. In addition, the effect determination means 1304 may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect when the advantageous notification effect is not executed before the end demonstration of the special game is started. The advantageous notification performance in the slot machine 1010 may be a performance in which a plurality of symbols are aligned in a specific manner during execution of a special game, or may be a performance in which ART winning is reported when a predetermined button is pressed. It should be noted that a setting suggestion effect may be displayed within the advantageous notification effect (ART winning notification effect).

<Feature 2. Prevention of Downgrading of Setting Suggestion Production>
The effect determination means 303 associates and stores a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities. In the third embodiment, the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are effects in which votive picture images 606 are presented in different modes. It can also be said that a plurality of priorities are associated with each other and stored.

In the third embodiment, higher priority is associated with setting suggestion effects (in other words, votive panel image 606) that are more profitable for the player. Specifically, as shown in (1) to (11) below, setting suggestion effects with a narrow range of setting values to be suggested (in other words, the actual setting values are easier to specify) are associated with higher priority.

(1) Suggestion setting effect of presenting an ema image 606 suggesting a set value of 2 or more (set values 2 to 6)→Priority 1
(2) A setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 suggesting a set value of 3 or more (set values 3 to 6)→Priority 2
(3) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 suggesting a high setting (setting values 4 to 6)→Priority 3
(4) Setting suggestion rendering presenting an ema image 606 suggesting that the setting value is an odd number (setting value 1, 3 or 5)→Priority 3
(5) Setting suggestion rendering presenting an ema image 606 suggesting that the setting value is an even number (setting value 2, 4 or 6)→Priority 3

(6) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 that definitely suggests (in other words, informs) setting 1 →priority 4
(7) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 definitely suggesting setting 2→Priority 4
(8) Setting suggestion effect of presenting votive picture image 606 definitely suggesting setting 3→Priority 4
(9) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 definitely suggesting setting 4→Priority 5
(10) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 definitely suggesting setting 5→Priority 5
(11) Setting suggestion effect of presenting an ema image 606 definitely suggesting setting 6→Priority 6 (maximum priority)

After executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (4) above), the effect determination means 303 performs the setting suggestion corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. Restricts the execution of the effect (for example, setting suggestion effect of (1) above). In other words, the effect determination means 303 restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively low priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively high priority. In the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is prohibited. For example, the effect determining means 303 may cancel the execution when the setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second priority is won by lottery after the setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first priority is executed.

Note that the effect determination means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the same priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to a certain priority. Further, the priorities (6) to (11) above are such that the higher the set value, the higher the priority, from the viewpoint that the higher the set value is, the more advantageous it is for the player. As described above, in the embodiment, the narrower the range of setting values suggested as the primary parameter and the higher the setting value of the secondary parameter, the higher the priority given.

As a modification, the effect determination means 303 may associate and store a higher priority for a set value with a higher game advantage, regardless of the range of suggested set values. For example, setting 1→priority 1, setting 2→priority 2, setting 5→priority 5, setting 6→priority 6 may be determined. The association with this setting value is associated with the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage among one or more setting values suggested by the setting suggestion effect. However, for odd number suggestions (settings "1", "3", "5" suggestions), even number suggestions (settings "2", "4", "6"), etc., which should be treated on the same level, set the same priority It is desirable to keep In addition, a setting suggestion effect of a type in which a certain set value is deterministic is set with a high priority because the appearance of the setting suggestion effect after that has little meaning. After executing the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value corresponding to the first priority, the effect determining means 303 performs setting for suggesting the setting value corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. You may restrict execution of suggestion production.

As another modified example, the effect determination means 303 makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect of priority 4 or higher after executing the setting suggestion effect of priority 6, and restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect of priority 1 to 3. may Further, the effect determining means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the priority 2 to 6 after executing the setting suggestion effect of the priority 4, and restrict the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the priority 1. - 特許庁In this manner, the execution of the setting suggestion effect having a lower priority than the already executed setting suggestion effect by a predetermined value or more (for example, 2 or more) may be restricted. In other words, execution of suggestion effects with priorities within a predetermined range from the priority of the set suggestion effects that have already been executed may be permitted. Also, priority 1 to priority 3 may be grouped as level 1, priority 4 to priority 6 as level 2, and execution of the setting suggestion effect at the same level as the already executed setting suggestion effect may be permitted. .

As yet another modification, the effect determination means 303 stores a setting suggestion prohibition flag (or a setting suggestion prohibition flag) when displaying a setting suggestion effect indicating the content (votive panel image 606) of deterministically informing the maximum setting value. The prohibition flag is turned on), and while the flag is stored (or when the flag is on), the lottery as to whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Alternatively, as a result of the lottery, the setting-suggestion effect may be won, or the execution of the setting-suggestion effect may be cancelled.

Another modified example will be described. The setting suggesting effect suggests different set values according to different combinations of the type of image to be displayed on the effect display device 60, the sound pattern output from the speaker 108, and the light emission pattern of the decorative lamp 111. may For example, a combination (first combination) of the rainbow light emission of the decoration lamp 111, the voice "maybe you can believe it", and the image indicating the setting of 3 or higher is a setting suggesting effect suggesting the setting of 3 or higher with a reliability of 100%. may be defined as A lottery table for determining the type of effect referred to by the effect determining means 303 is selected with a predetermined probability when the setting suggestion effect of the first combination is set to 3 or more, and selected when set to 2 or less. may be configured not to

Further, a combination (second combination) of normal light emission of the decorative lamp 111, a voice "Maybe you're in good shape," and an image indicating a setting of 3 or higher is used as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 3 or higher with a reliability of 40%. may be determined. In the lottery table, the possibility of the setting value when the second combination of the setting suggestion effect is selected is set at 3 or more: less than the setting 2 = 4: 6 (for example, set at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won) The sum of the set number range that wins the second combination in the case of the value "3" to "6" is calculated as the second value in the case of the set value "1" to "6" at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won It may be configured so that the value divided by the total sum of the range of numbers that win the combination is "0.4"). In this way, even when the same setting suggesting image (for example, the votive panel image 606) is displayed, if the output contents of other effect devices to be combined differ, the reliability of the setting suggesting may be different.

For example, the priority of setting suggestion effects that can be selected in the lottery table may be set higher as the suggested setting value range becomes narrower in the following order of Pattern 1<Pattern 2<Pattern 3<Pattern 4.
Pattern 1. Setting 2 or higher suggestion pattern (image only, reliability 30%)
Pattern 2. Setting 2 or more suggestion pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up light emission, reliability 100%)
pattern3. Suggestion pattern of setting 3 or more (image only, confidence level 40%)
pattern 4. Setting 3 or more suggestion pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up light emission, reliability 100%)
As another example, the priority of the confirmation notification and the high-reliability effect may be increased so that the priority is pattern 3<pattern 2. FIG.

Another modified example will be described. Since the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demo is conditional on the V stock (that is, the holding series, and as a modification, the transition to the advantageous specific game state such as variable probability), it is considered that the execution conditions are strict in the first place. For example, this is because the condition of the reservation group is satisfied only when winning is won in the reservation or when the jackpot is achieved in the time saving mode. Therefore, even if the conditions such as the holding group are not satisfied, the setting suggesting effect at the time of the ending demonstration may be executed exceptionally. However, the winning probability of this exceptional setting suggesting effect in the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the setting suggesting effect is set lower than the winning probability at the time of establishment of the pending combination. Furthermore, it may be constructed so that the winning can be made only in the case of the first win (normal win, for example, a win in a state other than the rush state).

Also, a player with a lot of gaming experience can easily recognize that the setting suggesting effect suggests a set value. Therefore, when the condition of the reservation group or the like is not satisfied, the effect determination means 303 wins the lottery for execution of the setting suggestion effect, and the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, etc.) at a specific timing during the end demonstration effect. When is pressed, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a so-called back button effect. The back button effect can be seen by a player who is familiar with the game, or by a person who has the knowledge that there is a suggested setting. Therefore, the button used for the back button effect here is a sub-button (volume adjustment button, cross key 110, etc.) different from the effect button used in the normal game, so that the setting suggestion effect due to the beginner's erroneous operation. Display can be prevented.

The feature 2 and the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010 . For example, the effect determination means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 associates and stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities, and after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, sets the first priority. Execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the lower second priority may be restricted.

<Feature 3. V Non-execution of end demo setting suggestion effect when not winning >
When the V winning occurs during the small winning game, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect (small winning advance notice effect) and the execution timing, and if the condition described in feature 1 is satisfied, the special game ends. It determines whether or not to execute a setting suggesting effect during a demonstration (in other words, a role-linked operation end demonstration). At the time when the special game end demonstration is started, it may be determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the execution of the big win based on the stoppage of the big win pattern, the determination of the V prize is not performed, so that the lottery of the setting suggestion performance is performed at the start of the big win game or the start of the big win ending demonstration performance.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment as well as in the second embodiment, when there is no V winning during the small winning game, the game is shifted to the normal game without developing into a big winning. Specifically, after closing time (3.5 seconds) after the end of the final opening of the big winning port 20 in the small winning game + demo time (for example, 0.1 second) after the end of the small winning game, the normal state Move to gaming.

During the closing time after the final opening of the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game, the opening/closing control means 275 of the main board 200 closes the entrance of the big winning hole 20 (for example, the slide plate 540 in FIG. 50). It is necessary to open and close the valve member in the specific area (for example, the specific area opening/closing device 552 in FIG. 50) to eliminate ball clogging and increase the possibility of passage through the specific area. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the closing time (3.5 seconds in the embodiment). During the above-described closing time, the big winning opening 20 is closed, so it seems to the player that the round has ended. Therefore, it is desired to execute the small winning ending demonstration effect, but if the small winning ending demonstration time is also lengthened, the judgment of the V winning with the remaining ball during the small winning ending demonstration when the V winning does not occur while the big winning opening 20 is open. Therefore, the end demonstration performance must be made redundant so as to be replaced with the transition to the big win game, the performance control becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is rather spoiled. In order to solve such a problem, the end demonstration time of the small winning game is shortened while the closing time is lengthened.

A performance determining means 303 executes a small winning game ending demonstration performance when there is no V winning during the small winning game. In the third embodiment, for 3.6 seconds, which is the closing time after the last opening of the big winning port 20 in the small winning game + the demonstration time for ending the small winning game, the ending demonstration performance of the small winning game is executed. That is, the effect determination means 303, when there is no V winning during the small winning game, the time (3.6 seconds) shorter than the execution time of the end demonstration effect of the special game (13 seconds in the third embodiment), the small winning game Execute the end demonstration effect.

The effect determination means 303 restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the small winning game, even if the V stock effect has been executed (the V stock image 592 has been displayed) by then. , prohibits or cancels the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Since the time scale for the small win end demonstration effect when V is not won is very short (3.6 seconds even when the closing time of the big prize opening 20 is added), it is difficult to execute a meaningful setting suggestive effect. is.

<Feature 4. Setting difference in hold change frequency>
The effect determination means 303 of the third embodiment shifts to a special game (a big hit and a small hit in the third embodiment, hereinafter collectively referred to as , simply referred to as "hit".) can be executed over a plurality of symbol variations up to the future symbol variations.

In the third embodiment, the effect determination means 303 displays a pending change effect as the suggestive effect. A performance determining means 303 changes the color of the suspension lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension targeted for pre-reading by the advance determination information to a color different from the default color (for example, white) as a suspension change performance. Specifically, the default color is changed to blue, green, red, and gold by one or more steps. In addition, the target of the pending change effect may be the special figure 1 suspension, or may be both the special figure 1 suspension and the special figure 2 suspension.

That is, the effect determining means 303 can change the color of the pending lamp image one or more times, triggered by one or more pattern fluctuation digests after starting the pending change effect. For example, the special figure 2 hold that was the target of prefetching is the fourth hold of the variation ranking (hereinafter also referred to as "hold 4".), the third hold (hereinafter also referred to as "hold 3".), the second hold ( Hereinafter also referred to as "suspension 2".), 1st suspension (holding of the next change target, hereinafter also referred to as "suspension 1".) As it progresses, the color of the suspension lamp image indicating the special figure 2 suspension Can be changed one or more times.

A performance determining means 303 stores a suspension change lottery table defining a plurality of scenarios (patterns) of suspension change performances, refers to the suspension change lottery table, and determines a specific scenario to be executed in the current suspension change performance. . The hold change lottery table is designed so that the color of the hold lamp image in the final stage (hold 1) of the change of the hold lamp image is blue, green, red, and gold, in that order, the probability of winning is high. Further, the scenario of the pending change effect is designed so that the expected degree of winning suggested by the aspect (color) of the pending lamp image is equal to or higher than the expected degree suggested by the aspect of the previous pattern variation. That is, the scenario of the pending change effect is designed so that the color of the pending lamp image changes stepwise and irreversibly in the order of blue, green, red, and gold.

58 and 59 show an example of a pending change lottery table. FIG. 58 shows a hold change lottery table (hereinafter "off hold change lottery table") according to the type of sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold (trigger hold in the figure) to be read ahead is off. ) is shown. FIG. 59 shows a lottery table (hereinafter referred to as "hit hold change lottery table") for hold change production according to the type of sub-variation pattern (variation production pattern) when the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is hit. showing. Effect determination means 303 may identify the sub-variation pattern of the special figure 2 suspension of the lookahead target according to the result of prior pattern determination (variation pattern range) for the lookahead target special figure 2 suspension.

In both tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, the total number of random numbers for effect is set to 10000, and numbers (selection probabilities) are assigned to 47 scenarios of pending change effects. The loss hold change setting table and the hit hold change setting table are provided for each set value, and the effect determination means 303 refers to the loss hold change setting table and the hit hold change setting table corresponding to the setting value of the own machine, and refers to the hold change setting table. Decide on a play scenario.

In the pachinko game machine 500, the probability that the holding lamp image indicating the special figure 2 holding to be read ahead in the holding change effect becomes a specific mode is stored in the setting change device 170 (actually, it is also stored in the RAM of the sub board 300 stored). A particular aspect is the gold color in the third embodiment, hereinafter also referred to as "gold reserve". In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the appearance frequency of money reserve, in other words, the selection probability of the scenario in which money reserve finally appears is increased in the case of high setting. This means that the higher the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lower the expectation of winning when money is withheld (also referred to as the reliability of money withholding). I can say

Specifically, at setting 1, the reliability of holding gold is about 99%, the higher the setting, the lower the reliability of holding gold, and at setting 6, the reliability of holding gold is about 70%. , a losing hold change lottery table and a win hold change lottery table are designed. For example, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 (hatched area in FIG. 58) in the lost hold change lottery table for setting 1, and the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the win hold change lottery table for setting 1 (FIG. 59 The number assigned to the shaded area) is (1) the probability of being an outlier variation, the probability of selecting an outlier variation pattern that can be subject to prefetching, and the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the prefetching lottery (that is, Probability of winning a prefetch that becomes a gold reserve when a certain hold becomes a prefetch target hold and an off variation is executed), (2) probability of winning variation, probability of selecting a winning variation pattern that can be a prefetch target hold, The ratio of the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the prefetch lottery multiplied by the probability of winning (that is, the probability of winning the prefetch with gold reserve when a certain hold is prefetch target hold and hit variation is executed) is 1:99 is set to be On the other hand, the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the losing hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to the scenarios of ID36 to ID47 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 6 are the above ( The ratio of 1) and (2) is set to 3:7.

The reliability of the blue display of the hold lamp image (blue hold), the green display of the hold lamp image (green hold), and the red display of the hold lamp image (red hold) is constant regardless of the setting value of the device itself. for example 5%, 10% and 20% in sequence. The reliability of blue hold, green hold, and red hold may also be realized by the ratio of the number range in the losing hold change lottery table to the number range in the win hold change lottery table.

In this way, in the hold change effect, by designing a specific aspect of the hold lamp image that changes in stages irreversibly to lead to a setting suggestion, a mid-stage change aspect (for example, blue, green, red ), in addition to the expectation about the success or failure of ``This green reserve may be successful,'' ``If it changes one more time, it may be possible to set it high.'' It is a setting, but it seems highly possible.” This increases the player's expectations regarding the setting, and makes it easier to increase the player's desire to play the game. In addition, even if the money hold is not successful, the player can have a sense of expectation for the high setting, and the bad impression that ``the high expectation hold has failed'' is said to be ``the possibility of high setting has increased''. It can be reduced with a good impression, and the decrease in desire to play can be suppressed.

A first modification regarding feature 4 will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the suspension change effect for changing the mode of the suspension lamp image from the suspension winning to the suspension 1 has been described. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 generates an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning of the change (hereinafter referred to as "the suggested effect ) may be displayed. Here, the suggestive effect may have an appearance similar to the pending lamp image, and the effect control means 304 shifts the pending lamp image displayed in the pending 1 before the change starts to the object of the suggestive effect. In addition, the holding lamp image and the object of the suggestive effect may be interlocked.

The suggestive effect object may be controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, default color, blue, green, red, and gold), similar to the holding lamp image of the third embodiment. It may be designed so that the degree of expectation of winning differs depending on the mode of presentation. It is also assumed here that the degree of expectation for winning increases in the order of blue<green<red<gold. Then, the probability that the object of the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode (gold here, hereinafter also referred to as a “gold object”) may differ according to the set value stored in the setting change device 170. .

Also in this modification, the effect determination means 303 may determine the effect mode of the object of the suggestive effect by referring to the loss hold change lottery table or the win hold change lottery table for each set value of the own machine. The losing hold change lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table in this modification, like the tables in FIGS. is assigned a number.

Also in this modification, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is set to 1, the reliability of the money reserve is about 99%. The losing hold change lottery table and the hit hold change lottery table may be designed to be 70%. Also in this modified example, the same effect as the feature 4 is obtained.

Note that the effect determination means 303 may collectively determine the change scenario of the pending lamp image from the pending winning to the pending 1 and the display mode of the object in the suggestive effect at the time of the pending winning. Further, the change of the hold lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestive effect may be defined in the losing hold change lottery table and the win hold change lottery table as a series of scenarios. That is, a single scenario may include both a change scenario of the holding lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestive effect.

A second modification regarding feature 4 will be described. Only the money reserve display at a specific timing in the process from the time of reserve winning (when the reserve occurs) to the reserve 1 may be subject to the difference in appearance rate depending on the set value. Here, the specific timing is assumed to be when the hold occurs (corresponding to "hold winning" in FIG. 59), that is, the gold hold display at the time when the hold lamp image is first displayed (hereinafter "direct boiling money hold" Also called.) is provided with a difference according to the set value.

In this modification, the reliability of the direct boiling gold reserve is set to about 99% in setting 1, and the reliability of the direct boiling gold reserve gradually decreases as the setting increases, and the reliability of the gold reserve is set to about 70% in setting 6. do. In this case, the number assigned to the ID47 scenario (the bottom of the hatched area in FIG. 58) in the setting 1 loss hold change lottery table, and the ID 47 scenario (FIG. 59) in the hit hold change lottery table for setting 1 The number assigned to the bottom of the shaded area) is the probability of (3) the probability of being an outlier, the probability of selecting an outlier variation pattern that can be subject to prefetching, and the probability of winning ID 47 in the prefetching lottery (i.e. , the probability of winning the prefetch that becomes the gold reserve when a certain hold becomes the prefetch target hold and the deviation variation is executed), , The ratio of the probability of winning ID 47 in the prefetch lottery (that is, the probability of winning the prefetch that becomes a gold reserve when a certain hold becomes a prefetch target hold and hit variation is executed) is 1:99 It should be set so that In addition, the number assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the losing hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the number assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 6 are the above-mentioned (3), (4 ) is set to be 3:7.

It should be noted that the target of the setting suggestion may be a combination of suspension occurrence (initial display timing), suspension 1, and the variation, or may be limited to an arbitrary location. In addition, when targeting a specific hold (money hold) at the time of hold occurrence, the effect determination means 303 may output a sound indicating a chance when the money hold occurs at the time of hold occurrence. A special pattern may be output with a high probability as the pattern of the voice indicating . It should be noted that, when determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect (holding change effect, etc.) at the time of pending occurrence, at the timing other than the execution of the effect lottery accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 500 (that is, the start of pattern fluctuation), the setting suggestion effect It can be said that it determines the presence or absence of execution and the mode.

A third modification regarding feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the target of the setting suggestion effect is gold reserve, but as a modification, setting suggestion is made of a form of reserve lamp image with relatively low hit reliability, such as "blue reserve" in which the reserve lamp image is blue. It may be used as a target for production. For example, in setting 1, the reliability of green reserve may be about 3%, and the reliability of blue reserve may gradually increase, and in setting 6, the reliability of blue reserve may be about 6%.

In this case, the numbers assigned to the scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 (upper row in FIG. 58) in the lost hold change lottery table for setting 1, and the scenarios for IDs 1 to 4 in the hit hold change lottery table for setting 1 (in FIG. 59 The numbers assigned to the upper row) are (5) the probability of being an outlier, the probability of selecting an outlier variation pattern that can be subject to prefetching, and the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the prefetching lottery (that is, a certain Probability of winning the prefetch that becomes blue hold when the hold becomes prefetch target hold and off variation is executed), (6) probability of winning variation, probability of selecting a hit variation pattern that can be prefetch target hold, prefetch The ratio of the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the lottery (that is, the probability of winning the prefetch that becomes blue hold when a certain hold becomes the prefetch target hold and hit variation is executed) is 97:3. It should be set so that In addition, the numbers assigned to scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 in the lost hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the numbers assigned to scenarios with IDs 1 to 4 in the hit hold change lottery table for setting 6 are the above-mentioned (5 ) and (6) should be set to 94:6.

In the embodiment, the situation in which the player is discouraged because the money reserve is lost leads to the setting suggestion, while in the third modification, the situation in which the player feels unexpected when the blue reserve wins leads to the setting suggestion. In addition, only the special figure 2 suspension with a hit result, blue suspension may be the target of the setting suggestion effect. This is because the higher the setting, the higher the distribution ratio of the winning variation to the blue reservation (for example, the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 in FIG. 59), and the implementation is easy.

A fourth modification regarding feature 4 will be described. In the hold change effect, as a rule, (a) if there is a hold that has previously changed hold (or executed a look-ahead effect other than a hold change), the new hold cannot be changed, (b) reach the previous hold Cannot be changed if there is a change, (c) Cannot be changed if there is a hold that is a hit to the previous hold, (d) Changes in the game state such as the end of the time saving or the change of the fluctuation pattern table are changes in the hold that is the target of prefetching. At least a part of it may be defined that it cannot be changed if it is done by. If there is such a prohibition, the setting suggestion is executed less frequently.

A special set suggestion lottery may be performed to provide set suggestions in situations where pending change prohibitions apply. For example, if a prohibition applies when a hold occurs, the effect determination means 303 may output a special sound indicating a chance with a predetermined probability while displaying the hold lamp image of the hold in the default color. Such a special setting suggestion lottery at the time of prohibition is executed when something visible to the player is being executed (for example, in the above situation (A), when the hold lamp image of the prefetch target hold is not the default) It is desirable to execute only

Note that the effect determining means 303 prohibits simultaneous execution of multiple prefetch effects in prefetch effects other than pending change effects (same color chance prefetch etc. to be described later), while setting a plurality of pending change effects related to mutually different holds. You can proceed at the same time. In this case, the performance determining means 303 can execute a new suspension change performance as a setting suggesting performance even during the execution of the look-ahead performance of the same category (for example, another suspension change performance targeting a different suspension). Further, the effect determination means 303 may permit the display of a plurality of pending change effects below a predetermined level, while prohibiting the display of a plurality of pending change effects of a predetermined level or higher. For example, multiple simultaneous displays are allowed for hold change effects where the range of change falls within the default color to green hold, and multiple simultaneous displays are prohibited for hold change effects where the change range reaches red hold or gold hold. good too.

A fifth modification regarding feature 4 will be described. In the look-ahead effect (and the lottery for the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead information of the variation pattern (that is, the information of the prior pattern determination) can also be used as a parameter. Therefore, when a specific change pattern executes a hold change effect for the hold scheduled to be executed, the hold lamp image that was displayed when transitioning to the specific change pattern (here, an object indicating the change, " The aspect (color, etc.) of the variable ramp image may be used to suggest settings.

Specifically, the allocation ratio of the color of the variable lamp image when the battle reach is developed as a specific variation pattern may be set as follows. For setting 1, default color: 30%, blue: 30%, green: 20%, red: 10%, gold: 10%. Alternatively, in the case of setting 6, the default color may be 30%, blue: 10%, green: 25%, red: 20%, and gold: 15%. In this manner, the higher the set value, the higher the effect determination means 303 may display the variable ramp image in a color indicating that the probability of winning is high. In this case, the higher the set value, the lower the expectation of winning when the color (red, gold) originally indicating the high expectation of winning appears.

The default color is the color in the case of non-winning of pending change (or non-winning of the variable lamp image change notice lottery drawn at the start of variation). Therefore, by not providing a difference due to the setting value for the display of the default color, it is possible to provide a difference due to the setting value for the high-expectation color while maintaining the same probability of even one pending change as a whole. That is, in the case of high setting, it can be configured so that the pending change effect does not become a bargain sale state. It should be noted that the configuration in which the display in the default color does not differ depending on the set value can also be applied to the suggestion of settings in the gold reserve described in the embodiment.

Furthermore, by combining the idea of providing a setting difference in the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead information of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern and the idea of providing a setting difference in the look-ahead effect (specific look-ahead effect) due to the money hold, the money hold is displayed. Under the circumstances, the appearance frequency (probability) of situations such as the fluctuation ending (out of reach) before reaching the super reach may be used as a setting suggestion. For example, before the development of super reach (a branch of normal reach, during the production of inciting the development of super reach), the pattern fluctuation stops, and if the money is held when the hit occurs, it is possible to suggest a high setting. is. In this case, it is assumed that super reach is confirmed in principle, except for exceptional circumstances that suggest such setting, for gold reserve or red reserve or higher.

A sixth modification regarding feature 4 will be described. The technique described in feature 4 is an effect that irreversibly changes in units of variation across multiple variations, in other words, if the effect increases the expectation of transition to an advantageous game each time it changes, the change in hold It can also be applied to a look-ahead effect different from the effect. For example, it can be applied to same-color chance presentation using the color of the decorative pattern 61 . In the same-color chance eye production, three decorative patterns 61 modes (here, colors) are applied over multiple fluctuations from the occurrence of the hold to the end of the corresponding fluctuation for the hold that is the target of the look-ahead (in other words, the hit suggestion). It is a look-ahead production that changes the

The mode of the decorative pattern 61 in the same-color chance display is, in order from the lowest expected level, blue pattern (blue decorative pattern 61), green pattern, red pattern, red pattern + gold effect (for setting suggestion), red pattern + It may be a rainbow effect (hit confirmed). And it may be designed so that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of selection of the red symbol+gold effect is, similarly to the gold reservation of the embodiment. In other words, it may be designed such that the higher the set value, the lower the expectation of winning the red symbol + gold effect. For example, the expectation level at setting 1 may be 70% and the expectation level at setting 6 may be 50%. In other words, it may be designed to suggest a higher setting as the red pattern + gold effect is more out of line.

In the same-color chance display, a replacement lottery is possible until just before the stop of the pattern variation (for example, before the decorative pattern 61 is slowed down). Therefore, the effect determination means 303 may determine the presence or absence and mode of the same-color chance eye effect in the variation by lottery after the start of the symbol variation. In the case of an effect design in which the chance eye effect of the same color should be displayed continuously for a predetermined number of times or more, the effect determining means 303 restricts (for example, prohibits) the execution of the chance eye effect of the same color when suspension 1 occurs when suspension occurs. may

As another example, the technology described in feature 4 may be applied to the operation effect of the movable accessory 66 and the zone transition effect as another example of the applicable look-ahead effect. The operation effect of the movable accessory 66 continues the operation of the movable accessory 66 in a manner according to the preliminary determination information of the suspension from the next change after the occurrence of the prefetch target suspension to the variation corresponding to the suspension. It may be a look-ahead effect. In addition, the zone transition effect is a different effect zone from the first effect zone among a plurality of types of effect zones with different effect tendencies (motifs, characters, backgrounds, stories, etc.) It may be an effect of switching to the second effect zone according to the prior determination information.

In the case of the operation effect of the movable accessory 66 and the zone transition effect, as with the gold reserve of feature 4, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of these effects. low), a lottery table similar to that in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be defined. Alternatively, a lottery table similar to that shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be determined so that the higher the setting, the more likely the outcome is to fail while the effects progress to a high expectation pattern.

A seventh modification regarding feature 4 will be described. The effect determination means 303 may display the pending lamp image as an image showing a number. In addition, the effect determination means 303 may set, as the number of the hold lamp image, a number suggesting the tenpai pattern (the type of the decorative pattern 61) when the fluctuation corresponding to the hold (the fluctuation) becomes the ready-to-win. . In this case, the effect determination means 303 may establish a ready-to-win with the decorative pattern 61 having a number different from (or contradictory to) the number of the holding lamp image when suggesting the setting at the time of the change. Either the number of the holding lamp image or the number of the tenpai pattern in the variation may be used for the setting suggestion.

An eighth modification regarding feature 4 will be described. If the player is not aware of the change in the reliability (difference due to the set value) of a specific mode (for example, gold reserve) in the hold change effect, the high-expectation hold change effect will be displayed, but will not come off. By putting it away, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the variation result to be a hit will be lost. Therefore, the effect determination means 303 may change the variable lamp image during the pattern variation corresponding to the target suspension of the suspension change effect.

For example, the effect determination means 303 may make a premium character or a rare character appear from among the money reserves (the gold variable lamp image), and suggest a setting based on the type of the character made to appear. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 may display an advance notice effect such as setting value notification by a visual change such as a change in the dialogue of the character, or a change in the setting value. In addition, if the above-mentioned effect is displayed after the hit-drop branch of the variable effect or the notice effect is lost, the player may misunderstand that a hit has occurred due to the so-called resurrection effect. It is desirable to restrict it so that it is not executed.

The present invention has been described above based on the third embodiment. The third embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications are possible in combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. In addition, in the third embodiment, a modified example has been described for each feature.

(Fourth embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first and second embodiments Then, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the first to third embodiments, and omits the description of the common points. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements described in the base technology, the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals. do.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the following features related to the setting suggestion effect.
feature. Contradictory setting suggestion notification:
Normally, setting suggestion effects are likely to be displayed in a variety of ways when the setting is high, and when the setting is low, the execution of the display is decided in the situation where the content that suggests the advantage over the set value is set. Because it does not perform or the display is limited, the number of executable effects is small and the content tends to be monotonous. In addition, if the low setting is determined by the setting suggestion effect, there is a possibility that the player's desire to play will be lost. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, an effect that can always appear according to the rule of the game situation or according to the result of the lottery is displayed in a game situation different from (or inconsistent with) the above game situation. In this case, the setting suggesting effect is provided or the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is increased. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment is also referred to as "contradictory setting suggestion effect".

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment sets a normal effect that matches the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period and a content that is inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. Suggestive performance can be selectively executed. The normal effect and the setting suggestion effect are effects belonging to the same type of effect category (type of effect), and the same effect pattern (substantially the same as the player's appearance) can be selected in different situations. In addition, the “same” of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may mean that the lottery table and lottery result are the same, and even if the lottery table and lottery result are different, the effect visually recognized by the player is the same (almost the same appearance). (including substantially identical). As a result, even if the game machine is actually set at a low setting, the normal effect can be executed with the same content as when the game machine is set at a high setting, so that the variety of effects can be realized and the high setting can be achieved from the player's point of view. Since the nature remains, it becomes easy to promote the player's willingness to play.

The above features of the fourth embodiment can be implemented as a single unit, or can be combined arbitrarily with the features described in the base technology and the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the contradictory setting suggestion effect will be described in detail.

The effect determining means 303 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, which is the period in which the game state advantageous to the player continues, It is possible to execute a normal effect that matches the number of games played (so to speak, the number of consecutive games). In addition, when the special game ends during the advantageous period, the effect determining means 303 sets, with a predetermined probability, not the normal effect but the effect with contents inconsistent with the number of times the special game has been executed so far during the advantageous period. It can be executed as a suggestive production.

The advantageous period in the fourth embodiment is the period of continuous residence state shown in FIG. The continuous game period is a period in which the normal game in the time-saving state and the special game (including the small win V and the symbol big win) are repeated, and is also the period during which the aforementioned rush effect is executed. The effect determination means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a special game end screen when the special game ends during the consecutive house period. The special game end screen may be displayed in a special game end demonstration effect.

FIG. 60 shows an example of a special game end screen. The special game end screen 610 includes a background image 612 including characters, etc., a result image 614 and a trophy image 616 . The result image 614 shows the number of jackpots (○○ times) during the current consecutive game period and the number of prize balls paid out during the current consecutive game period (××××PT). Trophy image 616 shows a trophy for setting suggestions.

The effect determination means 303 displays, as a normal effect, a trophy image 616 having content matching the number of times the special game is executed (in other words, the number of times the game is played) during the consecutive game period with a predetermined first probability. As a normal effect, the effect determining means 303 displays the trophy image 616 in one of a plurality of types of modes according to the number of executions of the special game during the consecutive game period. The normal effect is displayed when a lottery is won as to whether or not the display of the trophy image 616 is superimposed on the end screen 610 of the special game, and is displayed when the execution of the normal effect is won. Since the trophy image 616 is associated with the number of executions of the special game as described later, the trophy image 616 is displayed in a manner that does not match the setting value that is suggested when the trophy image 616 is used as the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the display of the trophy image 616 accompanying the execution of the normal effect can be said to be a fake effect from the viewpoint of setting suggestion.

In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 displayed on the special game end screen 610 in the normal effect is associated with the number of executions of the special game. Specifically, a copper-colored trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “bronze trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive games of 2, and a silver-colored trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “silver trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive games of 3. , and a golden trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “golden trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive games of four. A giraffe-patterned trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “giraffe-patterned trophy”) corresponds to the number of consecutive games of 5, and a rainbow-colored (eg, 7-color) trophy image 616 (also referred to as a “rainbow trophy”) corresponds to a consecutive game of 5 times. It corresponds to 6 times or more.

In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays a trophy image 616 having contents inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed (in other words, the number of consecutive games) during the advantageous period as a setting suggestion effect at a second probability determined in advance. . In an embodiment, the colors of the trophy image 616 are associated with suggested settings. Specifically, bronze trophies correspond to settings 2 or higher (settings 2 to 6), silver trophies correspond to settings 3 or higher (settings 3 to 6), and gold trophies correspond to settings 4 or higher (settings 4 to 6). Correspondingly, the giraffe print trophy corresponds to setting 5 or higher (setting 5 or 6), and the rainbow trophy corresponds to setting 6.

The effect determination means 303 stores a lottery table (also called a "trophy lottery table") for determining execution of a normal effect or a setting-suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 (FIGS. 61 to 65). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61, the display of a plurality of types of trophy images 616 corresponding to the number of consecutive games during the advantageous period, which is the normal effect, and the display of the trophy image 616, which is the setting suggestion effect, are displayed in the same manner. A trophy lottery table is stored so that it can be determined by one lottery. The effect determination means 303 refers to a trophy lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive games during the advantageous period, and determines the color of the trophy image 616 to be displayed on the special game end screen 610 by lottery based on the setting value of the own machine. Regarding the display of the trophy image 616, the lottery for the normal effect and the setting suggesting effect may be performed separately using separate tables. A lottery for a normal performance is not performed when a lottery is won, or only the setting suggesting performance is preferentially displayed when individual lotteries are won at the same time, and the setting suggesting performance is executed as much as possible. is preferred.

FIG. 61 shows an example of a trophy lottery table. The lottery table shown in the figure is a lottery table referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive houses is two. The lottery table in FIG. 10 is described with a value range of 10000, and indicates the number (selection probability) of each trophy according to the setting value of the player's own machine. The appearance probability of the trophy image 616 is designed to be 20% (the total number of IDs 1 to 5 is 2000), that is, the trophy image 616 is displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a probability of 20%. Here, the "appearance probability" means the total probability of the display probability of the trophy image 616 as the normal effect and the display probability of the trophy image 616 as the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, it is set to display a bronze trophy when the number of consecutive games is 2, to display a silver trophy when the number of consecutive games is 3, etc. It is also called "gase" below in the sense that it is not a suggestion. Also, the lottery table in FIG. 61 is designed not to select a trophy suggesting a set value higher than the set value of the player's own machine. For example, in setting 4, the giraffe print trophy and the rainbow trophy are not assigned numbers, ie they are not selected.

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the silver trophy area for setting 3, the silver trophy and gold trophy area for setting 4, the silver trophy, gold trophy, and giraffe pattern trophy area for setting 5, and the setting 6 In the case of , the area above the silver trophy is the setting suggestion area. In addition, except for the case of setting 2, the area of the bronze trophy is an area that becomes a fake (in other words, normal effect). In addition, the area of the bronze trophy in the case of setting 2 is an area where it is unclear whether the setting is suggested or fake (from the player's point of view, the correspondence between the number of consecutive games and the trophy image 616 is not in a contradictory relationship, so it can be treated as a "fake"). good).

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the false ratio (performance probability of normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is designed to be 50%. In addition, the execution probability of the setting suggesting effect (reliability of displaying the setting suggesting effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is also designed to be 50%. For example, in the case of setting 4, the set number range of 1000 is assigned to the bronze trophy as the normal effect ("Gase" of setting suggestion effect). A setting range of 1000 (total) is also assigned to silver trophies and gold trophies as setting suggestion effects. Note that, in the fourth embodiment, there is no setting suggestion effect (trophy image 616) that suggests a set value of "1". Since this is a "ghost", the gag rate is exceptionally 100% instead of 50% when the set value is "1".

According to the configuration of the embodiment, when the special game ends during the consecutive game period, the effect is common in that the trophy image 616 is used. To selectively execute a setting suggestion performance of consistent contents. As a result, even if the gaming machine is set to the low setting, the trophy image 616 can be displayed in the same manner as when the setting is to the high setting, which can lead to motivation for playing the game. For example, even if the setting value of the gaming machine is "1", when the number of consecutive games is "4", there is a possibility that a gold trophy suggesting a setting of 4 or more is displayed as a normal effect, and the player's willingness to play. is easier to maintain.

The technique described in the fourth embodiment is also useful for the slot machine 1010. FIG. The advantageous period in the slot machine 1010 is, for example, a period during which ART and special games are repeated. The effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 determines the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period (even if only the number of big bonuses) is determined with a first probability when the special game (big bonus or regular bonus) ends during the advantageous period. good) may be executed, and with a second probability, a setting suggestive effect may be executed that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period.

In addition, the "advantageous period" in the fourth embodiment is a continuous game period, and has been described as a period in which the normal game in the time-saving state and the special game (including the small win V and the symbol big win) are repeated. It is sufficient if the situation is recognized as a "continuous game period", and for machines that do not have a small win V as a game machine specification, the period during which the probability fluctuation period is active and the special game is repeated, etc. can be designed as an "advantageous period". is also possible. Also, even if the game state in the main control device ends the "advantageous period", it is within a predetermined period (for example, after the "continuous game period" ends, until the special symbols change by 30, etc.) In the case of returning to the "advantageous period", it is considered that the "advantageous period" continues, and processing is performed on the effect control means (sub CPU) side (the number of special games, etc. at the end of the previous consecutive residence period (Inherit the information for determining the setting suggestion effect).

The present invention has been described above based on the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. Modified examples are given below.

A first modified example will be described. In the above embodiment, the display of the trophy image 616 suggesting a setting value higher than the setting value of the player's own aircraft is restricted. may be configured. FIG. 62 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, some of the values of the "fake area" or "area where setting is suggested or false" in the trophy lottery table of FIG. non-selected area). Thereby, for example, when the setting value of the player's own device is "3", the effect determining means 303 can display a gold trophy and a giraffe-patterned trophy suggesting a setting value higher than the setting value of the player's own device.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, setting 6 is confirmed when a rainbow trophy appears as a setting suggestion, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. . Therefore, the rainbow trophy in this modification suggests that setting 6 is rich. Settings 1 to 3 are set so that rainbow trophies do not appear. The purpose is to prevent the divergence from becoming large. Further, as for the rainbow trophy, setting 4 and setting 5 may be set so as not to appear, and configured as a special set value confirmation effect.

Further, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, when the setting is low (for example, setting 1 to 3), no number is assigned to the rainbow trophy, that is, the rainbow trophy is not displayed as a fake. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trophy image 616 that is greatly deviated from the actual setting value from being displayed, thereby preventing the player's expectations from being excessively heightened. Also, if the player's machine is setting 1, there is no trophy that suggests setting 1, so if a trophy appears, it is all fake. Also, if the player's machine is set to 6, it can be said that there is no falsehood because any trophy will be true.

In the first modified example, the effect determination means 303 may display a trophy image 616 suggesting setting values different from the setting values of the player's own machine. Also in the embodiment, there is a possibility of displaying a normal effect that does not suggest setting. Here, the probability that the effect determination means 303 executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value of the own machine may be configured to vary according to the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period.

As a specific configuration, the trophy lottery table referred to by the effect determination means 303 may be configured such that the cheat ratio decreases as the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period increases. Also, the trophy lottery table may be configured such that when the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, the cheat ratio is lower than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined value.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the false ratio is 50% when the number of consecutive residences is 2, the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive residences is 5 has a false ratio lower than 50%. (eg, 25%, etc.). Also, for example, in the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive games is 5, the range of values assigned to the false areas shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. The range of may be expanded.

According to this aspect, as a privilege for winning a large number of big wins (small win V and pattern big win) by continuing the advantageous period, the player can be provided with a setting suggesting effect that correctly suggests the set value, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be further enhanced.

A second modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, when the special game in the advantageous period ends, the pachinko gaming machine 500 suggests setting a normal effect (fake effect) according to the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. The probability of displaying the trophy image 616 may be increased as one of the presentations. For example, the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined value or more, the number of executions reaches a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a higher probability than when the value is less than.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. The trophy lottery table in FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table in FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive games increases (here, when the number of consecutive games is 5). In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the bronze trophy area for setting 2, the bronze trophy and silver trophy area for setting 3, the bronze trophy to gold trophy area for setting 4, and the copper trophy for setting 5 The trophy-gold trophy area, the bronze trophy-gold trophy area in setting 6, and the rainbow trophy area are setting suggestion areas. In addition, the area of the giraffe-patterned trophy except for the case of setting 5 is an area that becomes a fake (in other words, a normal effect). Also, the area of the giraffe pattern trophy in the case of setting 5 is an area where it is unclear whether the setting is suggested or false.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the trophy lottery table of FIG. The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is the probability that the trophy image 616, which may be false but may suggest a setting, is displayed. For example, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%. Specifically, in the lottery table of FIG. 63, the number range for no trophy (ID0) is reduced to 7000, and the number range for selecting a trophy is expanded to 3000 compared to the lottery table of FIG. there is

According to the configuration of the second modified example, as a benefit for winning a large number of big wins (small win V and pattern big win) by continuing the advantageous period, the trophy image 616 is frequently produced (normal production or setting suggestion production). can be provided to the player, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the special game in the advantageous period ends, and when executing either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect, in the advantageous period Depending on the number of times the special game is executed, it is configured to increase the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect (in other words, it is configured to reduce the ratio of executing the normal effect, that is, the “gase” effect). good too. For example, the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined value or more, the number of executions reaches a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed in a setting suggestive effect with a higher probability than when the value is less than. In the example of five consecutive mansions in FIG. 63, the ratio of the normal effect in which some kind of trophy image 616 is displayed and the setting suggesting effect is approximately normal effect: setting suggesting effect=1 (33%):2 (67%). 61, the ratio of the setting suggesting effect is larger than the ratio of the normal effect: setting suggesting effect=1:1 shown in the example of the double house shown in FIG.

The trophy lottery table in FIG. 63 is also referred to in this modification. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the lottery table of FIG. . The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%.

In addition, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the false ratio (performance probability of normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is 50%, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the trophy image 616 is displayed. The gaseous ratio in this case is 33%. In other words, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, when the trophy image 616 is displayed, the probability that it corresponds to the setting suggestion is 67%. For example, in the case of setting 4, a set number range of 1000 is assigned to the giraffe pattern trophy as the normal effect, and a set number range of 2000 (total) is assigned to the bronze trophy to gold trophy as the setting suggestion effect.

According to the configuration of the third modified example, as a benefit for continuing the advantageous period and winning many big wins (small win V and big pattern win), the player can be provided with a setting suggestion effect by the trophy image 616 at high frequency. , can further enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, since the advantageous period is set to the "continuous period", the advantageous period may end without being able to acquire the special game, so the number of acquisitions of the special game increases during the "continuous period". The number of trials of the special game in the advantageous period decreases in inverse proportion. Therefore, in the lottery under circumstances where the number of trials can be reduced, the trophy image 616 is made easier to appear as in the second and third modifications, and the ratio of the trophy image 616 to appear as a setting suggestion is increased ( It can be said that this method can be configured to reward the player for achieving conditions that are more difficult to achieve by increasing the degree of reliability).

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the special game in the advantageous period ends, according to the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period, the set value suggested by the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be narrowed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may determine with a high probability that the trophy image 616 should be displayed in a mode with a relatively narrow range of suggested settings as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases. Alternatively, the effect determination means 303 may display the trophy image 616 in a mode with a relatively narrow range of suggested settings when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number of times or more. It may be determined more frequently.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. The trophy lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table shown in FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive games increases (here, when the number of consecutive games is 4). In the lottery table shown in the figure, the numbers are set so that the trophy appearance rate is 27% and the fake rate (appearance rate of normal effects) is 35%.

In the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive homes in the fourth modified example, the set value (or set value range) to be suggested is a set value (or set value range) less than the normal effect, and the set value Range (selection probability) is set to zero. As described above, the normal effect is a false effect in which the trophy image 616 is displayed in a color corresponding to the number of times of consecutive residences. For example, in the lottery table of FIG. 64, in the region of the bronze trophy (setting 2 or more is suggested) and the silver trophy (setting 3 or more is suggested), which is less than the gold trophy (setting 4 or more is suggested) corresponding to the number of consecutive games of 4 On the other hand, the input range is set to 0.

As another aspect, in the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive homes, the setting value range to be suggested is the set value range suggested when the production pattern of the normal production at the same timing is executed as the setting suggestion production. For wider trophy aspects, the number range may be set to 0. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 64, the bronze trophy (setting 2) is a setting suggestion effect that suggests a wider range of setting values than the gold trophy (setting 4 or more is suggested in the case of setting suggestion effect) of the normal effect corresponding to the number of consecutive games of 4 (setting 2). The number range is set to 0 for the above suggested) and silver trophies (setting 3 or higher suggested). As a result, as shown in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, when the number of consecutive games is 2, the maximum setting range for suggestions is 5 (that is, setting 2 to 6), but when the number of consecutive games is 4, the suggestions are not applicable. The maximum setting range is narrowed down to 3 (that is, setting 4 to 6).

According to the configuration of the fourth modification, by narrowing the suggestion range of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period, it is possible to accurately It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect with a higher degree.

As another aspect, besides the size of the setting value range to be suggested, the concept of the priority level of the setting suggestion effect shown in the third embodiment is adopted, and the setting suggestion effect that can be executed as the normal effect at the same timing is adopted. The number range in the lottery table may be set to 0 for the setting suggestive effect pattern having a lower priority than the priority of the effect pattern with the contents of . According to this aspect, it is possible to narrow down the suggested content to the player to content that has a higher priority and is considered to be more beneficial. In addition, in the fourth modification, the range to be suggested is narrowed (the setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value less than the setting value in the case where the normal effect is the setting suggestion is not executed), but it is completely implemented. The specification is not limited to the fact that they do not occur (set the number range to 0), but it is also possible to adopt a specification that makes them less likely to appear by lowering their execution frequency as much as possible (for example, set the number range to 10 or less).

A fifth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends during the advantageous period, the normal effect using the trophy image 616 and the setting suggestion effect are selectively executed. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303, when the specific game state (probability variable game state or time-saving game state of the pachinko gaming machine) ends as the advantageous period, normal game using the trophy image 616 in the end effect of the advantageous period The effect and the setting suggesting effect may be selectively executed. The end timing of the advantageous period may be the timing at which the time saving (variable probability) game state ends as a game state or the change in which the special figure 2 hold after the time saving ends becomes 0, and the special figure 2 after the time saving end 4 variations It can be eyes. In addition, in the case of a game machine with variable probability, the special game of normal jackpot without variable probability transition may be ended.

In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect determination means 303 displays the number of big wins (small win V+symbol big win) obtained so far during the advantageous period on the effect screen to be displayed at the end of the advantageous period. A result image 614 indicating the number of winning balls may be displayed, and a trophy image 616 may be displayed as a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect. The fifth modification differs from the fourth embodiment in the timing of displaying the trophy image 616 as the normal effect or setting suggesting effect, and can of course be combined with other modifications of the fourth embodiment.

A sixth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends during the advantageous period, a lottery is conducted on the trophy lottery table according to the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period, and the normal effect using the trophy image 616 and the setting suggestion effect are selected. executed effectively. As a modification, the effect determination means 303 is executed on the condition that a special game is won when the number of remaining games in the advantageous period (specific game state) is within a predetermined interval (in other words, within a value range). As an effect, whether or not a trophy lottery table is used and the type of the trophy lottery table are changed according to which section the special game is won, and a normal effect and a setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selectively executed. good. The effect executed under the condition that the special game is won may be the effect before transition to the special game, the special game start demo, the special game end demo, or the effect after the special game ends.

As another aspect, the effect determination means 303 is executed on the condition that a special game is won when the cumulative number of symbol variations (in other words, the cumulative number of games) executed during the advantageous period is within a predetermined interval. A normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting-suggesting effect may be selectively executed. As still another aspect, the effect determination means 303 determines that the special game has been won when the cumulative number of symbol variations executed after the end of the previous special game (in other words, the number of elapsed games) is within a predetermined interval. As the effect executed as a condition, a normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting suggesting effect may be selectively executed. As in the sixth modification, the condition that a special game is won in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous period is small or in a situation where the cumulative number of games in the advantageous period is large is set by winning the special game in the situation. Since the number of trials to perform the execution lottery of the suggested effect is reduced compared to the situation leading up to the situation, it is difficult to win the special game, that is, to perform the lottery to execute the set suggested effect. It can be said that it is a condition. In this way, when the difficulty related to the achievement of the condition for receiving the setting suggestion effect lottery is high, the setting suggestion effect lottery can be received, or the setting suggestion effect with a higher degree of reliability is executed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state, which is the advantageous period.

A seventh modification will be described. As partially described in the above fourth embodiment or modified example, the effect determination means 303 determines that the number of consecutive games during the advantageous period, in other words, the number of special games won during one or one series of advantageous periods is a predetermined value. The setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the above cases. For example, the effect determining means 303 may execute a setting suggesting effect by displaying a trophy image 616 inconsistent with the number of times of consecutive residences, as in the embodiment. In addition, regarding the display of the trophy image 616 as the setting suggestion effect, the effect determination means 303 does not display the display based on the number of consecutive games, the execution of a special game in a specific section, or the like. The setting suggesting effect may be executed when the cumulative number of game values (for example, prize balls or medals) obtained during the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, or when it belongs to a pre-divided range of a predetermined amount. For example, the effect determination means 303 causes the trophy image 616 matching the cumulative number of game values to be displayed as a normal effect with a predetermined first probability, and displays the trophy image 616 as a normal effect with a predetermined second probability instead of the normal effect. Alternatively, a trophy image 616 that is inconsistent with the cumulative number of game values may be displayed as a setting suggestion effect.

In the seventh modified example, the effect determination means 303 may execute the following (1) to (3) singly or in combination as the hard-to-achieve conditions are achieved. (1) The effect determination means 303 may increase the reliability of the setting suggestion effect, in other words, reduce the ratio of the fake effect (effect suggesting false content or the normal effect of the embodiment) with the authenticity ratio. good too. In addition, (2) the effect determination means 303 may narrow the setting value range suggested by the setting suggestion effect, in other words, even if the setting suggestion effect in which the suggested setting value range is narrow is displayed with a high probability. good. Also, (3) the effect determination means 303 may increase the winning rate of the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the lottery table (here, the trophy lottery table shown in FIGS. 61 to 64) referred to by the effect determination means 303 has a higher probability of setting suggesting effect as conditions that are more difficult to achieve are achieved. may be configured to run with

In this modified example, the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 3 (or the number of consecutive games of 3 to 5) has a total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the probability of displaying the trophy image 616) of 10. On the other hand, for the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 6 or more, the total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 20%. In addition, the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 3 times (or the number of consecutive games of 3 to 5 times) has a distribution ratio of 50%: 50% between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect, while the number of times of the consecutive game is 6 times. In the trophy lottery table described above, the allocation ratio between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 35%:65%.

In addition, in the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 3 times (or the number of consecutive games of 3 to 5 times), the image A suggesting a setting of 2 or more (that is, 5 types of settings 2 to 6) has a relatively high probability. It may be set to be selected. For example, it may be set to be selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image A in the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 6 or more. On the other hand, the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games of 6 or more may be set so that the image B suggesting a setting of 5 or more (that is, two types of setting 5 or 6) is selected with a relatively high probability. . For example, it may be set so that it is selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of image B in the trophy lottery table with the number of consecutive games being three.

Note that the performance determining means 303 executes the above (1) to (3) singly or in combination when the remaining advantageous period is short or when the remaining advantageous period is equal to or less than a predetermined value as a difficult-to-achieve condition. You may This aspect is particularly suitable for a machine equipped with a variable number of cuts (so-called ST machine). In addition, the effect determination means 303, as a difficult-to-achieve condition, the longer the duration of the advantageous period, or when the duration of the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the above (1) to (3) alone or in combination may be executed. This aspect is particularly suitable for a gaming machine with a constant variable machine or a falling spec until the next time.

As an exception to the configuration shown in the seventh modified example, when the jackpot ends one-shot, that is, in the specific game state after the first special game, the advantageous period does not occur without the occurrence of a consecutive game, which is to win the special game again in the specific game state. In the case of termination, the effect determination means 303 suggests setting of winning with a low probability (for example, a probability of about 1%, which is lower than the probability that a predetermined number of jackpots occur during the advantageous period, for example) at the end of the advantageous period. A setting suggestion effect may be displayed using a lottery table for effect (trophy lottery table). In this case, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be low, while the reliability may be high such as 95%. For example, the trophy lottery table may be set with a selection probability of 5%:95% between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect. In this way, by adopting a configuration capable of executing a highly reliable setting suggesting effect in the event of a disappointing result for the player, such as a one-shot end, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. In addition, when the number of games in the advantageous section is used as the execution condition for the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the number of remaining games is double, an exception may be provided to improve the reliability and execution probability of the setting suggestion effect. .

An eighth modified example will be described. The effect determination means 303 may change the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the time information output from the clock means 307 or the like. Hereinafter, the lottery tables for setting suggestion effects, such as the hold change lottery table in the third embodiment and the trophy lottery table in the fourth embodiment, will be collectively referred to as "setting suggestion lottery tables." For example, a setting-suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time period may be set to have a higher execution probability of setting-suggestion effect than a setting-suggestion lottery table referred to in other time periods. A specific time zone is the morning, evening (for example, 5:00 pm to 7:00 pm), and until the end of the predetermined number of fluctuations after the power is turned on, the Nth time of the predetermined effect (for example, the effect including the setting suggesting pattern) after the power is turned on. (N is, for example, 2 to 3), or any combination thereof.

In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone is set to have a higher execution probability of the total of the normal effect (guess effect) and the setting suggestion effect than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones. may be For example, when the trophy image 616 is displayed as a normal effect or setting suggestion effect, the appearance probability of the trophy image 616 in a specific time period may be increased. In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time period may be set to have higher reliability of setting suggestion than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time periods. The execution probability of fake effect) may be set low.

A ninth modification will be described. In the pachinko game machine 500, the small hit probability associated with the ball entering the second start port 12 is set higher than the small hit probability associated with the ball entering the first start port 11, and the entry to the second start port 12 is performed in a time saving manner. It may be a so-called "small hit rush" machine having a playability of increasing the number of balls to be paid out by obtaining a large number of small wins associated with balls. The effect determination means 303 in the small hit rush machine is when the number of consecutive small hits in the advantageous period (for example, during the probability change or during the time saving) reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of balls released in the advantageous period reaches a certain amount. Alternatively, a contradictory setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special advance notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) during the normal game. As a result of an increase in the game value (balls paid out) during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to display setting suggestion performance from being lost only at the end of the special game.

For example, a gaming machine (7th Consider a modification). In this game machine, when a game value of 6000 to 6999 is obtained by obtaining a prize ball from a small hit during a normal game in an advantageous period, a special game is obtained at that point and the special game is completed. A problem may arise that the setting suggestion effect and the lottery for the setting suggestion effect that were possible cannot be executed. According to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to display the setting suggestion effect by special notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) even during the normal game, so that the above problem can be solved. In the case of the slot machine 1010, the period during which the ART and the special game are repeated is defined as an advantageous period, and when the number of medals obtained during the advantageous period reaches a certain amount, the contradictory setting suggestive effect is used as the above-mentioned special advance notice effect. may be displayed.

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, when the condition that the number of acquired game values of 1000×N (N is an integer) is acquired in total at a timing other than during execution of the special game during the advantageous period, The content of displaying an image attached to N character images is displayed as a normal effect in the display of "○○○○ (number of 1000 × N) GET!" ○ GET!" is displayed as a setting suggestion (for example, a setting value of M or more is suggested). In addition, as the setting suggesting effect, not only the contradiction of the image (appearance) but also the sound and the lamp that are executed at the same time may be executed by combining them in a contradictory manner different from usual as the setting suggesting effect. , instead of contradicting the number of characters, suggesting a set value (suggesting a set value N or more) when the voice data reproduced when the image of N characters is displayed is special voice data. method may be adopted. It should be noted that such an example in which a mode in which the combination of lamps and sound data is inconsistent with the combination of image data is suggested as a setting suggestion can also be applied to the fourth embodiment and other modifications.

A tenth modification will be described. In addition to the contradictory setting suggesting effect described in the fourth embodiment, the effect determining means 303 can display a setting suggesting effect (here, (referred to as “matching setting suggestion effect”) may be executed. The consistent setting suggestion effect may be designed to have a higher appearance rate and a lower reliability (many fakes) than the inconsistent setting suggestion effect. Further, as an example of matching setting suggesting effect, there is an example of effect suggesting whether the set values are even or odd. According to whether the setting value is even or odd (whether the setting value is 2, 4, 6 or 1, 3, 5), the effect is an even number suggesting effect that suggests an even number setting and an odd number of matching setting suggesting effects. It is configured so as to change the appearance ratio with the odd number suggesting effect suggesting the setting. Also, only in the case of setting 6, among the matching setting suggestion effects, the ratio of the appearance rate of the false effect and the appearance rate of the true effect is set to 1:1, and in settings 1 to 5, the matching setting suggestion effect Of these, the ratio of the appearance rate of false effects to the appearance rate of true effects may be set to 1:4.

An eleventh modified example will be described. FIG. 65 shows an example of a special game end screen of a modified example. The effect determination means 303 displays a character image 604 as a background image on a special game end screen 610, the total number of jackpots obtained during the advantageous period (the number of consecutive games in one advantageous period, 3 times in this case), The total number of prize balls (here, 3310pt) and title 618 (here, level 2) obtained during the advantageous period are displayed.

As a normal effect on the special game end screen 610, the effect determination means 303 displays the character images 604 of the number of players matching the number of consecutive games or the amount of balls. In this modified example, as a normal effect, character images 604 of the same number of people as the number of consecutive residences are displayed. As another aspect, one character image 604 when the ball payout amount is 1000 to 1999pt, two character images 604 when the ball payout amount is 2000 to 2999pt, and three characters when the ball payout amount is 3000 to 3999pt. An image 604 may be displayed.

In addition, the effect determination means 303 displays, as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610, a title 618 having contents consistent with the number of consecutive games or the amount of output balls. In this modified example, as a normal effect, a title 618 indicating the same level (LV) as the number of consecutive mansions is displayed. As another aspect, a title 618 indicating level 1 when the ball output is 1000 to 1999pt, a title 618 indicating level 2 when the ball output is 2000 to 2999pt, and a level 3 when the ball output is 3000 to 3999pt. A title 618 may be displayed.

The effect determination means 303 selects the number of players who are inconsistent with the number of consecutive games or the number of balls to be played as the setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610 at the first probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. character image 604 is displayed. In this modified example, character images 604 of the number of people different from the number of consecutive residences are displayed as a setting suggestion effect. For example, in FIG. 65, the character images 604 of two people are displayed to indicate that the setting is 2 or more even though the number of consecutive residences is three.

The effect determination means 303 selects the second probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. title 618 is displayed. In this modified example, a title 618 indicating a level different from the number of times of consecutive villas is displayed as a setting suggestion effect. For example, in FIG. 65, the title 618 indicating level 2 is displayed to indicate that the setting is 2 or more even though the number of times of consecutive residences is 3. In general, it is desirable that the level is not downgraded. Therefore, the effect determination means 303 memorizes the level of the title 618 displayed in the previous normal effect and the setting suggesting effect, and if the level displayed as the new setting suggesting effect is lower than the previously displayed level, the new setting Execution of the suggestion effect may be prohibited.

In the case of the slot machine 1010, the display contents on the special game end screen 610 may be the character image 604, the number of big bonuses in the advantageous period (for example, ART period), the number of regular bonuses, and the cumulative number of earned medals. In addition, the effect determination means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 may execute an effect to add the number of games of ART (effect to notify the cumulative value of the added number). You may perform normal production or setting suggestion production using .

A twelfth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is similar to the end demonstration of the special game during a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations (for example, four special figure 2 fluctuations) immediately after the end of the special game. An effect (here, referred to as a “pseudo-demonstration effect”) may be displayed. The effect determination means 303 may execute the setting suggesting effect (for example, display of the trophy image 616) described in at least one of the embodiment and the modification in the pseudo-demonstration effect. Incidentally, if the first variation immediately after the end of the special game is a big win or a small win, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully confirm the content of the setting suggestive effect. Therefore, during the display of the celebration image after the end of the special game, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by a special notice such as a cut-in effect.

A thirteenth modification will be described. If the power supply is cut off during the continuous game period, the information on the number of consecutive games and the information on the acquired game value stored in the RAM of the sub board 300 is erased (sub-reset), so when the power is restored, a lottery for the setting suggestion effect is performed. It may not work. For example, if a setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive homes is provided, if the information on the number of consecutive homes is deleted, the table that should have been referred to cannot be determined, so there is an inconvenience that the lottery for the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. can occur. It is disadvantageous for the player to turn off the power in a situation where a high setting suggestion can be expected under the circumstances, such as when the number of consecutive games is 5 or more as described above, or in a situation where a highly reliable setting suggestion effect execution lottery can be received. could become

Therefore, when the game state at the time of power return corresponds to an advantageous period such as during a big win or during an electric chew support game (during time saving), the effect determination means 303 executes the next setting suggesting effect until the end of the advantageous period. During a predetermined period such as lottery timing, a lottery is drawn by referring to a special setting suggestion lottery table (for example, a table that is referenced only when the power is restored) that has a higher execution probability (winning probability) of the setting suggestion effect than the normal setting suggestion lottery table. may be executed. Alternatively, if the game state at the time of power restoration is in the advantageous period, the effect determination means 303 increases the number of areas in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the normal setting suggestion lottery table by calculation, and then ( For example, it may be doubled), and a lottery may be executed to determine the presence or absence of setting suggestion effects.

A fourteenth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a specific effect (herein referred to as "specific effect") that can be executed only in a normal game in a normal state outside the advantageous period is exceptionally displayed during the advantageous period. Setting suggestions may be made by For example, multiple types of variable effects that can be displayed during a normal game in a normal state (for example, a ready-to-win effect, which will be referred to herein as "normal variable effects") may be associated in advance with multiple types of set values. In a situation where the variation pattern of the special symbol of the predetermined variation time is determined by the main board, the effect determination means 303, at the start of the variation during the time saving, when winning the setting suggestion lottery with a low probability of about 1%, A normal variation effect corresponding to the setting value of the player's own machine may be displayed. In this case, in the pattern variation during the time saving, it becomes a setting suggestion when it develops into the same effect as the variation in the normal state (for example, the same reach).

The above-mentioned "same presentation" means that the motif, story, characters appearing, etc. are common, and the flow of presentation, etc. may be different. For example, the contents may be different until a predetermined timing after reach development, but may be the same after the predetermined timing after reach development. By partially modifying the effect in this way, the effect scale is associated with different variable times selected during the time reduction and during the normal game. In addition, the effect determination means 303 may further display an object for setting suggestion, such as the trophy image 616 of the embodiment, while displaying a normal variable effect as a setting suggestion during time saving.

In relation to the fourteenth modification, when the effect determination means 303 notifies that there is a high possibility of a big win or a small win during the normal game in the normal state, the reach of the appearance of the first mode that informs the big win or the small win. An effect (here, a story reach effect) may be displayed with a high probability. On the other hand, when the effect determination means 303 notifies that there is a high possibility of a big win or a small win during the electric chew support (during time saving), the reach effect of the appearance of the second mode ( Here, a battle effect) may be displayed with a high probability.

In this case, the effect determining means 303 may display the ready-to-win effect (story ready-to-win effect) of the appearance of the first aspect at a low probability as the setting suggestion effect when notifying the big win or the small win during the electric chew support. good. In addition, the effect determination means 303 may change the aspect of the story ready-to-win effect to be displayed during the electric chew support according to the setting value of the player's own machine. For example, when the effect determination means 303 suggests even setting values (2, 4, 6), it selects the story reach effect indicating story A, and when suggesting odd setting values (1, 3, 5). , Story Reach effect showing Story B may be selected. In addition, the effect determination means 303 selects a story reach effect indicating story C when suggesting a high setting (for example, setting 4 or higher), and selects a story reach effect indicating story D when suggesting setting 6. good too.

In addition, the story reach effect in the normal game in the normal state has a different timescale depending on the type, but during the electric chew support, during a predetermined period calculated from the end of the previous special game, according to the special fluctuation pattern table, The performance time of each variation may be fixed. Therefore, even if the story reach effect displayed during the normal state and the story reach effect displayed during the electric chew support show the same content, some of the content may differ due to the adjustment of the time scale. There is The above special variation pattern table may have a selection probability determined as follows.
[At the time of failure] Shortening fluctuation pattern 75%, normal announcement failure pattern A 16%, normal announcement failure pattern B 4%, reach development failure pattern with setting suggestion (for example, story reach that is lost) 5%.
[At the time of winning] Hit pattern A 30%, hit pattern B 20%, hit pattern C 20%, reach development hit pattern 30% with setting suggestion (for example, story reach to be hit).

The fifteenth modified example (playability explanation effect contradiction) will be described. In this modification, the setting suggestion is that there is a contradiction or error in the game content explained by the dialogue notice, in other words, the setting suggestion is that a game different from the game explained by the dialogue notice is to be executed. For example, with a certain change, character A's announcement of the line "If the line NO24 Suspend changes to green, you can expect development to super reach!" ] is displayed, and after that, even though the change to green hold has changed with the hold change effect, if the change related to green hold does not develop into super reach, the value of the last digit of “serif No. 24” is “4 ” may suggest a set value of 4 or more.

In this case, only when the set value is set to 4 or more, the effect determination means 303, when receiving the advance determination information regarding the hold that does not develop into super reach, with a predetermined probability, changes the hold lamp image to the green hold. Along with determining the scenario of the pending change effect to be changed, it is also possible to determine execution of the above-mentioned dialogue notice. In addition, the effect determination means 303 may set the value of the last digit of the "word number" so as to match the set value of the machine itself.

As another example, in a certain variation, a dialogue notice by character B is displayed, "Line No. 32. If the same notice appears three times from the start of the fluctuation to the third pseudo-fluctuation, it seems that the possibility of X reach development is high." Even though the same notice appeared three times until the third pseudo-fluctuation in the fluctuation, if it did not develop into X reach, the value of the last digit of "Serif NO32" "2" is the set value 2 or more may be suggested.

As yet another example, in a certain variation, a dialog announcement by character A, "Dialogue No. 3, it's a chance," and a button image are displayed. If it is out without being done, or if an image showing disappointing content is displayed due to the button press operation, "3", which is the value of the last digit of "serif No. 3", is greater than the set value 3 It may be suggestive.

In this case, the effect determination means 303 may determine, with a predetermined probability, the execution of the above-mentioned speech announcement and the display of the button image when the variation that does not develop into super reach is started. The effect determination means 303 may set the value of the last digit of the "line number" so as to match the set value of the machine itself. Note that the success pattern when the button operation is pressed is pseudo-continuous variation, development to super reach, and the like.

In the fifteenth modified example, it is suggested to set a fake speech notice, such as a speech notice by the character X, such as "Self No. 99, there seems to be some meaning in the fact that characters A and B are lying...". It is desirable to provide a production with content that implicitly suggests that it is connected to. In addition, it is desirable that the contents of the dialogues in the preliminary announcement of the dialogues, which are false during the setting suggestive presentation, be vague expressions such as "expectable" or "highly likely" rather than assertiveness. In the above example, the setting suggestion information is the last digit of the dialogue number, but the difference between the tens digit value and the ones digit value may be the setting suggestion information. In either case, it is desirable that the setting value is suggested in some way in accordance with the image of the dialog announcement.

(Fifth embodiment)
The pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is based on the pinball game machine described in the third embodiment. The basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the basic structure of the rear side, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 are the same as those of the third embodiment ( 49, 2, 3, 4, 11). The pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment may be based on the base technology, the pinball game machines described in the first, second, and fourth embodiments. Hereinafter, the points of difference from the pinball game machine described in the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements described in the base technology, the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals. do.

An outline of the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a small winning development big win, and the small winning probability is as high as 1/10, so in a situation where the small winning development big winning can be implemented, the holding control means Due to the presence of further small win reserves in 240, small win development big wins can occur continuously in a short period of time (subsequent small win reserves existing in the reserve control means 240 are also called "V stock"). . The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment has, as main features, four features relating to presentation. These features can be implemented independently, or can be combined arbitrarily, and can also be combined arbitrarily with the features described in the base technology and the first to fourth embodiments. .

An overview of four features is provided.
Feature 1. Right shot notification:
With a machine equipped with a small hit development jackpot that has a high probability (for example, a probability of 1/10 or more) that a small win can be won, due to its nature, a win or loss (in other words, whether or not there is a big hit or a small win) with a small number of fluctuations. Since it is a spec that is notified, it is important to elaborate the winning/losing notification effect in one variation. Therefore, in recent years, with respect to a plurality of times of special symbol variations that can win a small hit with a high probability, in the performance display device 60, the variable display of the decorative symbols 61 is made to appear as if it is a one-time variation performance of the decorative symbols. A technique called "summary variation" is employed. By performing "summary fluctuation", for example, 5 times of winning judgment of winning a small hit with a probability of 1/10 ) can be executed as a "summary change", it is possible to execute an effect in which a small win development big win can be obtained with a probability of about 40% with one change display. In this case, it is desirable not to make the player realize that it is a pseudo variation in which a plurality of variations are grouped into one variation. likely to be exposed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, at the timing when "summary variation" is executed in the easy-to-enter state, while simultaneously serving as a right-handed notification and a simple hold display, when the hold reaches the upper limit , Change the display mode of the right-handed notification, and do not perform subsequent reserved display (or switch to a display that is difficult to recognize as a reserved display, or reduce the display size to reduce visibility) . As a result, the player can be made unaware of the existence of the hold during a predetermined period including the ball-entering easy state, and the player can be happy and sad about the content of performance without being caught by the boundaries of actual fluctuations.

(1) While the pending number is not displayed in a recognizable form on the effect display device 60, the pending number is displayed in a level that is not recognizable at a glance by a means other than the effect display device 60. good too. For example, a display device smaller than the effect display device 60 may be provided at the corner of the game board 80, and the reserved numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed on the display device. Alternatively, (2) the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2 may be indicated by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of LEDs (lamps, etc.) different from the effect display device 60 . As a result, the number of reserved coins can be notified to the player who wants to confirm the number of reserved coins.

Feature 2. Hold small hit display:
After announcing the small hit in the hold as a look-ahead effect (after notifying that there is a small hit in the hold of the "Summary Variation" described in Feature 1 as a variation effect), it will come off before the small hit actually occurs. There is a possibility that the player who sees the deviation variation by the special symbol display part or the simple symbol may misunderstand that there is no small hit. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment fluctuates prior to suspension in which a small hit occurs (hereinafter also referred to as "small hit suspension") after informing that a small hit exists in the reservation as a look-ahead effect. While the displayed suspension (hereinafter also referred to as "lost suspension") is consumed, an object with contents suggesting the occurrence of a small win is continuously displayed. As a result, misrecognition of the player can be prevented.

Feature 3. Explanation notice:
In recent years, game machines tied up with works such as dramas and animations have become popular. may not be effective. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment displays a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as "description notice") for explaining the content of the main effect. The explanatory notice may include content explaining one or more of the motif of the production, the world view of the work, the background, the theme, the story, the characters, and the purpose.

Note that even when the main presentation is based on an original work that is not an existing work, an explanatory notice explaining the motif, world view, characters, etc. of the work may be displayed. Moreover, even when the main presentation is based on a theme without a story, such as bingo or roulette, an advance notice of explanation may be displayed to present information such as rules, purpose, and trivia about the theme.

However, the explanation notice is an effect that is not related to the degree of expectation of a big hit or a small hit (in other words, whether or not a big hit occurs). Therefore, if explanation notices occur frequently, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment basically assumes that the explanation notice is presented only once to one player, and limits the lottery related to the execution of the explanation notice. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand the motif of the production, the view of the world, the characters, etc., and at the same time avoid making the player feel annoyed.

Feature 4. A specific rendition with a specific variation in a specific period of time:
In the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the main game is the variation of the special figure 1 in the normal state, which is not the easy-to-enter state. For variation, etc., an effect based on a predetermined effect pattern is displayed. As a result, an effect intended by the designer is presented to the player at the timing intended by the designer.

The above four features will be described in detail below.
First, the right-handed notification of feature 1 and the small hit display in reserve of feature 2 will be described.
The effect determining means 303 displays a special effect having contents that are continuous over one or more symbol variations during a predetermined period including the easy-to-enter state. In the embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is a total of 5 variations, 4 times of time reduction and suspension (special figure 2 suspension) 4 times, when winning 1 time of time reduction in normal state (4R + 1 time of time reduction in FIG. 40) is displayed on the performance display device 60 as a "summary variation performance" (herein referred to as a "hide-and-seek chance").

It should be noted that the one-time short-time game in the easy-to-enter state means a one-time variable display game targeting the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol in which the odds of winning a small hit are set low. When 51 is variably displayed, the easy-to-ball-enter state is not terminated until variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times).

Then, the "hide-and-seek chance" effect of the present embodiment is a time-saving one-time variable display after the end of the big hit, and the effect display is started at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, as shown below. A presentation display is executed.

FIGS. 66(a) to (c) show examples of chance effects (common to win and miss) in the fifth embodiment. The effect screen 700 shown in FIGS. 66(a) to (c) is displayed at the time of one pattern change for time saving. The effect screen 700 of FIG. 66( a ) includes a hide-and-seek chance image 702 , a first pointing object 704 , a second pointing object 706 , and a mini layout 708 . The hide-and-seek chance image 702 includes the action of the character. The mini design 708 plays a role of the decorative pattern 61, but is displayed with lower visibility than the normal decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加Specifically, the mini design 708 is smaller in size than the normal decorative design 61 and is displayed in the corner of the effect screen 700 . The mini layout 708 may be set to have a high degree of transparency and may be displayed semi-transparently.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to a high probability (1/10), and the easy-to-enter state is 1 of the second special symbol. Since it will end when the variable display for the first time is stopped and displayed, it is important to enter the second start port 12 and save the special figure 2 hold during the time saving (easy ball entry state). . Therefore, in the embodiment, two images are displayed as the first pointing object 704 and the second pointing object 706, which urge the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting hole 12, that is, hit to the right. be. The size of the second pointing object 706 is set larger than the size of the first pointing object 704 .

The second pointing object 706 is divided into four areas. Until the special figure 2 suspension reaches the upper limit number (four in the fifth embodiment), the effect determination means 303 sequentially changes the color from the left area of the second instruction object 706 each time the special figure 2 suspension occurs. To go. For example, the second instruction object 706 in FIG. 66(a) indicates that there are two special-figure 2 reserves. Also, if the time interval between two consecutive shots of game balls is 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds, the time from when the color change of one area of the second pointing object 706 starts to when it is completed is may also be set to 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds.

FIG. 66(b) shows an effect screen 700 displayed when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number (four in the fifth embodiment). The effect determination means 303 does not change the contents (for example, shape, text, etc.) of the first instruction object 704 even if the special figure 2 reserve reaches the upper limit number. This is because right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player in the easy-to-enter state. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number, the effect determination means 303 changes the content of the second instruction object 706 to the content suggesting the number of reservations (because the special figure 2 reservation has not reached the upper limit in the embodiment content suggesting right-handed hitting) to content not suggesting the number of reserves.

In FIG. 66(b), as the above switching, the shape of the second instruction object 706 is switched from the right-pointing arrow to a square, and the instruction text is also switched to simply "prepared". This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the display contents of the hide-and-seek chance without being conscious of the pattern variations that are performed behind the performance display of the hide-and-seek chance.

FIG. 66(c) shows an effect screen 700 at the time of winning/losing branch. A hide-and-seek chance image 702 shown in FIG. When a predetermined time passes from the start of the variation and the timing of the win-lose branch is reached, the effect determination means 303 erases the second instruction object 706 while continuing to display the first instruction object 704 .

As described above, when a ball enters the second starting port 12, the pre-determining means 235 of the main substrate 200 immediately starts the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery value obtained when the ball enters. Regardless of whether or not the ball is entered, the sub-board 300 is notified of the preliminary determination information regarding the result of the success/failure determination based on the second lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball as a trigger. In other words, the prior determination means 235, when the winning determination based on the second lottery value acquired by the ball entering the second starting port 12 is a hit (including a big win and a small win), The sub-board 300 is notified of pre-determination information indicating that the corresponding variation is a hit. The effect determination means 303 is notified from the main board 200, based on the result of the determination regarding the variation and the advance determination information regarding the special figure 2 suspension, the time-saving one variation and the special figure 2 suspension (maximum 4), when there is a big hit or a small hit, it is detected and the performance after the win-lose branch is distributed.

FIGS. 67(a) to (c) show examples of chance effects (loss) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 67(a) is an effect screen 700 subsequent to FIG. 66(c) (that is, the win-lose split screen), and shows the effect screen 700 indicating a loss. That is, it shows the effect screen 700 displayed when there is neither a small hit nor a big hit in either the time-saving one-time symbol variation or the special figure 2 reservation. Effect determination means 303, as shown in FIG. 67(b), at the time of one-time fluctuation stop, the effect screen 700 including a hide-and-seek chance image 702 that informs the end of the hide-and-seek chance and a mini layout 708 of the out-of-stop mode. display.

Thereafter, the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds) for the deviation until the suspension immediately before the final suspension of the special figure 2. The effect determination means 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. At the same time, the effect determination means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini layout 708 and the stop in the off mode.

67(c), the effect determining means 303 stops the decorative pattern 61 having a size larger than the mini design 708 in the effect screen 700 in a detached manner. In this way, from the time-saving change to the final change of the special figure 2 reservation, (1) the mini layout 708 is displayed in a relatively low visibility mode, and (2) the visibility is relatively high in the final change. , and (3) by changing the contents of the second instruction object 706, it is possible for the player to feel as if there is one change from the time-saving one time change to the special figure 2 hold final change. Easier to feel.

FIGS. 68(a) to (c) show an example of chance effects (hit) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68(a) is an effect screen 700 subsequent to FIG. 66(c) (that is, the winning/losing branch screen), and shows the effect screen 700 indicating a win. That is, it shows the effect screen 700 that is displayed when there is a small hit or a big hit in one of the one-time time-saving variation and the special figure 2 reservation. Here, it is assumed that there is a small hit or a big hit in the special figure 2 reservation. Effect determination means 303, at the time of one-time fluctuation stop, hide-and-seek chance image 702 in a mode that informs success of hide-and-seek chance (for example, finding a specific character to be found) as shown in FIG. 68(b) Then, the effect screen 700 including the mini layout 708 of the disengagement stop mode is displayed.

After that, the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds) for the loss until the suspension immediately before the special figure 2 suspension that becomes a hit. The effect determination means 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. At the same time, the effect determination means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini layout 708 and the stop in the off mode. At the time of stopping the variation of the special figure 2 reservation that becomes a hit, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68(a) and FIG. 68(b), the effect determination means 303 reserves the lottery value that the advance judgment information (here, the advance judgment information of the special figure 2 reservation) is a small hit or a big hit. In the case of indicating that the game is on, an effect suggesting a transition to an advantageous state is displayed before the symbol variation based on the lottery value for a small win or a big win is started. In the figure, a hide-and-seek chance image 702 including a rabbit giving a peace sign is displayed.

Effect determination means 303, during the fluctuation display of the symbol (here special figure 2) based on the lottery value withheld prior to the lottery value of the small hit or the big hit, predetermined to suggest the transition to an advantageous state. display of the object (hit suggesting image 710) is continued. In FIG. 68(b), the effect determination means 303 displays a hide-and-seek chance image 702 including a rabbit giving a peace sign, and also displays a hit suggestive image 710, prior to special figure 2 holding that will result in a big win or a small win. The display of the hit suggestion image 710 is maintained during the variable display of the reserved special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the performance determining means 303 displays the winning suggestive image 710, that is, the character string of "Get Rush" in the same manner during the consumption of the remaining pending pending prior to the pending to become a small win or a big win.

In the fifth embodiment, the winning suggestive image 710 is displayed near the mini layout 708 . This can suggest to the player that a big win or a small win will occur in the future, even if the mini layout 708 stops in a disengaged state. Also, while the winning suggestion image 710 is being displayed, the variation display of the mini layout 708 continues, but the effect determination means 303 changes the combination of the three numbers in the mini layout 708 as the variation of the small win or the big win approaches. It may be similar to the mode of showing a win. For example, over a plurality of ultra-shortened variations of the special figure 2 suspension, the stop mode of the mini layout 708 may be changed in the order of no tenpai, no tenpai, and hit.

FIGS. 69(a)-(c) show an example of the chance effect (per resurrection) in the fifth embodiment. The display of the win-or-fail result after the win-lose branch (Fig. 67(a), Fig. 68(a)) is performed during one time-saving variation, but the opening of the second starting port 12 (in the embodiment, multiple times of short-time The easy-to-enter state in which opening) is facilitated continues until the second special symbol 52 is stopped and displayed after the one-time variation of the time saving is completed. The stop display time (symbol fixed time) of the second special symbol 52 for one time reduction is stopped even if the second start port 12 is in an open state at the timing before the stop display of the second special symbol 52. It is defined to be closed during the display time. Therefore, at a predetermined timing after the start of the hide-and-seek chance variation production (before the appearance of the first chance-up production that suggests that the possibility of obtaining a small hit or a big hit is increasing, or after the winning branch Since it is difficult to replace the contents of the hide-and-seek chance performance when the special figure 2 reservation of the big win or the small win occurs after the display of the win/fail result, etc., the performance determining means 303 displays the performance of the resurrection win. In addition, even if there is a big hit or a small hit in either one of the time-saving one-time pattern variation and the special figure 2 reservation before the winning/losing branch, the performance determining means 303 displays the resurrection winning performance with a predetermined probability. may

The display of the win/loss result after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 69(a) and the variation display before the winning hold shown in FIG. 69(b) are the same as when losing (FIGS. is. In the case of a resurrection hit, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the effect determination means 303 stops the decorative pattern 61 in a hit mode when the variation of the special figure 2 holding that is a hit is stopped. In this case, the display of the win/fail result after the win/lose branch and the variation display before the hit hold are the same as in the case of losing. , a big win or a small win can be generated, so that the player can have a sense of surprise and enjoyment of the game can be improved. As a modified example, in the case of a resurrection hit, if the display of the win/fail result after the win-lose branch suggests a loss, the effect content may be different from that at the time of loss.

Modifications regarding feature 1 and feature 2 will be described.
A first modified example will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special figure 2 suspension reaches the upper limit during the time-saving one-time symbol change, the second instruction object 706 is switched to content that does not indicate the number of suspensions, specifically, the character string "ready" was to be displayed. As a modified example, the effect determination means 303 may switch the second instruction object 706 to the content explaining the game when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit during the one-time pattern variation. The game description may indicate to the player that a hide-and-seek chance is a condition for success, and that, for example, if a specific character is found, the game will be a win.

A second modification will be described. Although it relates to the first modification, the effect determination means 303, during the pattern fluctuation of one time reduction, when a predetermined time has passed without reaching the upper limit number of special figures 2 reservation When the timing for branching is reached), the second instruction object 706 may be switched to content explaining the game.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the effect determination means 303 is an image showing the number of special figures 2 pending while the number of special figures 2 pending does not reach the upper limit number during the pattern fluctuation of one time reduction ("suspended image" ) may be displayed on the effect screen 700 . When the special figure 2 pending reaches the upper limit number, the effect determination means 303 may erase the pending image, switch the mode of the second instruction object 706 to "ready", and change the mode of the second instruction object 706 to You may switch to game explanation.

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a plurality of types of modes that the second instruction object 706 can take when the special figure 2 reserve reaches the upper limit number during one time-saving symbol variation may be determined. However, any type is a mode that does not suggest the number of reservations. For example, types such as the character string "prepared", the character string "filled", game description 1, game description 2, etc. may be included, and the sizes and colors may differ for each type. Then, for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the selection probabilities of these multiple types of modes may be determined. The effect determination means 303 may select one of a plurality of types as a mode when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number with a selection probability according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 500. Thereby, the change mode of the second pointing object 706 can be utilized for setting suggestions.

A fifth modification will be described. As described in the fourth modification, when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number during one time reduction pattern variation, a plurality of types of aspects of the second instruction object 706 may be determined. When the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number, the effect determination means 303 selects one of the plurality of kinds of aspects as the aspect of the second instruction object 706 according to the presence or absence or number of small hits in the special figure 2 reservation may be determined from The timing for changing the mode of the second instruction object 706 may be at the time of entering a small hit pending ball (at the time when the small hit is predicted based on the preliminary determination information) or when the winning 2 hold reaches the upper limit. .

For example, if the expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 reserve is relatively low, it may be determined to indicate "ready" in white. In addition, when indicating that the degree of expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 reservation is relatively high, it may be decided to determine the mode in which "preparation completed" is indicated in blue. In addition, when indicating definitely that there is one or more small hits in the special figure 2 reservation, it may be decided to indicate "ready" in red. Also, when it is definitely shown that there are two or more small hits in the special figure 2 reservation, it may be decided to display "ready" in gold.

A sixth modification will be described. The effect determination means 303 may notify the presence or absence of a small hit in the special figure 2 reservation when the special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit number during one time reduction pattern variation. For example, the effect determining means 303 normally changes the second instruction object 706 to an image indicating "ready". may be changed to an image showing "RUSH" in rainbow colors. Since the presence or absence of a small win is announced before the start of the win-lose branch performance to be executed from now on, a performance that catches the player's surprise can be realized, in other words, a surprise performance for the player can be realized.

A seventh modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiments, a plurality of types of aspects of the winning suggestive image 710 may be determined. For example, the size, color, and text may differ for each type. Then, for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the selection probability of these multiple types of winning suggestive images 710 may be determined. The effect determination means 303 may select one of a plurality of types of winning suggestion images 710 with a selection probability according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 . As a result, the mode of the winning suggestion image 710 can be utilized for setting suggestions.

An eighth modified example will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the hide-and-seek chance effect is a time-saving one time (continues until the second special symbol 52 is displayed once) during a big hit game (a big hit) A part of the production (description production such as "You will win a big hit if you do XX!") may be executed from the final round, the last two rounds, or the jackpot end demonstration production period).

In addition, the big hit variation of the first special symbol during the easy-to-enter state (1 time reduction) is the same effect as when a small hit or a big hit is won in the first variation of the second special symbol during the easy-to-enter state. In the easy-to-enter state, the first special pattern is changed (a short change of about 1 second) while the hide-and-seek chance explanation effect screen continues to be displayed, and the mini layout 708 Display only with variable display.

A ninth modification will be described. In order to increase the number of balls to be put out in a game machine equipped with a small win V, it is necessary to enter the ball into a starting hole in a short time to obtain a small win. On the other hand, the time-saving period (number of fluctuations in time-saving) is often set to a relatively short period of time. The main purpose of this modification is to realize a suitable effect for securing a sufficient ball entry into the starting opening during time saving.

As described above with reference to FIG. 66, the effect determination means 303 (effect display control means 305) causes the second instruction object 706 to be displayed in the pattern variation of the easy-to-enter state. Here, a modification regarding the display mode of the second pointing object 706 will be described. Below, the rendering element (also referred to as an image) corresponding to the second instruction object 706 will be referred to as a "holding state suggesting object". The pending state suggesting object, like the second instruction object 706, suggests the number of special figure 2 pending (in other words, the second lottery value held with the ball entering the second starting port 12). As shown in FIG. 66(a), the holding state suggesting object (second pointing object 706) is in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and also plays a role of prompting the player to hit to the right.

Similar to the second instruction object 706 in FIG. 66(a), the pending state suggesting object of this modification includes a plurality of areas (here, four areas) corresponding to the number of pending items. For example, the first area in the pending state suggestion object corresponds to the first special figure 2 hold, the second area corresponds to the second special figure 2 hold, and the third area is the third special figure 2 Corresponding to the hold, the fourth area may correspond to the fourth special figure 2 hold. The effect determining means 303 changes the display mode of the pending state suggesting object according to the ball entering the second starting port 12 . The effect determining means 303 changes the color of the first area to the fourth area from a color indicating no suspension (for example, white) to a color indicating that there is a suspension (for example, blue). In addition, in this modification, the upper limit is set to four as the special figure 2 pending, but it is not necessary to be limited to four, and three or less may be set as the upper limit. In that case, it is preferable to provide a number of areas corresponding to the upper limit of the pending state suggestion object, but for example, when the upper limit of the special figure 2 pending is 2, the area of the pending state suggestion object may be provided, and the color of the area may be changed corresponding to the ball entering the second starting opening exceeding the upper limit of the hold.

Effect determination means 303 of the present modification, as the initial display mode of the pending state suggesting object, displays the pending state suggesting object in a predetermined mode (in other words, the same mode) regardless of the actual number of special figure 2 pending. For example, even if the special figure 2 pending number is already 1 to 4 (that is, 1 or more) at the start of the easy-to-enter state, the effect determination means 303 is the initial display mode of the pending state suggesting object. All of the area to the fourth area may be displayed in a color indicating no hold. In other words, the effect determination means 303, as the initial display mode of the pending state suggesting object, regardless of the actual number of the special figure 2 pending, the pending state in a mode suggesting that the number of special figure 2 pending is 0 A suggestion object may be displayed. In addition, regardless of the actual number of special figures 2 pending, the effect determination means 303, according to the ball entering the second start port 12 in the easy ball entering state, the first area with the initial display mode as the starting point, You may change a color in order of a 2nd area, a 3rd area, and a 4th area.

Here, a display example when two special figure reservations are accumulated at the start of the easy entry state will be described. The effect determining means 303 displays the pending state suggesting object in a mode suggesting that the number of special figure 2 pending is 0 as the initial display mode of the pending state suggesting object. When the first ball enters the second starting port 12 during the easy-to-enter state (there are three actual special figures 2 pending), the effect determining means 303 changes the first area of the pending state suggesting object to a color with a pending state. change to Subsequently, when the second ball enters the second starting port 12 (actual special figure 2 suspension is four), the effect determination means 303 changes the second area of the suspension state suggesting object to the color of suspension. . Subsequently, when the third ball enters the second start port 12 (the actual number of special figures 2 pending is four and does not change), the effect determination means 303 changes the third area of the pending state suggesting object to the color of pending. change to Subsequently, when the fourth ball enters the second start port 12 (actual special figure 2 pending is four and does not change), the effect determination means 303 changes the fourth area of the pending state suggesting object to the color of pending. change to

In addition, the effect determination means 303, from the state in which the pending state suggesting object is displayed in the above-described predetermined mode (initial display mode), there is a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls entering the second start port 12. Then, the pending state suggesting object is displayed in a specific mode different from the above predetermined mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the effect determination means 303 determines that when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 after the transition to the easy-ball-entering state reaches the upper limit value (four) of the special figure 2 reservation, , The content indicated by the pending state suggestion object may be changed to a specific mode (for example, "prepared") that suggests that the special figure 2 pending has reached the upper limit.

The holding state suggesting object not only suggests the number of holdings, but also has a role of promoting right hitting with an arrow shape. Therefore, if the pending state suggesting object is displayed in a state indicating that the special figure 2 pending exists, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many more balls should be made to enter the second start port 12.例文帳に追加Therefore, as the initial display mode of the pending state suggesting object, by displaying the pending state suggesting object in a predetermined mode regardless of the actual special figure 2 pending number, the game is made to newly enter four balls into the second start port 12. It is easy to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to a shortage of special figure 2 reservations (become less than 4). Further, by prompting the shooting of further game balls even when the special figure 2 reservation has reached the upper limit, the total number of outs can be increased, and the base of the pachinko game machine 500 can be lowered.

Next, the explanation notice of feature 3 will be explained.
The explanation notice in the fifth embodiment is a notice effect of contents to introduce characters (that is, characters) appearing in the effect. FIG. 70 shows an example of an effect screen relating to the explanation effect. The effect screen 720 relating to the explanation effect includes a character image 722 and an introductory text 724 that introduces the character. Explanation notices in the fifth embodiment include seven types of notices (hereinafter also referred to as "individual notices") introducing six characters and a group composed of those characters. Character images 722 and introductory sentences 724 of the seven types of individual notices are different from each other. The sub-board 300 pre-stores seven types of individual notice data.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the effect determination means 303 turns on a predetermined explanation execution flag in the memory, and shifts to a state in which an advance notice of explanation, which is a special effect, can be displayed. The start conditions in the fifth embodiment are (1) that the power is restored after the power is cut off, and (2) the game standby demo (a demo image when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 does not change for a predetermined period of time). Satisfied by any of what you have shown.

After the start condition is satisfied (that is, when the explanation execution flag is on), the effect determination means 303 selects seven types of individual notices over a plurality of symbol variations based on a specific variation pattern. Display in order. In the fifth embodiment, seven types of individual announcements, specifically, character 1 explanation (ID=1), character 2 explanation (ID=2), . . . , character 6 explanation (ID=6), group explanation (ID=7) are displayed in ascending order of ID.

The above-mentioned specific variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not develop into a reach and is a deviation, and a so-called non-shortened variation that can secure a certain amount of performance variation This is a variation pattern of deviation variation in which the variation time is longer than that of deviation. After the start condition is satisfied, the effect determining means 303 continuously gives seven kinds of individual advance notices along with the pattern variation according to the variation pattern every time the main substrate 200 selects a variation pattern that is not a shortened variation. display. That is, the effect determining means 303 sequentially displays seven types of individual notices during the seven times of fluctuation display without shortened fluctuation after the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, character 1 explanation (ID = 1) is displayed when the first non-shortened fluctuation deviation fluctuation pattern is selected, and character 2 explanation (ID = 2) is displayed when the second non-shortened fluctuation deviation fluctuation pattern is selected. is displayed. The effect determination means 303 displays the group explanation (ID=7) at the time of selecting the variation pattern of the seventh non-reduced variation loss, and ends the display of a series of advance notice of explanation.

If the end condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, the effect determination means 303 displays the last individual notice (group explanation (ID=7)) in the embodiment, and the effect is stored in the memory until the start condition is satisfied again. By turning off the explanation execution flag of , the advance notice of the explanation is not displayed. When the explanation execution flag is off, even if the main board 200 selects a variation pattern that is not a non-shortened variation, the effect determination means 303 does not select the previous announcement of the explanation. When the start condition is satisfied again, the effect determination means 303 switches the explanation execution flag in the memory to ON again, thereby shifting to a state in which an advance notice of explanation can be displayed again. As a result, basically, the explanation notice can be shown only once per player.

In addition, after transitioning to a state in which an advance notice of explanation can be displayed, the effect determination means 303 is configured to perform at least part of other effects until a predetermined termination condition for the advance notice of explanation is satisfied, that is, while the explanation execution flag in the memory is on. to not be displayed. Some other effects whose display is prohibited include, for example, advance notice effects such as pre-reading notices (pending change, etc.). The variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 may be excluded from display prohibition. As a result, a plurality of individual notices can be presented to the player in a relatively short period of time, making it easier for the player to deepen their understanding of the tie-up work or the like, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, an advance notice of explanation is displayed when a variation pattern that is not a non-shortening variation is selected. Therefore, when the power supply is restored (for example, a game immediately after opening a game store) or when returning from a game standby demo (for example, when a player changes), if the explanation notice is not displayed (when an effect other than the explanation notice is displayed) Or, if another effect is displayed before the final individual notice is displayed, a situation arises in which a result other than a failure can be expected from the non-shortening variation. As a result, by not displaying the explanation notice that should be displayed, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect a big win, a small win, a reach, or the like. In other words, if there is a variation that does not explain the game during the execution of the explanation announcement (that is, before the display of the last individual announcement), the variation means that the variation is a variation pattern other than the non-shortened variation and the deviation. It can give a player a sense of expectation that the change is not a miss (that is, it may be a chance) as a non-shortening change.

A modification regarding feature 3 will be described.
A first modified example will be described. After shifting to a state in which the previous notice of explanation can be displayed, the effect determination means 303 does not display any other notice until a predetermined end condition for the previous notice of explanation is satisfied. , or a voice indicating this situation may be output from the speaker 108 . For example, the effect display device 60 may display a message such as "Explanation advance notice is in progress" or "Other notices are being suppressed because explanation notice is being implemented".

A second modification will be described. Another starting condition may be defined instead of, or in addition to, the starting condition of the above example. Another starting condition may be any of the following three alone or in any combination. (1) A predetermined number of symbol variations (for example, 1000 times) have been executed from a big hit or a small hit. (2) The player has been identified by the mobile communication system shown in FIG. 12, or the change of player has been detected. (3) Predetermined time information is output from the timer 307; For example, it is detected that a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, or that a predetermined time (date and time) has come.

A third modification will be described. A plurality of types of explanatory notices may be provided, and the selection probability of these plural types of explanation notices may be determined for each setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 . The effect determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of explanation notices with a selection probability according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 500 as the explanation notice to be displayed when the start condition is satisfied this time. You may The plurality of types of explanatory notices may be different in display order of the plurality of individual notices. Further, the plurality of types of explanatory notices may differ from each other in at least one individual notice mode (the content of the character image 722, the content of the introductory text 724, the size, the display position, etc.). As a result, it is possible to utilize the aspect of the advance notice of the explanation for setting suggestions.

As a fourth modified example, a process when a big hit occurs during the explanation notice will be described. As a first pattern, after executing a jackpot game, time saving or probability variation specific game and shifting to a normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the individual performance of the ID following the ID of the previously executed individual performance. For example, if a big hit is achieved after executing individual notice A (ID=1), individual notice B (ID=2), and individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice D (ID=4 ).

As a second pattern, after a jackpot game, time saving or probability variation specific game is executed and the state is shifted to the normal state, the explanation notice may be resumed from the ID of the previously executed individual performance. For example, if a big hit is achieved after executing individual notice A (ID=1), individual notice B (ID=2), and individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice C (ID=3) ).

As a third pattern, after executing a jackpot game, time saving or probability variation specific game and shifting to a normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the first ID of the individual effect. For example, if a big hit is achieved after executing individual notice A (ID=1), individual notice B (ID=2), and individual notice C (ID=3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice A (ID=1 ).

As a fifth modified example, processing in the case of power-off due to an error will be described. After the previous notice of explanation has been executed to the end, it may be necessary to turn off the power in order to cancel an error that has occurred. Therefore, if the power is turned off while an error is being detected in the sub board 300, the effect determining means 303 does not have to reset the ID of the executed individual notice (for example, ID=7 is maintained). may be used). On the other hand, if the power is turned off while no error has been detected, the ID of the executed individual notice may be reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the previous notice of explanation from being presented again to the same player.

As a sixth modification, the ON/OFF selection of the explanation notice by the player will be described. The effect determination means 303 displays a message such as "Do you want to continue the previous notice of explanation? ) may be selected. The effect determination means 303 may continue the previous notice of explanation (display the next individual notice) or interrupt the previous notice of explanation according to the operation of the player who designates whether or not to continue the previous notice of explanation. According to this modification, even if the game standby demonstration occurs due to the player temporarily leaving the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the explanation notice is started again for the same player, the player can make an arbitrary selection. You can turn off the description notice by

Next, the technique of displaying a specific effect with a specific variation in a specific period of feature 4 will be described.
In the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for the suspension of the second lottery value (special figure 2 suspension) obtained with the entry of the ball into the second start port 12. A period is set. The special effect includes an announcement that a predetermined character (for example, character A) will appear. The special effect period in the fifth embodiment is a fluctuation period of four (maximum) special figure 2 reserves triggered by the normal pattern hit at the normal time shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 shows the flow of the special effect in the first section of the special effect period. In the first section, the special figure 2 suspension caused by the ball entering the second start port 12 triggered by the normal pattern hit in the normal state is the state in which 4 to 2 special figure 2 suspensions are accumulated. It is a fluctuation period of special figure 2 that starts between. In other words, the first section is a variable period corresponding to other than the final hold of the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 71 (the same applies to FIG. 72 to be described later), in the special effect during the special effect period, the winning/losing notification is completed for each variation.

The present notice in FIG. 71 has the content of prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 . When the effect button 109 is pressed, the effect determination means 303 refers to the notice determination table for the first section of the special effect period, and selects any one of Character A speech notice, Character A search notice, Memories notice, and Patrump notice. Select and display The notice determination table for the first section defines selection criteria for a plurality of effect patterns for executing any of Character A speech notice, Character A search notice, Memories notice, and Patrump notice. For example, the advance notice determination table for the first section sets the selection probability to 30% for each of the production pattern including character A dialogue notice, the production pattern including character A search notice, and the production pattern including memory notice. The selection probability of the included effect pattern may be set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, and the memory notice are displayed, the tenpai teasing image is displayed, and then the SP development notice (super reach) or false image is displayed. On the other hand, when the patrol trump notice or character A notice notice is displayed, the game advances directly to SP development notice or fake.

The patrol-trump notice is an advance notice that a character A with a patrol-trump on his head will appear, and is a one-shot notice type notice that a big win or a small win is confirmed when the patrol-trump lights up within the notice. A performance determining means 303 selects a performance pattern including patrump advance notice in which a patrump is lit when the variation of the special figure 2 is a big win or a small hit, and advances to SP development notice after the patrump notice. When the variation of the special figure 2 is off (not including a small hit), a performance determining means 303 selects a performance pattern including a patrol-trump notice that does not turn on the patrol-trump and displaying a falsehood after the patrol-trump notice.

If the operation of the effect button 109 is not input for the present notice, the effect determining means 303 selects the effect pattern including the character A notice notice with a predetermined probability. The character A announcement announcement is a one-shot announcement type announcement similar to the patrol-trump announcement. For example, as the notice determination table for the first section, the selection probability of the production pattern when the button is not pressed during the present notice is: The advance notice may be drawn at 20% each. Each effect pattern executed for the present notice has a different execution probability when the button is pressed and when it is not pressed, and is determined as a result of pressing or not pressing during the effect lottery at the start of the fluctuation. obtain. In this embodiment, even if any of Character A dialogue notice, Character A search notice, Memories notice, Patrump notice, and Character A notice is executed, if the SP development notice is executed, the following hide-and-seek reach or hide-and-seek mission will be performed. An effect pattern is set so as to announce the possibility of occurrence of a big win or a small win.

FIG. 72 shows the flow of the special effect in the second section of the special effect period. The second section is the special figure 2 fluctuation period that starts with one special figure 2 reservation, in other words, the fluctuation period corresponding to the final reservation of the special figure 2 reservation accumulated with the normal per pattern is.

When the effect determination means 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, the effect determination means 303 refers to the notice determination table for the second section, which is the effect determination standard different from the notice determination table for the first section, and performs the special effect. determine the production pattern of The advance notice determination table for the second section is configured so that an effect pattern for executing the patrol-trump advance notice is always selected. That is, in the advance notice determination table for the second section, the selection probability of the effect pattern for executing the patrol-trump advance notice is set to 100%.

A performance determining means 303 selects a performance pattern including patrump advance notice in which a patrump is lit when the variation of the special figure 2 is a big win or a small hit, and advances to SP development notice after the patrump notice. When the variation of the special figure 2 is off (not including a small hit), a performance determining means 303 selects a performance pattern including a patrol-trump notice that does not turn on the patrol-trump and displaying a falsehood after the patrol-trump notice. In this way, by always displaying the one-shot announcement type patrol trump notice at the final change of the special figure 2 in the special performance period, it is possible to provide a refreshing feeling at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, the conditions for determining that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, in other words, the conditions for using the advance notice determination table for the second section of the special effect period are the following (1) and (2): are both satisfied. (1) The remaining number of reserved special figures 2 at the start of special figure 2 fluctuation is 0, that is, the last variation of special figure 2 reservation. (2) That the change (1 change before) immediately before the change to start this time is a special figure 2 change.

The effect determination means 303 may determine whether the condition (1) is satisfied by the hold information or the variation start command transmitted from the main board 200 (in the pachinko game machine 500 of the embodiment, the variation start command is It is configured so that a command group including variation pattern information for variation and pending number information after the start of variation is transmitted). In addition, the performance determining means 303 stores the type of special symbol to be varied indicated by the symbol determination result included in the variation start command for one variation, and refers to the previously stored special symbol type when starting the next variation. It may be determined whether the condition (2) is satisfied or not. When both the condition (1) and the condition (2) are satisfied, the effect determination means 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, and at least one of the condition (1) and the condition (2) is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the second section of the special effect period is not reached (that is, it is the first section).

Normally, when displaying a specific effect at the final change of the period of expiring the temporarily accumulated special figure 2 hold, patrump notice can be implemented at the final change of the period of expiring the special figure 2 hold even with condition (1) alone. is. However, the pachinko game machine 500 is a specification that executes a special effect when the special figure 2 hold changes that occur when the long opening hit of the normal electric accessory 90 is acquired in the normal state. Therefore, if the special figure 1 does not change in the process of accumulating the special figure 2 hold, or before the second special figure 2 hold occurs, the special figure 2 change due to the first special figure 2 hold There is a possibility that it will start, and if only condition (1), there is a possibility that patrump notice will always appear at the first change of special figure 2 in the special production period. By providing condition (2), even in such an irregular situation, the advance notice decision table for the second section is used in the first variation of the special figure 2 during the special effect period in a manner different from the design intention. can be avoided.

A special variation pattern table used only in the performance period is provided in order to issue a specific notice with a specific variation in a specific performance period, and when the main substrate 200 selects a special variation pattern ID, performance determination means is provided. It is also conceivable that 303 selects a special effect pattern (for example, selection of a special variation pattern based on the variation pattern mode described in the second embodiment). However, when a specific notice is issued using a special variation pattern table in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the control of the variation pattern mode is often based on the number of variations, big hits, and small wins, and the player does not intend the designer. If you play the game (for example, if you finish the game without accumulating 4 reserves at the end of the easy-to-enter state, 4 balls are placed in the second start port when the normal electric accessory is long open. When the ball is not allowed to enter, etc.), there may be a problem that the intended lottery is not performed at the timing intended by the designer, depending on the number of reserves in the progress of the game. Therefore, as in the embodiment, the occurrence of the problem can be suppressed by determining whether there is a specific change in the performance period during which the special performance should be executed by the sub-board 300 .

The merits of the configuration of the embodiment for using the above special variation pattern table will be summarized again. Characteristic 4 of this embodiment is a technical idea that performs a special effect only in the final variation of the special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, for example, if the special variation pattern table is used for the 4th variation after the long opening of the second starting port 12 triggered by the normal pattern hit, if it is normal, it is special for the 4th variation of the special figure 2 reservation You can make a performance. However, the timing for switching to the special variation pattern table (timing for setting the variation pattern mode) is limited to control timing related to special symbols such as the number of games played, big hits, and small hits. Therefore, in order to perform a special effect at the expected timing using the special fluctuation pattern table, the time-saving game after the big hit (easy ball entry state) should be set to the maximum state of the special figure 2 hold as intended by the designer. It is premised that it ends and that 4 special 2 reservations are accumulated at the time of normal design. However, due to troubles such as the game ball not being fired, or the player's intentional game operation, etc., a situation can occur in which only three or less special figure 2 reserves are stored. In such a situation, the 4th variation is no longer a special figure 2 pending, so for example, a special variation pattern table is used during the normal variation of special figure 1, and a variation pattern for performing a patrump notice is selected. There is a gap that In the embodiment, the sub-board 300 judges the display timing of the special effect, so that the specific notice is issued at the specific fluctuation of the specific effect period as intended by the designer, regardless of the number of reservations. be able to.

A modification regarding feature 4 will be described.
A first modified example will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the final variation of the special figure 2 in the normal state (the special figure 2 variation in which the special figure 2 reservation is 0) illustrates the situation of displaying the patrump notice which is a specific notice. The technique described in the example, that is, the technique of issuing a specific notice at a specific variation of a specific presentation period, is applicable to other situations.

For example, the technique described in the fifth embodiment can also be applied to displaying a specific advance notice in the following situations (A) to (C). (A) The final variation of the special figure 2 pending remaining after the end of the easy entry state (after the main game shifts to the variation of the special figure 1). (B) The first special figure 2 change when entering the easy entry state. (C) In parallel specs (special figures 1 and 2 are specs that fluctuate in parallel, for example, a game machine equipped with a small hit rush), from the production mode that mainly displays the fluctuation of special figures 2, special figures The final variation of the special figure 2 after shifting to the production mode that mainly displays the variation of 1.

When a specific notice is displayed in the situation (A) or (C) above, for example, a special effect lottery table (corresponding to the notice decision table for the second section of the embodiment) with a 100% selection probability of the specific notice ) may be used.

The conditions for using the special effect lottery table are, in the case of (A) above, as in the embodiment, (1) the number of special figures 2 held at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 0, and (2) this time start The variation just before the variation to be (1 variation before) may be that both of the special figure 2 variation are satisfied. In the case of (B) above, for example, it is intended to make a special effect appear at the first change when the player wins a big hit from the normal game state and the easy-ball-entering state starts, and the condition (2). Regarding, 1 variation before is different from the embodiment in that it is a special figure 1 variation. And, in the situation where it is implemented in a pachinko game machine that adopts parallel games like the above (C), there is a possibility that the variation display before one variation on the main board 200 is the special figure 1, so the sub board 300 (effect determination Means 303) displays the variation performance of the special symbol to be displayed as the main subject (Even if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating in parallel after the time reduction is finished, the variation of the special figure 2 is displayed as the subject of the production. If you do, etc.), you may store the type of special figure that performed the variable effect immediately before.

The cases where the conditions (1) and (2) are different are sorted out. When a specific notice is displayed in the above situation (B), both of the following (1) and (2) may be satisfied as the conditions for using the special effect lottery table. That is, (1) the remaining number of reserved special figures 2 at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 0 (similar to the embodiment), (2) the fluctuation just before the fluctuation to start this time (1 fluctuation before) is FIG. 1 is a variation (different from the example). When a specific notice is displayed in the above situation (C), both of the following (1) and (2) may be satisfied as the conditions for using the special effect lottery table. That is, (1) the remaining number of reserved special figures 2 at the start of special figure 2 fluctuation is 0 (similar to the embodiment), (2) variation displayed mainly as a variation production immediately before the variation to be started this time (Decorative pattern variation display before 1 variation) is a special figure 2 variation (different from the embodiment).

A second modification will be described. In the above embodiment, as the second condition for using the advance notice determination table for the second section, the variation immediately before the variation to be started this time (1 variation before) is the special figure 2 variation. As a modification, the second condition may be (condition 2'-1) that the long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 is not executed. The condition 2'-1 may be that the command to finish opening the normal electric accessory 90 is received from the main board 200. FIG. By configuring in this way, the use of the second section advance notice determination table is restricted during the period when the normal electric accessory 90 is open, that is, during the period during which the hold related to the special figure 2 can be obtained. , Even if the special figure 2 starts a change in which the number of reservations is 0 during the reservation, the first change during the period when the player can accumulate the reservation related to the special figure 2 It is possible to suppress the fact that the patrol trump notice is determined by

In addition, the second condition is that (condition 2'-2) the fluctuation pattern of the immediately preceding fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern ID that can execute a chance production (a fluctuation pattern ID that can be selected during the special production period, and in special figure 2 only selectable). When condition 2'-2 is applied, the effect determination means 303 may store a list of variation pattern IDs that can be selected during the special effect period.

In addition, the second condition may be that the variation immediately before (Condition 2'-3) is the variation of the special figure 2, and that it is the variation of the normal state (non-entering easy state). When the condition 2'-3 is applied, the effect determination means 303 determines that the variation effect pattern selected by the variation pattern received from the main board 200 is the pattern (ID) selected by the special figure 2 variation in the normal state. In some cases, it may be determined that conditions 2'-3 are satisfied. By doing so, for example, when there is only one suspension of special figure 2 at the time of the final variation of the easy-to-enter state, the remaining suspension variation effect is limited to one pattern, rather than the first By using the advance decision table for the interval, the designer's intention to configure multiple patterns to be displayed can be achieved.

In addition, the second condition, (condition 2 '-4) immediately before the fluctuation, it may be a special figure fluctuation (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500 special figure 1 fluctuation) outside the priority digestion target. Condition 2'-4 is particularly suitable for realizing a specific advance notice display in the first variation (special figure 2 variation) of the special effect period. For example, in a so-called two-type mixed type gaming machine in which three types of conditions for ending the easy-to-enter state are provided: the number of variations of special figure 1, the number of variations of special figure 2, and the number of variations of special figure 1 + special figure 2, This is suitable when the main board 200 displays a special effect during the special effect period or at the entrance of the easy-to-ball state (first change) without referring to a special change pattern table.

A third modification will be described. In the pachinko game machine 500, there is no special figure 1 suspension after the 4 fluctuations of the special figure 2 suspension after the end of the easy-to-enter state, and if the long opening hit of the normal electric accessory 90 occurs under that situation, the special figure 2 It is possible that a pending first-time variation satisfies both conditions (1) and (2) described in the Examples. In order to avoid this, as a modification of the condition (2), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation immediately before the condition (2'-5) satisfies the variation pattern ID capable of executing the special effect. (For example, it is determined that it is not a special figure 2 variation pattern that can be selected other than the variation pattern mode "7" in the second embodiment, etc.). In addition, determination may be made based on the result of the variable performance pattern of decorative symbols determined by the performance lottery on the side of the sub-board 300 based on the variation pattern (determined by the main substrate 200), and the variation that can execute the special performance. The effect pattern ID is, for example, a fluctuating effect pattern ID associated with a effect pattern including a mode in which character A dialogue notice etc. is executed and does not develop into SP reach, and character A search notice etc. is executed and then develops into SP reach. It may be a variable effect pattern ID associated with the effect pattern including the mode.

A fourth modification will be described. In the pachinko game machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, in the announcement lottery of the second section, the result of the present announcement is always patrump announcement (selection rate 100%), but the pachinko probability is set at a high frequency (for example, 90%). , it may be possible to select other notices (character A dialogue notice, etc.). In other words, such a modified example is configured so that the notices (character A dialogue notices, etc.) that have been determined with a high probability in the notice determination table for the first section are less likely to be decided in the notice determination table for the second section. It can also be said that

Further, as a condition for a notice other than the patrol card notice to appear in the notice lottery for the second section, the variation pattern selected by the main board 200 is the variation pattern selected during the special presentation period, and the SP ready-to-win presentation is executed. It may be limited to a variation pattern having a possible variation time. By configuring in this way, in the second section, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of advance notice lottery can be executed under the condition of the main variation pattern. In addition, when configured in this way, a specific variation in the second section (in this embodiment, the final variation in the special effect period, in the modified example, the initial variation in the easy-to-enter state, etc.), occurs with high frequency. When a notice other than a specific notice to be obtained (patrol notice) appears, it is also possible to make it possible to definitely notify that it is a high-expectation change (change accompanied by SP reach development).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment and the modified example, the final variation and the initial variation of the special effect period are configured to be set as the second section, but in the third section that is continuous with the second section, The effect may be determined using a third section effect determination table (which may be the same as the second section effect determination table). For example, by configuring in this way, it is possible to configure such that the notice of the same type appears continuously with high frequency in the last change and the last change in the special effect period, and in some cases, Alternatively, an effect may be performed to heighten the sense of anticipation by stepping up the same type of advance notice over a plurality of fluctuations.

The present invention has been described above based on the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention.

(Sixth embodiment)
The pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment is based on the pinball game machine described in any one of the first to fifth embodiments. The basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment is the configuration already described with reference to FIG. 41 or FIG. Also, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment is the same as the structure already described with reference to FIG. Also, the functional configuration of the main board 200 and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 of the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. In the following, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment will be described with a focus on the points of difference from the other embodiments, and the description of the common points will be omitted. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology, the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, are denoted by the same reference numerals. do.

FIG. 73 shows the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment. Time saving in the same figure and the following description includes the so-called electric chew support, and can be said to be an easy ball entry state. The normal mode corresponds to normal time in FIG. The normal mode is a game state in which a normal game is executed in a normal state, and the player aims for a big hit in the pattern of special figure 1 by hitting to the left (it can be called a first hit, and the probability of a big hit is 1/319). The normal mode includes a plurality of production stages (Stage A to Stage D) with different production themes, backgrounds, characters, stories, etc., and the production stages are switched when predetermined conditions are met.

When a normal jackpot with all decorative symbols 61 other than 7 is won in the normal mode (distribution probability 70%), the special game is executed and then the chance mode is entered. The chance mode corresponds to the chance presentation of FIG. In the chance mode, a small hit V is acquired in a total of 5 fluctuations of 1 time reduction and 4 remaining holds (typically 4 special 2 holds) (the small hit probability of special 2 is 1/7.7 ) is the game state. In the chance mode, chance effects including battle effects are displayed.

When a special jackpot with 7 decorative patterns 61 is won in the normal mode (distribution probability 30%), and when a small win V is obtained in the chance mode (acquisition probability 50%), the special game is executed and then the rush mode is entered. Transition. Rush mode corresponds to the rush effect of FIG. The rush mode is a game state in which a small hit V is aimed at in 13 fluctuations of 13 times of time reduction. In rush mode, rush effects including mission effects are displayed. The probability of winning a small hit of 1/7.7 with 13 rotations in the rush mode is about 84%, and if the ball can be made to hit the attacker appropriately at the time of winning the small hit, it is certain that the V prize will be won. Therefore, the probability of getting a small hit V in the rush mode is about 84%, and the rush mode, the special game, and the rush mode are repeated with about 84% probability.

If the small win V cannot be obtained within 13 fluctuations in the rush mode (probability that the small win of 1/7.7 will not be won even once in 13 rotations is about 16%), the game shifts to the chance mode. The chance mode is a game state in which a small hit V is aimed at in 5 fluctuations consisting of one time-saving rotation and the remaining four holdings. If the small win V cannot be obtained within 5 fluctuations in the chance mode (the probability of winning a small win of 1/7.7 in 5 rotations is about 50%), the mode shifts to the immediate stop prevention mode. The immediate stop prevention mode is a normal game in a normal state, and is a game state in which the player aims for a big hit in the special figure 1 (jackpot probability is 1/319) by hitting to the left. In the immediate stop prevention mode, in order to prevent the game from ending immediately after the chance mode ends, an immediate stop prevention effect different from that in the normal mode is displayed. If a big hit cannot be obtained within 30 fluctuations in the immediate stop prevention mode, the game returns to the normal mode. In this instant stop prevention mode, not only does it display a special effect, but it also increases the probability of a premium effect (a effect that ensures winning by appearing). A situation in which it is difficult for the player to leave the seat can be created.

As the first feature of the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the pending change effect will be described. At present, a wide variety of pending change effects are realized as pending change effects in which the pending image changes. Under such circumstances, it is desired to create a more novel pending change effect than now. The main purpose of the hold change effect of the first feature is to realize a novel hold change effect.

Effect determination means 303, icon image corresponding to one lottery value of the symbol variation being executed (also referred to as "the variation"), special figure 1 reserve or special figure 2 The effect display device 60 is caused to display the icon images corresponding to the four reserved items. The icon images corresponding to the four special figure 2 reservations are also called "Hold 1 object", "Hold 2 object", "Hold 3 object", and "Hold 4 object" from the one with the earliest change order. Also called a "pending object". In the normal mode and immediate stop prevention mode of FIG. 73, the pending object may correspond to special figure 1 pending. On the other hand, in the chance mode and the rush mode, the pending object may correspond to special figure 2 pending. Note that the variable object and the H1 object to H4 object can also be collectively regarded as a holding object.

The pending change effect is a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of at least one of the variable object and the plurality of pending objects. The effect determination means 303 corresponds to the lottery value according to the preliminary determination information notified from the main board 200 regarding the lottery value (for example, the first lottery value of the special figure 1 in the normal mode) targeted for the pending change effect. A pending change effect can be executed for the variable object or the pending object. In the pending change effect, for example, the appearance (for example, color) of the variable object or the pending object is changed from a mode in which the expectation of winning is relatively low to a mode in which the expectation of winning is relatively high. In other words, make an upstart change.

In an embodiment, the colors of the variable or pending objects are gold, red, green, blue, and default (white), in descending order of probability of winning. A performance determining means 303 changes the variable object or the pending object corresponding to the lottery value to gold or red at a higher probability than when the lottery value is a win when the lottery value targeted for the pending change performance is a hit. decide to let In addition, when the color of the variable object or the pending object is gold, it is assumed that the hit is confirmed. It does not change the variable or reserve object to gold.

The effect determining means 303 can execute a thunderbolt pending change effect, a seven-star pending change effect, a dying demon pending change effect, and a character pending change effect as a plurality of types of pending change effects. FIG. 74 shows an example of a lightning strike pending change effect. The lightning strike suspension change effect is the variable object 730 and the suspension object 732 (H1 object 732a, H2 object 732b, H3 object 732c) corresponding to a certain lottery value (for example, the first lottery value of special figure 1 in normal mode). . In the thunderbolt pending change effect shown in FIG. 74, an object representing a lightning bolt (lightning bolt 734) is dropped on the holding object 732a to be changed, and the color of the holding object 732a is changed at that timing.

FIG. 75 shows executable timings of pending change effects. In the same figure, the thunderbolt hold change effect, the seven-star hold change effect, the dying demon hold change effect, and the character hold change effect are arranged vertically, and the multiple sections that make up the pattern change effect are arranged horizontally, and the execution timing of each hold change effect is shown. is indicated by "○". "Winning & Look Ahead" in the same figure is when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 (in other words, when the first lottery value or the second lottery value occurs), and when moving on hold (previous (timing at which the hold is consumed and the hold object 732 is moved). "Start of first variation" is the time when pattern variation is started, and is the time when the pseudo first variation in the pseudo continuous variation effect is started. "During the first fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo first fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect.

"Second fluctuation start" is the start time of the pseudo second fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. "During the second fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo second fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. "Start of the third variation" is the start time of the pseudo third variation in the pseudo continuous variation effect. "During the third fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo third fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. "Later development time" is the timing at or after development when the symbol variation effect develops into a state where the expectation of winning is high (super reach, etc.).

When the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the effect determining means 303 determines whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired along with the entering of the ball is targeted for the lightning strike suspension change effect. A lottery will determine whether or not In other words, it is determined with a predetermined probability that the lottery value acquired along with the entry of the ball is targeted for the lightning strike suspension change effect. When a certain lottery value is determined as an object of the lightning strike suspension change performance, the performance determination means 303 determines by lottery the execution timing of one or more times of the lightning strike suspension change performance. As shown in FIG. 75, the thunderbolt suspension change effect can be executed both before and after the start of symbol variation based on the lottery value of the object of effect (hereinafter also referred to as "target lottery value"). It can also be executed at the time of production development (at the time of development in the second half).

In addition, it is possible to execute the lightning strike pending change effect a plurality of times for the pending object 732 and the variable object 730 corresponding to the same target lottery value. For example, the effect determining means 303 changes the pending object 732 corresponding to one target lottery value (for example, from white to blue), and then changes the variable object 730 corresponding to the same target lottery value (for example, from blue to red). can decide to let

FIG. 76 shows an example of seven-star pending change effect. As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the seven-star pending change effect, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, a holding object 732 corresponding to the lottery value obtained by the entering ball is displayed. Then, an object (seven stars 736 ) representing the Big Dipper is displayed over the reserved object 732 . As shown in FIG. 76(b), the seven stars 736 light up one or a plurality of seven stars when moving on hold.

Until the start of the symbol change based on the lottery value for the seven-star pending change effect target, in other words, until the pending object 732 changes to the variable object 730, when all the stars of the seven stars 736 are lit (FIG. 76(c)), the seven stars 736 disappears, and the pending object 732 (or the variable object 730) changes to red pending or higher (red pending or gold pending) (FIG. 76(d)). This is also called success. On the other hand, if at least one star of the seven stars 736 does not light up before the start of the symbol variation, the seven stars 736 disappear and the pending object 732 remains unchanged (a fake effect). This is also called failure.

When the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the effect determining means 303 determines whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired along with the entering of the ball is subject to the seven-star reservation change effect. A lottery will determine whether or not When a certain lottery value is determined as the object of the seven-star hold change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines by lottery whether the seven-star hold change effect is to succeed or fail, and also determines the lighting mode of the seven stars 736 (the number of lights and lighting timing) is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the hold change timing (including the initial display) in the seven-star hold change effect is at the time of winning, at the time of hold movement, and at the start of the first variation.

FIG. 77 shows an example of a dying effect pending change effect. As shown in FIG. 77( a ), in the death apocalypse holding change effect, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 , a holding object 732 corresponding to the lottery value obtained by the entering ball is normally displayed. is displayed in a first stage mode different from In other words, in the dying death pending change effect, the pending object 732 corresponding to the lottery value is displayed in the above-described first stage mode before the pattern variation based on the lottery value to be produced is started. FIG. 77(a) shows a suspended object 732 representing an enemy character in a dying state as a first stage mode.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), in the death apocalypse change effect, after the start of pattern variation based on the lottery value of the object to be produced, the pending object 732 representing the enemy character bursts, and the second stage mode different from the usual It changes to the relevant variable object 730 indicating a certain line (for example, the character string "chance"). A second stage aspect may include a plurality of lines with different expected hits to suggest. In the dying death pending change effect of the embodiment, the pending object 732 showing the enemy character does not burst before the start of the pattern change based on the lottery value of the object to be produced, but as a modification, the enemy character is shown before the start of the pattern change. The pending object 732 may explode and change into a pending object 732 showing dialogue.

When the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the effect determining means 303 determines whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired along with the entering of the ball is subject to the dying demon holding change effect. A lottery will determine whether or not When a certain lottery value is determined as the object of the death witch holding change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines the content of the dialogue and the change timing of the variable object 730 showing the dialogue by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the display timing of the pending object 732 representing the enemy character is when the prize is won (when the pending object 732 is initially displayed). Also, the change timing to the change object 730 indicating the dialogue is any one of the start of the first change to the middle of the third change.

The character holding change effect will be explained. In the character holding change effect, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, a holding object 732 (which may be in a normal mode) corresponding to the lottery value obtained by the entering ball is displayed, and the holding object 732 is displayed. A character image is further displayed near the object 732 (or overlaid on it). A weapon image or the like may be used instead of the character image. During the suspended movement, the character image continues to stay near the suspended object 732 . Then, after the pattern variation starts, the character image takes action to build up the variation object 730 (for example, change it to a color with a higher expectation of winning).

When the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, the effect determining means 303 determines whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired along with the ball entering is subject to the character holding change effect. A lottery will determine whether or not When a certain lottery value is determined as the target of the character pending change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines the timing of the action of the character image (in other words, the change timing of the variable object 730) and the change mode of the variable object 730 (what color) is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the display timing of the character image is at the time of winning a prize (at the time of initial display of the pending object 732). Also, the timing of the action of the character image (in other words, the change timing of the variable object 730) is any of the first to third variations.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart of pending change effects. Here, the lottery value targeted for the pending change effect is called a target lottery value. As shown in FIG. 78( a ), the effect determination means 303 sets the variable object 730 (or the pending object 732 ) corresponding to the target lottery value to the second-stage mode (for example, the line “chance”) by the dying effect pending change effect. , it is possible to execute the lightning strike pending change effect for the variable object 730 (or the pending object 732). In other words, the effect determining means 303 changes the variable object 730 (or the suspended object 732) corresponding to the target lottery value to the second-stage mode by the death-blow pending change effect, even after the variable object 730 (or The pattern of the pending change effect can be determined to execute the lightning strike pending change effect for the pending object 732).

For example, the effect determining means 303 changes the character color and background color of the variable object 730 (or the retained object 732) indicating "chance" after the development of the second half effect to a color with a higher expectation of winning than before. (eg change from blue to red, etc.). It should be noted that the death thirst pending change effect in FIG. 78(a) may be replaced with a seven-star pending change effect, or may be replaced with a character hold change effect. According to this configuration, even after one suspension change performance is performed, the player's expectation for the performance of another suspension change performance can be continued, and the attraction of the performance can be further enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(b), after the effect determining means 303 executes the lightning strike pending change effect for the pending object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value, the dying demon pending change effect for the pending object 732 is While not executed, the second lightning strike pending change effect for the pending object 732 (or the variable object 730 after pending movement) can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the effect determination means 303 executes the death-mongering change effect on the pending object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value, so that the pending object 732 becomes the first-stage mode. Before the state of the second stage from , the lightning strike suspension change effect for the suspension object 732 is not executed. On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 executes the death-mongering change effect on the suspended object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value so that the suspended object 732 (or the variable object 730 after the suspended movement) is in the second stage mode. After that, it is possible to execute the lightning strike suspension change effect for the suspension object 732 (or the variable object 730 after suspension movement).

78(b) and 78(c) may be replaced with a seven-star pending change effect, or may be replaced with a character hold change effect. According to this configuration, even after one suspension change performance is performed, the player's expectation for the performance of another suspension change performance can be continued, and the attraction of the performance can be further enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of confusing the player due to discrepancies in the change transition of the suspended object 732 (or the variable object 730 after the suspended movement).

FIG. 79 shows the lottery route of the pending change effect. First, the effect determination means 303 determines the type of prefetch effect by parent lottery. When the holding change performance is determined by the parent lottery, a child lottery is executed using a child lottery table (FIG. 80) to be described later to determine the type of the holding change performance and the mode of change before the start of the change. Then, using a grandchild lottery table corresponding to the result of the child lottery among a plurality of grandchild lottery tables (FIGS. 81 to 90B) to be described later, a grandchild lottery is executed to determine the change mode of the fluctuation.

In the actual child lottery table and grandchild lottery table, the main variation pattern (for example, the symbol variation pattern determined by the main board 200), or the sub-variation pattern subdivided according to the main variation pattern (for example, the sub-board In order to select one of a plurality of performance patterns (hereinafter also referred to as "variation patterns") according to the variable performance pattern determined in 300, a number is assigned to each variation pattern. However, in the figure of the child lottery table and the figure of the grandchild lottery table below, for convenience, the numerical value obtained by totaling the numbers for each change pattern selected in the case of "winning" and "losing" in the lottery is on. These numerical values show the relative probability of selecting which variation pattern and how often, even though the percentage of each variation pattern that is selected differs between the main and sub variation patterns in the case of hits and misses. It is. It should be noted that, although not shown, in the parent lottery as well, the ratio of which production pattern is selected for each main or sub variation pattern differs.

FIG. 80 shows an example of a child lottery table. Each record of the child lottery table (referred to as a change pattern) is (1) change mode at the time of Ho 4 winning (when the 4th special figure 1 pending or special figure 2 pending occurs), (2) Ho 3 winning or Mode of change when moving from Ho4 to Ho3, (3) Mode of change when Ho2 wins or when moving from Ho3 to Ho2, (4) When Ho1 wins or moves from Ho2 to Ho1 Determines how time changes. Also, as described above, in FIG. 80, in the child lottery table, the ratio of each change pattern to be selected at the time of winning (big hit or small hit) and at the time of loss (neither big hit nor small hit) It shows the percentage to be selected. In other words, it indicates the feasibility of each change pattern. In the child lottery of the embodiment, a specific change pattern is selected from a plurality of change patterns including a plurality of types of pending change effects in one lottery. As a modification, the child lottery includes a first-stage lottery for determining the type of pending change effect and a specific change pattern selected from a plurality of change patterns corresponding to the type determined in the first-stage lottery. A tier lottery may be included.

FIG. 81 shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. The grandchild lottery table of this figure shows the case where the change pattern selected in the child lottery is a change pattern in which the mode of change at the time of winning Ho 1 or moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1 is "death death hold_biribirizako". , used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the pending when the pending object 732 of No. 1 becomes "death death hold Biribirizako". Each record of the grandchild lottery table (referred to as a change pattern) is composed of (1) first change start to change mode during change, (2) second change start to change change mode during change, (3) third change start ~Determine the mode of change during fluctuation, (4) the mode of change during the latter half of development. In addition, as described above, in FIG. 81, in the grandchild lottery table, each change pattern is selected at the time of winning (big hit or small hit), and at the time of losing (neither big hit nor small hit). It shows the percentage to be selected. In other words, it indicates the feasibility of each change pattern.

FIG. 82 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "mini character hold_default" when Ho 1 wins or moves from Ho 2 to Ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change character of the default color is added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the variation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the hold when the hold object 732 of the retainer 1 becomes "mini character hold_default". FIG. 83 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table of this figure, when the change pattern selected in the child lottery is a change pattern that becomes "mini character hold_blue" (that is, a blue character is added in the character hold change), the change starts. It is used in the grandchild lottery of time. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the pending when the pending object 732 of No. 1 becomes "mini-character pending_blue".

FIG. 84 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table of this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "mini character hold_green" when the ho 1 wins or moves from ho 2 to ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change green character is added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the variation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the pending when the pending object 732 of No. 1 becomes "mini-character pending_green". FIG. 85 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "mini character hold_red" when winning the Ho 1 prize or when moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change red character is added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the variation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the pending when the pending object 732 of No. 1 becomes "mini-character pending_red".

FIG. 86 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "blue" when the ho 1 wins or when moving from ho 2 to ho 1 (i.e., via the lightning strike hold change In the case of a change pattern in which a blue object 732a is displayed, it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the hold when the hold object 732 of the hold 1 becomes "blue". FIG. 87 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery becomes "green" when Ho 1 wins or when moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1. In the case of a change pattern in which a green object 732a is displayed, it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the hold when the hold object 732 of the hold 1 becomes "green".

FIG. 88 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "red" or "seven-star hold_7 lighting → red hold" when Ho 1 wins or moves from Ho 2 to Ho 1. (that is, the red H1 object 732a is displayed via the thunderbolt suspension change or the seven-star suspension change), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the variation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the hold when the hold object 732 of the hold 1 becomes "red". FIG. 89 also shows an example of the grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table shown in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "gold" or "seven-star hold_7 lighting → gold hold" when Ho 1 wins or moves from Ho 2 to Ho 1. (that is, the golden 1 object 732a is displayed via the thunderbolt suspension change or the seven-star suspension change), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the variation. In other words, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the variation of the pending when the pending object 732 of the holding 1 is "gold".

90A and 90B also show examples of grandchild lottery tables. The grandchild lottery tables in these figures are used for the effect lottery at the time of change when the holding change effect is not won in the parent lottery, in other words, when the holding change effect for the pending object 732 is not executed. That is, the grandchild lottery tables in these drawings define the change pattern for the variable object 730 in the default mode.

A modification of the holding change effect of feature 1 will be described.
As a first modified example, the death throes pending change effect and the character pending change effect may be restricted so as not to occur at the same time. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may determine not to execute the character pending change effect when it is determined to execute the death throes pending change effect. Further, the effect determining means 303 may determine not to execute the character pending change effect when it is determined to execute the character pending change effect. This is because both the death throes pending change effect and the character pending change effect are effects for displaying a character related to the pending object 732, and if they occur at the same time, there is a possibility that the player will be confused. For example, as shown in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the element of the death-mongering change effect is eliminated from the change pattern including the character-holding change effect, and the element of the character-holding change effect is eliminated from the change pattern including the death-mongering change effect. may be In addition, the element of the dying state change effect may be excluded from each change pattern of the grandchild lottery table for the character hold change effect shown in FIGS. In addition, the element of the death sickness pending change effect may be excluded from each change pattern of the grandchild lottery table of the death sickness pending change effect shown in FIG. 81 .

A second modification will be described. Rather than performing a second-stage change (for example, a change to the line "chance") with the change due to the death hold change effect, the second-stage change (change due to the character's action) is performed with the change due to the character hold change effect. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation of winning is relatively higher in the case of playing. For example, let A be the probability of selection of a hold change performance pattern in which a second-stage change is performed by a death-mongering hold change effect in the case of a hit, and a hold change effect in which a second-stage change is performed by a character hold change effect in the case of a win. When the probability of pattern selection is B, B may be set larger than A. Specifically, in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the selection ratio of the change pattern specifying the character suspension change effect (mini character) at the time of winning is higher than the selection ratio at the time of winning the change pattern specifying the death waiting change effect. may be set to be higher.

In this modification, for example, it is configured so that a change of red hold or higher is finally confirmed through the death hold change effect, and the line corresponding to the reliability equivalent to green hold on average through the character hold change effect is preferably configured to change to As a result, even when any of the pending change effects is executed, a change to the same degree of hit expectation can be expected for the finally changed pending icon, while the hit expectation of the executed hold change effect itself can be expected. It is possible to make a difference between (death death hold change effect <character hold change effect).

A third modification will be described. The seven-star suspension change effect and the thunderbolt suspension change effect can have the same aspect of the suspended object 732 (or the variable object 730) after the change. For example, it could be the same red hold. Here, even if the retained object 732 (or the variable object 730) after the change is in the same mode, the change through the seven-star retention change effect may relatively increase the expectation of winning. good. For example, let A be the probability that a hold change effect pattern that changes to red hold due to a lightning strike hold change effect is selected in the case of a hit, and a hold change effect pattern that changes to red hold due to a seven-star hold change effect is selected in the case of a hit. B may be set larger than A, where B is the probability of Specifically, in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, it is a change pattern that defines the lightning hold change effect, and from the selection ratio of the change pattern that finally changes to red hold, the seven star hold change effect is selected. It may be determined that the selection ratio at the time of winning is higher for the change pattern that is the prescribed change pattern and finally changes to red hold. As a result, even if it changes to the same hold icon (for example, red hold), rather than changing to red hold through a lightning strike hold change effect that momentarily changes the hold icon, it is executed across the fluctuation from the look-ahead timing Since the performance time to be executed is longer in the case of changing to the red reservation through the seven-star reservation change performance, the player can have a sense of expectation.

A fourth modification will be described. The effect determining means 303 may be capable of further executing other pre-reading notices (for example, notice indicating XX zone) that are different from the four types of pending change effects described above. In this case, the second-stage change of the seven-star hold change effect (all seven stars are lit, red hold or more ) may be configured to increase the possibility that In addition, the hold object 732 or It may be configured to increase the possibility of changing to the variable object 730 (for example, dialogue with a high degree of expectation). By configuring in this way, even when the same pending change effect (Seven Stars pending change effect and death devil pending change effect in the fourth modification) is being executed, if another foreseeing notice is being executed, Expectations can be made for the possibility of success of the pending change effect being executed and the pending object after change. In particular, rather than a hold change effect (thunderbolt hold change effect in this embodiment) in which a hold change is performed instantaneously, a hold change effect (seven-star hold change effect in this embodiment) that is executed across fluctuations from the look-ahead timing , death witch hold change effect, character hold change effect).

In addition, the hold object 732 with a higher expectation of winning in the second-stage change of the character hold change effect when the other pre-reading notice is executed than when the other pre-reading notice is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to increase the possibility of changing to the variable object 730 (for example, reserve red or reserve gold). In addition, the hold object 732 that has a higher expectation of winning with one hold change due to the lightning strike hold change effect than the case where the other look-ahead notice is executed and the other look-ahead notice is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to increase the possibility of changing to the variable object 730 (for example, reserve red or reserve gold).

A fifth modification will be described. As already mentioned, the normal mode includes multiple types of production stages. The effect determination means 303 may display the pending object 732 and the variable object 730 in different modes (different shapes) for each effect stage. On the other hand, the effect determination means 303 may display the pending object 732 and the variable object 730 in the same manner as the pending object 732 and the variable object 730 after the pending change effect regardless of the type of effect stage. It should be noted that the pending object 732 and the variable object 730 of the same aspect here have the same shape and pattern, but may differ in color (ie, the degree of expectation to be implied). In this way, the pending object for each production stage adopts an object that matches the motif of the stage, and the pending object after the change after the pending change production is executed is the same for each stage. Even in the production stage of , it is possible to make it possible to understand at a glance the degree of expectation of winning in the retained object after the change.

A sixth modification will be described. As described above, the form of the variable object 730 or the pending object 732 (collectively “suspended icon”) after the pending change effect may differ for each type of pending change effect. For example, the hold icon changed by the character hold change effect is a normal-shaped hold icon whose color has changed, while the hold icon changed by the death hold change effect is a dialogue (such as “chance”). may

A seventh modification will be described. Regarding the pending icon that is the target of the pending change effect, rather than changing to the variable object 730 (red pending, etc.) with high expectations in the latter half of the development after the start of the pattern change (after the development of super reach), the stage of winning & looking ahead It may be configured such that changing to the pending object 732 with a high degree of expectation in , has a high degree of expectation for winning. In other words, when changing to the high-expected variable object 730 (red reservation, etc.) in the latter half of the development of the pattern change, the probability of winning is higher than the probability of winning, when the change to the high-expected reserved object 732 at the stage of winning & looking ahead It may be configured so that the probability of winning is higher. A change pattern that defines a lightning strike pending change effect in the child lottery table of FIG. 80 will be described as an example. In the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the selection rate of the change pattern that eventually becomes red hold or higher is 593 at the time of winning, and 260 at the time of loss. On the other hand, the selection rate of the change pattern (which can change to red or more due to the variation) that eventually becomes blue retention or green retention is 22524 at the time of winning, and 21974 at the time of loss. Therefore, the child lottery table of FIG. 80 is configured so that the expectation of winning is higher if the object changes to the holding object 732 with a high expectation in the stage of winning & looking ahead.

In general, rather than changing to the hold icon (red hold) with high expectations in the hold change effect (thunderbolt hold change effect in this embodiment) in which the hold change is performed once The degree of expectation is increased by the suspension change effect (seven-star suspension change effect, death demon hold change effect, character hold change effect, or thunderbolt hold change effect that is executed multiple times in the present embodiment) in which the hold icon is changed step by step over the timing. Since changing to a higher hold icon (red hold) can maintain the player's sense of expectation, for example, when a hold change effect that finally changes to red hold is executed In this case, the possibility of selection of the suspension change performance in which the suspension icon is changed stepwise from the look-ahead timing to the fluctuation timing is higher than the suspension change performance in which the suspension is changed at once. In other words, rather than the frequency of changing to red hold in the hold change effect where the hold change is performed at once, the frequency of changing to red hold in the hold change effect that changes the hold icon step by step from the look-ahead timing to the change timing Since the price is higher, it is more likely to be selected both in the case of a hit and in the case of a miss. In other words, the frequency of selection as an effect is higher than the hit expectation when changing to a red hold in a hold change effect that changes to a hold icon in stages from the look-ahead timing to the fluctuation timing. is low, and the hit expectation in the case of change to red hold due to the occurrence of the hold change effect in which the change of hold is performed at one time is relatively higher. Similarly, even in the suspension change effect in which the suspension is changed at once, there are more suspensions than changing to red suspension at a timing when there is little suspension (for example, the first suspension icon or the variable icon). Changing to red pending at the timing (for example, the fourth pending icon) relatively increases the expectation of winning.

An eighth modified example will be described. As described above, the effect determination means 303 may be capable of executing the first pending change effect and the second pending change effect. The first pending change effect occurs when the second stage change occurs after the first stage pending change (for example, seven stars 736 attached to the pending object 732) occurs in the stage of entering the ball and looking ahead. It includes both cases of not doing so. In the second pending change effect, after the first stage pending change (for example, the character image is attached to the pending object 732), the second stage change (for example, the action of the character image and the color of the pending object 732) is always performed. change) occurs. The seven-star pending change effect of the above embodiment corresponds to the first pending change effect. Also, the death throes pending change effect and the character pending change effect of the above embodiment correspond to the second hold change effect.

As a second feature of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, an over winning effect including a chance up effect will be described. When balls are clogged on the game board due to unforeseen circumstances, the original flow path of the game balls is blocked, and the player may feel a sense of loss. The main purpose of the over-winning effect of the second feature is to realize a suitable effect corresponding to the situation where balls are clogged on the game board. The over-winning effect of the present embodiment is based on the same technical idea as the effect for over-winning described in feature 2 of the second embodiment. However, the effect of the second embodiment is intended for over-winning to the big winning hole 20, but the over-winning effect of this embodiment is the over-winning to the second starting hole 12 (so-called electric chew) in the easy-to-enter state. target.

A performance determining means 303 displays an over-winning performance, which is a pre-reading notice suggesting the degree of expectation that a win exists in the reserved lottery values, according to the advance determination information. FIG. 91 shows an example of an over winning effect. Production determination means 303 refers to the pre-determination information of special figure 2 suspension in the chance mode entry easy state (1 time of variation), hits in the variation or up to 4 special figure 2 suspension (typical An image of a character (character 738) indicating the degree of expectation that there is a small hit is displayed.

The effect determination means 303 displays one of a plurality of types of characters 738 having different expectations of winning according to the preliminary determination information regarding the special figure 2 reservation. The plurality of types of characters 738 are five types, in descending order of expectation of winning: Hokuto Army, Nanto Khan, Messiah Legend, Big Boss, and Villainous Alliance. The effect determination means 303, according to a predetermined standard (in the embodiment, an over winning effect determination table described later), accompanies the increase in the number of balls entered into the second start hole 12 in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode. A chance-up performance is executed to change the mode of the character 738 so as to show a higher degree of expectation. In the chance-up effect of the embodiment, the characters 738 are changed in order of Hokuto Army, Nanto Khan, Savior Legend, Big Boss, and Villainous Alliance.

FIG. 92 shows an example of an over winning effect determination table. 1st to 20th on the horizontal axis of the table in this figure indicate the number of over winnings. The number of over winnings is the number of balls entered in the second start port 12 exceeding the upper limit number of special 2 reservations, in other words, the number of balls that exceeded the upper limit number of special 2 reservations for the second start port 12 is a number. The vertical axis of the table in this figure indicates the change pattern of the character 738 . In the table of this figure, among the values corresponding to each combination of the number of over winnings and the change pattern, "0" is the army of the North Star, "1" is the villain of the South Star, "2" is the legend of the savior, "3" is the big boss, A "4" indicates a villainous alliance. The change pattern defined in the table of this drawing is determined such that the more the number of over winnings increases, the more the character is switched to a character showing a higher degree of expectation, except for "Army of the North Star_Blue 1".

A performance determination means 303 selects by lottery one of a plurality of variation patterns defined in the over winning performance determination table in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode. The change pattern lottery may be configured such that the South Star Thug or Legend of the Savior is more likely to be selected in the case of a loss, and the Big Boss or Evil Alliance is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit. In addition, the villainous alliance may be a hit decision, for example, the effect determination means 303, with a predetermined probability, only when there is a hit (symbol big hit or small hit) in the variation or special figure 2 reservation You may choose the Evil Alliance change pattern.

Here, let N be the opening/closing time of the normal electric accessory 90 (in other words, the ball entry variation mechanism) in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode, M be the number of game balls that can be shot in N hours, and the normal electric role in the chance mode. Let O be the open ratio of the object 90 . In this case, the maximum number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 in the easy-ball-entering state of the chance mode is assumed to be (M×O) in terms of design. In addition, regarding the number of over winnings to the second starting port 12 in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode, the maximum value assumed in the design is (M × O - the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation).

In the pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the open/close time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode is 20 seconds. Also, since the number of balls that can be shot in one minute is less than 100 (99.9), the number of balls that can be shot in 20 seconds is (99.9×20/60). In addition, the opening ratio of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode is 0.58. In addition, the upper limit of the special figure reservation is four. Therefore, regarding the number of over winnings to the second start hole 12 in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode, the maximum number assumed in the design is (99.9×20/60×0.58−4)≈15. Become.

The over-winning effect determination table includes rules for changing the mode of the character 738 (that is, the type of character) when the number of over-winning to the second starting port 12 exceeds the maximum number assumed in design. Specifically, the over-winning effect determination table includes a provision for changing the mode of the character 738 when the over-winning number exceeds 15, which is (M×O−special figure 2 reserved upper limit value). For example, the change pattern “Evil Alliance_Rainbow 1” in the over winning effect determination table of FIG. 92 changes the character 738 from Big Boss to Evil Alliance with 18 over winnings. In addition, the change pattern “Evil Alliance_Rainbow 2” changes the character 738 from Big Boss to Evil Alliance with 17 over-winning prizes. In addition, the change pattern "Evil Alliance_Rainbow 3" changes the character 738 from the Big Boss to the Evil Alliance with 16 over winnings.

Therefore, the effect determination means 303 can change the mode of the character 738 when the number of over winnings for the second start opening 12 exceeds the maximum number assumed in design in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode. During the game with the pachinko game machine 500, when an unforeseen situation causes a clogged ball (so-called grape) on the board surface, and the clogged ball is cleared while the normal electric accessory 90 is being opened, etc. There is a possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will exceed the assumed maximum number. According to the above feature 2, by providing a pattern for changing the character 738 when the maximum number assumed in design is exceeded in the over-winning performance determination table, the performance can be changed even if an unforeseen situation occurs. As a result, even if an unforeseen situation (such as grapes) that is not desirable for the player occurs, there is a possibility that the player will be able to see an effect that is not usually seen, so that the player's stress can be reduced.

Also, the over-winning effect determination table in FIG. 92 defines a change pattern for finally changing the character 738 when the number of over-winning prizes reaches the maximum number assumed in design (15 in the embodiment as described above). include. For example, the change patterns "Big Boss_Fri1" and "Evil Alliance_Rainbow4" are applicable. Also, the over-winning effect determination table in FIG. 92 includes change patterns in which the character 738 changes midway when the number of over-winning prizes reaches the maximum number assumed in design. For example, the variation pattern “Evil Alliance_Rainbow 1” is applicable.

A modified example of the over winning effect of feature 2 will be described.
As a first modification, the over-winning effect determination table may define the change probability (upstart probability) of the character 738 for each number of over-winning to the second starting port 12 . For example, 1 to 4 over prizes have a change probability of 0%, 5 to 8 over prizes have a change probability of 20%, 9 to 12 over prizes have a change probability of 25%, and from 13 over prizes. It may be determined that 16 pieces have a change probability of 30%, and over winning numbers of 17 to 20 pieces have a change probability of 40%.

As another aspect, the over-winning effect determination table may define a combination of a definite change accompanying an increase in the number of over-winning prizes similar to the embodiment and the stochastic change described above. For example, corresponding to the change pattern "Big Boss_Fri 3" in FIG. 12 pieces from 20% change probability (change mode is "1" to "2"), 13 to 20 over winning numbers change probability 30% (change mode is from "1" to "2" or "2" to "3").

In this modified example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the effect determination means 303 determines that the character 738 can be changed, and the same effect as the above embodiment can be obtained.

A second modification will be described. A pattern that does not change at all due to over-winning to the second starting port 12 may be a hit (symbol big win or small win). In the over winning effect determination table of FIG. 92, the change pattern "Hokuto no Gun_Blue 1" corresponds. Even if the effect determination means 303 selects the change pattern "Hokuto Army_Blue 1" with a predetermined probability only when there is a hit (symbol big hit or small hit) in the change or special figure 2 reservation. good. In the case of the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 92, if the number of over-winnings is five or more and the character 738 does not change even once, it is confirmed that the change pattern is "Hokuto no Gun_Blue 1". That is, the hit is decided.

A third modification will be described. The effect determining means 303 may not execute a new effect resulting from a further over-winning to the second starting port 12 when executing the chance-up effect that builds up the aspect of the character 738, or at least a new effect. You may make it not perform such a chance up production|presentation. This is because, if a certain chance-up effect is interrupted in the middle and another chance-up effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the contents of the effect.

Note that the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 92 is configured such that the character 738 is not continuously changed in consecutive over-winning. In other words, when the character 738 changes with N over-wins, the pattern in which the character 738 changes further with over-wins of N+1 is not defined. This ensures that there is no temporal duplication of chance-up effects.

A fourth modification will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the over winning effect is executed in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode. As a modified example, the over winning effect may be executed also in each variation of the normal mode (normal state). In this case, an over-winning effect may be executed for over-winning to the first start port 11 (entering balls exceeding four special figure 1 reservations).

A fifth modification will be described. In the over-winning effect of the above embodiment, the aspect of the character 738 suggests the degree of expectation that a win exists in the variation or maximum four special figure 2 reserves. As a modification, the over winning effect may be executed individually for each of the fluctuation object 730 corresponding to the fluctuation and the maximum four holding objects 732 corresponding to the maximum four special figure 2 holding. In this case, an over winning effect determination table may be provided corresponding to each of the variation or up to four special figure 2 reserves. Also, the degree of expectation for winning may be suggested by the colors of the variable object 730 and up to four reserved objects 732 and the type of character attached to each object.

A sixth modification will be described. In the over winning effect of the above embodiment, the chance is increased according to the number of balls that exceeds the predetermined number (4, which is the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold) for the second start port 12 in the easy ball entry state of the chance mode. was displayed. As a modification, the chance up may be displayed according to the number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 in the easy-ball-entering state of the chance mode. In this case, the over-winning effect determination table shows the maximum number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 in the easy-ball-entering state of the chance mode (as described above, M×O, for example, 19). ) may be included that may change the appearance of the character 738 .

As a third feature of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, a method of managing the variation pattern table relating to the easy-to-enter state will be described. In the easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 increases, a special effect designed on the premise of the variation of the special figure 2 based on the entering of the ball into the second starting port 12 may be executed. . In this case, if the special figure 1 changes based on the ball entering the first starting port 11 in the easy-ball-entering state, the special performance may proceed in a manner not intended in terms of design. The main purpose of the method of managing the variation pattern table, which is the third feature, is to prevent the production from progressing in a manner not intended in terms of design.

First, the contents of the effects in the rush mode and the chance mode shown in FIG. 73 will be described.
(1) Rush mode 1st rotation:
It is a change from the jackpot end demonstration to the rush rush. Basically, it is a guidance part that executes an effect indicating the end of the big hit and an effect indicating the start of the rush, so if you win here, you will have a direction that suggests a hit like a falling role. Execute. Also, in the first hit, it is easier for the player to understand that the hit notification is given after the big win end demonstration and the rush entry effect are executed. In other words, the winning notification may be executed immediately.

(2) After the second rotation in rush mode:
Of the 14 time-saving rotations, the first rotation is the end demonstration + rush rush production as described above, and the last 14th rotation (the first rotation in the chance mode) is the pending charge production as described later. Therefore, in the remaining 12 rotations excluding the first rotation in the rush mode, an effect that suggests success or failure based on a series of background stages is executed. In addition, the quasi-continuous variation is repeated so as to make one variation time longer in the small number of rotations of 12 rotations and avoid redundant performance. Specifically, four pseudo-variations are performed per rotation (one variation), and a total of 48 pseudo-continuous variations are performed during 12 rotations. During this pseudo-continuous variation, the remaining number of times of display (the number of remaining variations) is displayed, and the remaining number of times of display is counted down from 48 times. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate that the rotation is actually 12 rotations.

(3) Chance mode:
The effect patterns shown in (3-1) to (3-3) below may also be used.
(3-1) It may be an effect pattern in which one rotation of the pending charge and four rotations of the remaining hold are shown as one effect, and may be an effect pattern called so-called look-ahead collective variation. For example, after the win-lose effect, mini symbols (decorative symbols smaller than the normal size) may be repeatedly changed and stopped at high speed until the hit is suspended.
(3-2) It may be an effect pattern in which the win/lose notification effect is performed for each variation of five rotations.
(3-3) An effect pattern in which the number of hit/loss notifications in the effect is different from that of 5 rotations may be used. For example, it may be an effect pattern in which the battle effect as the winning/losing notification effect is executed only three times in five rotations. The final variation may be a result screen (a screen showing the result of the battle effect) and a resurrection effect (a effect that reverses the battle and wins if the battle is defeated).

Incidentally, the effect of the first rotation of the chance mode in which the pending charge effect is executed may be the following effect patterns (A) to (C).
(A) It may be an effect pattern in which the same effect as in the rush mode and the pending charge effect are executed. In the case of a hit, the win may be announced in the same manner as in the rush mode.
(B) It may be an effect pattern in which a first battle effect is executed as a chance effect. In the case of a hit, the win may be reported by winning in the first battle effect.
(C) It may be an effect pattern in which a special effect is executed as one variation independent of the subsequent variation. For example, in the case of winning, after the pending charge effect, the effect pattern is to display the content prompting the operation of the effect button 109 (for example, "press the button") and execute the object drop effect within one variation. may

The easy-to-enter state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is defined as an end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and an end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2. Specific game control means 270, when one of the end conditions is satisfied, to end the easy ball entry state and shift to the normal state.

The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the special variation pattern table to determine the variation patterns of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the easy entry state. The special variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that defines variation patterns for executing special effects (for example, rush effects and holding charge effects) in an easy-to-enter state, and is a variation pattern table with a limited number of references. be.

FIG. 93 shows the types of special variation pattern table. "Limited mode" is identification information of the special variation pattern table. "Presence or absence of time saving" indicates whether the table is referred to in the easy-to-enter state (o) or not (x). "Number of times" indicates the limit value of the number of times the special variation pattern table is referred to. "Special figure 1 subtraction" indicates whether the number of references is subtracted with the variation of special figure 1 (○) or not (×). "Toku-zu 2 subtraction" indicates whether to subtract the number of references with the variation of Toku-zu 2 (○) or not (×). As described above with reference to FIG. 73, the 13 variations in the rush mode and the first 1 variations in the chance mode correspond to the easy-to-enter state. Therefore, among the special variation pattern tables for limited modes 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 93, the special variation pattern tables for limited modes 7 to 9 are referred to in the easy-enter state.

The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 are limited mode 7 at the end of the special game accompanying the small hit V or the 7 matching pattern big hit, that is, at the timing of entering the rush mode (easy ball entry state). , 8 and 9 special variation pattern tables are set. The transition of the special variation pattern table is set to limited modes 7, 8, and 9 in order from the front.

As shown in FIG. 93, the number of times of reference of the special variation pattern table of the limited modes 7, 8, and 9 is subtracted by the special figure 2 variation, but is not subtracted by the special figure 1 variation. For example, the first variation pattern determination means 231 refers to the special variation pattern table of the limited modes 7, 8, and 9 in the easy-to-enter state, even if the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is determined, the limited modes 7 and 8 , 9 are not decremented. On the other hand, when the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the special variation pattern table of the limited modes 7, 8, and 9 in the easy-to-enter state, the limited modes 7, 8, The number of times of reference of the special fluctuation pattern table of 9 is subtracted.

As described above, the special figure 1 has a small hit probability of 0 or very low, while the special figure 2 has a high small hit probability (eg 1/7.7). The pachinko game machine 500 of the sixth embodiment refers to the number of times the special variation pattern table is referenced only in the special figure 2 variation during the easy entry state in which the main game is to acquire a small hit by the special figure 2 variation. Subtract and shift the special variation pattern table only with special figure 2 variation. As a result, even if an unintended special figure 1 change occurs during the easy-to-enter state (for example, the player leaves the seat with the special figure 1 pending at the end of the special game, and the special figure in the easy-to-enter state 1), it is possible to control so that the rush effect and the pending charge effect do not proceed.

A modification will be described. As mentioned above in the production pattern (3-3) of the chance mode, when it is assumed that the battle production is executed three times in the chance mode, the upper limit of the special figure 2 is set to 4 in the embodiment. , As a modification, if the upper limit of the reservation of the special figure 2 is 3 or 2, the production of the chance mode may be configured as follows.

If the upper limit of the special figure 2 is 3, the holding charge effect is executed with the first variation (the final variation of the time saving), and the first battle with the second variation (the first variation of the special figure 2 suspension) Effect may be executed, and the second battle effect may be executed with the third variation (second variation of special figure 2 reservation). Then, the third battle production, the result display, and the resurrection production may be executed in the fourth variation (the third variation of the special figure 2 reservation).
If the upper limit of the special figure 2 is 2, the first variation (the final variation of the time saving) executes the pending charge effect and the first battle effect, and the second variation (the first variation of the special figure 2 suspension ) to execute the second battle production, and the third variation (the second variation of the special figure 2 reservation) to execute the third battle production, the result display and the resurrection production.

There are the following merits by setting the number of pending upper limit of special figure 2 to less (less than 4).
(1) It is possible to increase the speed of paid balls per hour (in other words, the number of paid balls per unit time). In particular, when a battle effect is executed as in the chance mode, the ball output speed can be increased without changing the visual effect of the game.
(2) It is possible to reduce the possibility of a direct hit (big hit in special figure 2) by the big hit probability (1/319). In other words, since the possibility of a direct hit can be reduced by reducing the upper limit number of reservations, it is possible to suppress the possibility of a ball being released due to an unintended direct hit, and it is possible to design a ball to be released based on the original probability of a small hit. .

In the above modification, the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 is less than the embodiment (less than 4), but instead of or along with this, the number of times of saving time may be less than the embodiment, for example, rush mode may be less than 13 times. Even in this mode, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a direct hit (symbol big hit in special figure 2) due to the pattern big hit probability (1/319), suppress the possibility of unintended direct hits that cause balls to come out, and the original It is possible to design a ball to be released based on the small hit probability.

The specific game control means 270, when the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 14 times in the entering ball easy state (for example, when the 14th special figure 1 fluctuation ends), or the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 14 times In the case (for example, when the 14th special figure 2 variation is completed), the game state is shifted from the easy entry state to the normal state. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 determine the special variation pattern table for limited modes 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, and 2 (special Reset the fluctuation pattern table). The transition of the special variation pattern table is set to limited modes 3, 4, 5, 6, 1 and 2 in order from the front. When the ball easy state ends (for example, when the special figure 1 change ends when it reaches 14 times), even if the number of references to the special change pattern table remains, forcibly special for normal state Switch to the variation pattern table.

When referring to the special variation pattern table of limited modes 3, 4, 5, 6, that is, when the special figure 1 varies during the period of 4 variations after the easy entry state ends, the transition of the special variation pattern table is performed , The production stage will be an immediate stop prevention production. In addition, the chance effect is displayed at the time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the reference period of the special fluctuation pattern table of the subsequent limited modes 3, 4, 5 and 6. - 特許庁In this way, after the easy-entering state ends, the special symbol to be varied and the contents of the performance can be matched by proceeding with the performance with both the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation.

The present invention has been described above based on the sixth embodiment. The sixth embodiment is an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention.

A modified example of the decorative pattern 61 applicable to each of the above embodiments will be described.
The decorative pattern 61 of this modification includes a normal decorative pattern 802 displayed as a main pattern on the effect display device 60 at least when the special pattern is stopped, and a normal decorative pattern 802 when at least the normal decorative pattern 802 is difficult to see. A simple decorative pattern 804 displayed in a more simplified display form is included. The normal decorative pattern 802 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative pattern 804 . The normal decoration pattern 802 is composed of three patterns, which are stopped one by one in principle after the variable display. The simple decorative pattern 804 is also composed of three patterns, but the three are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple decorative symbol 804, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the normal decorative symbol 802 is displayed. The simple decorative design 804 corresponds to the alternative design and the simple design described in the underlying technology and examples described above.

It should be noted that during the execution of the super reach effect, the normal decorative pattern 802 may be displayed in a small size (alternative pattern may be displayed) in at least a part of the period, or the normal decorative pattern 802 may be hidden ( (Alternative patterns may be configured not to be displayed either), but in such a situation, the simple decorative pattern 804 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative pattern 804 is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device 60, and while the special patterns are fluctuating, the display is changed, and while the special patterns are stopped, the display is stopped. , three symbols are displayed in a variable and stationary manner, similar to the normal decoration pattern 802 . By providing this simple decorative pattern 804, the normal decorative pattern 802 can be made smaller or hidden (for example, when executing a super reach effect, the effect is performed by a movable accessory, and the center of the effect display device 60 is hidden, etc.), it is possible to notify that it is in the process of changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure has not been determined).

In other words, it can be said that this simple decorative design 804 is a design for guaranteeing display (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative design 802). In addition, when the simple decorative pattern 804 is variably displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variative display from the start of the special design to the stop display, that is, the normal decorative design 802 is temporarily stopped on the way. (For example, when a special normal decorative pattern 802 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo-continuous effect), the simple decorative pattern 804 is not temporarily stopped on the way. (Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 804 does not have a special pattern for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple decorative pattern 804 only performs a fixed stop), and further In order to prevent misunderstanding that it is a big hit when it is a losing variation, and not to detect that it is a big hit in advance when it is a big winning variation, whether it is a losing variation or a big winning variation On the other hand, variably displayed while maintaining the combination of symbols indicating the deviation (for example, when the types of simple decorative symbols 804 are “1” to “7”, “123” → “234” → “345” → “456 ”→“567”→“671”→“712”→“123”→ . . . ).

Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 start to fluctuate from the fixed and stopped state, the starting point of the pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) is 1 from the pattern combination at the time of fixed stop. However, if the simple decorative pattern 804 starts to fluctuate from the fixed and stopped state, the starting point of the pattern combination will be a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time of fixed stop. . For example, in a situation where both the number combinations relating to the normal decorative design 802 and the simple decorative design 804 are fixed and stopped at "243", when the normal decorative design 802 and the simple decorative design 804 start to fluctuate, the normal decorative design 802 The starting point of the pattern combination is "354", but the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 804 is fixed at "123". , the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 start to fluctuate, the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 802 is "444", but the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 804 is "444". The resulting symbol combination is fixed at "123".

In addition to this, the simple decorative pattern 804 has the following characteristics, and can be clearly differentiated from the normal decorative pattern 802 in role.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 802, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative pattern 804 for display collateral (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802). This is a situation in which the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 are fixed and stopped, and the normal decorative pattern 802 is in a ready-to-reach state immediately after forming a ready-to-reach state (a ready-to-reach state in a state not developed into a super ready-to-win effect), and a simple decoration. The pattern 804 is not limited to the situation in which the variable display is in progress. It is preferable to configure as follows.

(2) The display position of the normal decorative pattern 802 is either in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using different display positions depending on the mode, it is possible to realize the variety of effects in the normal decorative pattern 802 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 804 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position is redundant. It is preferable to avoid extensive development design. Details of the effect mode will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the normal decoration pattern 802 is either the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using a different display mode depending on whether or not, it is possible to realize the diversity of the production in the normal decorative pattern 802 according to the production mode. For example, in the first production mode, the normal decorative pattern 802 is composed only of the normal decorative patterns 802 of numbers (normal decorative patterns 802 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode The normal decorative pattern 802 is composed by combining the normal decorative pattern 802 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 802 of the ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., " 7"+"character g" (802). On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 804 only has to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, only the same display mode, For example, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 804 only with the normal decorative pattern 802 of numbers, and to avoid unnecessary development and design.

(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 802 varies (moves, small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether normal reach is in progress, super reach performance is in progress, etc.). By doing so, the production of the normal decorative pattern 802 can be diversified. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 804 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802. Therefore, the display area of the simple decorative pattern 804 is not changed (does not move, does not become a small pattern). It is preferable to forgo development design.

(5) The normal decorative pattern 802 is variable in speed, such as low speed, medium speed, high speed, and super high speed, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, is it at the start of the fluctuation, is it in the middle of the fluctuation, is it near the end of the fluctuation, etc.)? By doing so, the production of the normal decorative pattern 802 can be diversified. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 804 only has to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802, so the variable speed of the simple decorative pattern 804 is not made variable, or the number of variable stages is reduced (for example, low speed and high speed only) to avoid unnecessary development and design. As for the direction of variation, the normal decorative pattern 802 allows not only variation from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows variation in multiple directions). , preferably from top to bottom only.

(6) The normal decorative pattern 802 is a temporary stop (temporary stop during the fluctuation of the special pattern) before the final stop (stop at the timing when the special pattern stops). At that time, a specific pattern that is a normal decorative pattern 802 other than numbers (for example, a normal decorative pattern 802 written with the word "super" that foretells development to a super ready-to-win effect) is temporarily stopped. Thus, the effect of the normal decorative pattern 802 and other effects can be associated with each other. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 804 only has to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 804 is neither temporarily stopped nor the specific pattern is temporarily stopped. It is preferable to avoid extensive development design.

(7) The normal decoration pattern 802 overlaps the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effects, step-up notice effects, etc.), that is, is superimposed. Such a superimposed display is permitted in order to use the area on the effect display device 60 as much as possible to perform a powerful effect. In order to achieve this, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 804 so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) the display area of the other notice effect. However, regarding the relationship with special forewarning effects that inevitably overlap (for example, a group forewarning effect displayed on the entire effect display device 60, a background forecasting effect, etc.), the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 804 is It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the special notice effect (set so that the simple decorative pattern 804 is displayed in front of the special notice effect). In addition, a right hitting notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, a right hitting notification image dedicated to the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) ), it is desirable that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 804 and the display area of the right-handed informing image be designed so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed). . However, when the display area of the normal decorative pattern 802 is moved or expanded, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 802 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimposed). In that case, the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 802 is set lower than the display priority of the right-handed informing image (the normal decorative pattern 802 is set to be displayed behind the right-handed informing image). is preferred.

(8) During the special game, the normal decoration pattern 802 may be displayed not in combination but only one. For example, when the special game is executed after "777" is fixed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and when the special game is executed after "222" is fixed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize during the special game which normal decorative pattern 802 has resulted in a big hit. As a modification, only the normal decoration symbols 802 corresponding to the high-advantage jackpot (for example, "333", "555", "777" indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) are in the special game. may be displayed in In this way, the display area for displaying one normal decorative pattern 802 displayed during the special game includes the other display areas during the special game, namely, the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize. It is desirable to configure such that it does not overlap with the number-of-balls display area, that is, it is not superimposed (however, it may be superimposed with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has higher display priority). In addition, the simple decorative pattern 804 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game. , it can be configured so that it does not overlap, that is, it does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the winning ball acquisition display area, and the accumulated winning ball number display area. Desirably, it is desirable not to highlight or superimpose.

(9) In the normal decorative pattern 802, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), predetermined operations are performed at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after reach establishment, during temporary stop, etc. (The motions in each situation may be referred to as the fluctuation start motion, the temporary stop motion, the ready-to-reach establishment motion, and the shaking motion). For example, when it becomes non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), when the fluctuation starts, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right in the normal decorative pattern 802 All the symbols start to expand after performing an operation, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "6" temporarily stops and shakes After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action continues after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, After performing a bouncing action, "2" is temporarily stopped and shakes for a little while, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are finished. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 804 does not perform any action.

Also, in the case of a normal reach (when the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 802 After performing an operation that expands all of them, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" temporarily stops and then shakes. Continue, after that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing action, then continue the swinging action after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is a reach The pattern and right pattern rotate and continue the shaking motion again. After that, when the middle pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and shakes for a while. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left design, the middle design, and the right design are finished (the middle design does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 804 does not perform any action.

Also, when developing into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative pattern 802 and the simple decorative pattern 804 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern and the middle pattern in the normal decorative pattern 802 , All the right symbols will expand and start to change, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" will temporarily stop Continuing the swinging motion, and then, when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swinging motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then notify that it is a reach. For this reason, the left and right symbols rotate and continue to swing again, and then the middle pattern fluctuates while the left and right The pattern is magnified and fluctuates from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that previously did not overlap or had a low overlap rate overlap or have a high overlap rate), After that, in order to execute the super reach effect, the background is changed from the normal background to the reach background, and when the result of the failure is notified in the super reach effect, the reach background is changed to the normal background, and after the transition, the left The pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern will continue to swing for a predetermined time, and then at the fixed stop timing, all the left, middle, and right patterns will end (the middle pattern will also bounce and rotate). do not have). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 804 does not perform any action.

By configuring in this way, the normal decorative pattern 802 can be produced with diversity, while the simple decorative pattern 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 802, so it is simple. It is preferable that the decorative pattern 804 is configured so that it does not perform any particular action, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. Also, even during the period from when the fluctuation is stopped until the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 802 performs a swinging motion after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative symbol 804 does not operate at all. By configuring in this way, it is possible to arouse the desire to play even during game standby (while the symbols are stopped), and since the simple decorative symbol 804 does not swing, it is possible to recognize that the game is in standby. Notification can be guaranteed.

In addition, when the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 802 is hidden, but the display of the simple decorative pattern 804 is preferably continued. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the display of what symbols are stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demonstration effect screen. However, since the game is not being played during the standby demonstration effect, the simple decoration pattern 804 may also be hidden. In addition, among the normal decoration patterns 802, a specific pattern (for example, a medium pattern "7") may be configured so as not to perform a predetermined action or to have a lower probability of performing it than other patterns. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-described temporary stop motion (jumping motion) (especially for the middle symbol "7" after the ready-to-win state is established). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern.

In addition, the normal decorative pattern 802 is formed by combining the normal decorative pattern 802 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 802 of the ally character (“1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . ). , "7"+"character g" (802), both the normal decorative symbols 802 of the numbers and the normal decorative symbols 802 of the ally characters perform the shaking motion. is the swing width (swing distance). Vibrational motion may be realized by varying the width), and in such a configuration, the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 802 of the number is set to be greater than the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 802 of the ally character. may be made smaller, or the normal decorative patterns 802 of the numbers may not swing and only the normal decorative patterns 802 of the ally characters may swing.

Modifications relating to the production mode and pseudo-continuous variation production (also referred to as “pseudo-continuous production”) applicable to each of the above embodiments will now be described.
In this modified example, there are a plurality of types of production modes, and for each production mode, it is determined which type of production can be executed among the effects such as the symbol variation production and the advance notice production.
Specifically, the effect mode and the effect contents executed in the effect mode will be described. (or variation pattern selection state) or according to the number of times of variation display of special symbols, etc., one of a plurality of types of production modes is set alternatively, and the variation production according to the set production mode is executed be done. Basically, when the game state is the normal state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time saving state, the "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is the variable state, the "rush mode" is set. mode is set. When one of the production modes is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background displayed on the back of the decorative pattern 61) is displayed on the screen as a production (variable production) that suggests that the production mode is being stayed. image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 108 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages, "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage", and it is possible to predict that 20 or more fluctuations will pass or that the super reach effect will be missed. Triggered by "Stage A" to "Stage B", "Stage B" to "Stage C", "Stage C" to "Stage A" If you win the execution (transition) of, move from the stage you are currently staying to the "read-ahead stage". Stage" will display the double eyes, and if it is off, other than double eyes will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before the transition to the "look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage" (both the stage BGM of "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM of "Rush Mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (end ), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, and in the "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is continued even if the fluctuation stops (fixed stop) due to non-reach. The stage BGM is continuously output to the next variation without interruption (without ending) (“Chance Mode” and “Rush Mode” are similarly configured to output continuously).

Here, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetch stage". (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the characters "NEXT") as a medium symbol is variably displayed near a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped, the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-change display (re-change after the temporary stop), or it switches to a specific BGM different from before the re-change display. After that, when developing into a Super Reach effect in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) changes to the background image of the Super Reach effect. (At the same time, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect), the stage BGM is not output during the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is executed by displaying the effect indicating the failure in the super reach effect. In the changed display, the background image of each stage is switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the Super Reach production). Even if an image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, nor is the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance (the specific BGM which is silent or different from the BGM dedicated to the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation "Stage B", "Stage C”, even if it is a “look-ahead stage” (even if it is not “stage A”), if it is lost via the super reach effect, the stage will be before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) The BGM is interrupted, and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next variation.

In addition, in the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed (for example, it is a continuation line notice, and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-fluctuation display) will be performed thereafter, but this special effect is performed in "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing both stages in which the possibility of pseudo-continuous effects being executed can be detected in advance and stages in which the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, effects that keep the player from getting bored are realized. are doing. In "stage A", a special effect with character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special effect with character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect that confirms that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after just occurring (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Furthermore, it is a different effect from a special effect and a pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and it is confirmed that the pseudo-continuous effect will not be executed after that, and will develop into a super ready-to-win effect. (For example, an effect is also provided in which the line "Development is confirmed!" is always displayed when the character D appears). This pseudo continuous fixed effect and development fixed effect can be executed in any of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage".

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, one or more of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect are displayed in combination, so that the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for super reach production. It should be noted that during a single variable display, all of the special effects, the pseudo-consecutive fixed effects, and the development fixed effects may be executed. ) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo continuous fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development fixed effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special performance is executed in the first or second time of (1) or (2), the pseudo-continuous fixed performance may be further executed during the certain re-variation display after the special performance is executed during the re-variation display.

The "random number" used in this specification or claims does not have to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense. Pseudo-random numbers such as software random numbers using an algorithm may be used. Alternatively, a combination of hardware random numbers and software random numbers, for example, a plus random number system in which the initial value is changed each time the counter completes one cycle may be used.

When referring to a "table" or "criterion (selection criteria)" in this specification or claims, strictly speaking, the correspondence relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option not only refers to data defined in a table structure, but also broadly includes the case of realizing a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter as such a corresponding relationship. Inclusive of them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "criteria (selection criteria)". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine that pays out game balls (prize balls) as a profit based on incoming balls is exemplified.・The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine that manages the awarding of prize balls. Such an enclosed type pachinko machine typically circulates a predetermined number of game balls in the machine, performs a game with the circulating game balls, and can shoot game balls instead of paying out prize balls. By increasing the number of times, a profit is given to the player. For example, a ball circulation means that receives game balls that have rolled in the game area and sends them back to the game area without discharging them outside the game machine to circulate them within the game machine; , and number of balls managing means for managing the number of balls on hand based on the number of paid-out prize balls, and ball-on-hand display means for displaying the managed number of balls on hand.

Any combination of the above-described examples and modifications is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. A new embodiment resulting from the combination has the effects of each combined embodiment and modified example. It should also be understood by those skilled in the art that the functions to be fulfilled by each constituent element described in the claims are realized by each constituent element shown in the embodiments and modified examples singly or in conjunction with each other.

The techniques described in the above-described first embodiment and modification can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a predetermined win in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time set to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which a plurality of game balls are shot, before A pinball game machine that opens the entry ball variation mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy ball entry state ends when one pattern variation triggered by the ball entering the second starting port ends, and
In the easy-to-enter state, one pattern variation time triggered by the ball entering the second starting port is such that when the operation lottery is continuously executed, at least the normal pattern wins twice or more. The pinball game machine according to aspect 1-1, which is set for a possible time or more.

[Aspect 1-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
Normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, there is a normal state, and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a predetermined win in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time set to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which a plurality of game balls are shot, before Open the input ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the opening time of the incoming ball variation mechanism reaches the predetermined time, or when the number of incoming balls into the second starting port is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of pending balls of the second lottery value A pinball game machine that terminates the opening of the ball entry variation mechanism when the number is reached.

[Aspect 1-3]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
an effect control means for displaying the effect contents on a predetermined effect display device;
with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a predetermined win in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time set to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which a plurality of game balls are shot, before Open the input ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means has a content that encourages the shooting of a game ball aimed at the second start port when the ball entry variation mechanism is opened in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. displaying a special effect, and during the display of the special effect, shrinking and displaying a variable effect of decorative patterns indicating a result of a win/loss determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole;
In the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port is fixed to a time shorter than the average fluctuation time in the normal game in the normal state. ,
The effect control means causes the special effect to be displayed in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and during the display of the special effect, the variation of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the winning/failure determination based on the entry into the first starting port. A pinball game machine that hides the production.

[Aspect 1-4]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
an effect control means for displaying the effect contents on a predetermined effect display device;
with
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of pattern variations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port ends, and
The performance control means displays a special performance prompting the shooting of a game ball aimed at the second start hole during the final pattern variation in the ball-entering easy state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
an effect control means for displaying the effect contents on a predetermined effect display device;
with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a predetermined win in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time set to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which a plurality of game balls are shot, before Open the input ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means has a content that encourages the shooting of a game ball aimed at the second start port when the ball entry variation mechanism is opened in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Display a special effect,
The effect control means determines that the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port or the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port is a predetermined waiting demo transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the normal pattern lottery value for the operation lottery acquired with the entry of the ball into the operation port as an upper limit, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol showing the result of the operation lottery up to a predetermined number hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is a pinball game machine set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal pattern when the normal pattern lottery value is reserved to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
an effect control means for displaying the effect contents on a predetermined effect display device;
with
The operation control means, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a predetermined win in the normal game in the normal state, a predetermined time set to be equal to or longer than the time interval at which a plurality of game balls are shot, before Open the input ball fluctuation mechanism,
The effect control means has a content that encourages the shooting of a game ball aimed at the second start port when the ball entry variation mechanism is opened in accordance with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Display a special effect,
The effect control means is configured such that the entry of a game ball into one of a plurality of winning holes or ball entry holes provided in the game area is not detected for a predetermined standby demonstration transition time, and the special symbol is If it is not fluctuating, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The holding control means, the normal pattern lottery value for the operation lottery acquired with the entry of the ball into the operation port as an upper limit, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol showing the result of the operation lottery up to a predetermined number hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is a pinball game machine set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal pattern when the normal pattern lottery value is reserved to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
A special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening when the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game;
an operation port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
actuation lottery means for executing an actuation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball entry variation mechanism when the ball enters the actuation opening;
normal symbol display control means for variably displaying normal symbols for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
an operation control means for opening the ball entry variation mechanism when the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win;
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state and at least the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port when the winning probability of at least the operation lottery is higher than the normal state. has an easy-to-enter state that is higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state ,
an effect control means for displaying the effect contents on a predetermined effect display device;
with
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of pattern variations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port ends, and
The effect control means ends with a result that the change triggered by the end of the easy-ball-entering state or the change based on the second lottery value remaining in the holding control means after the end of the easy-ball-entering state is off. in the case, causing the effect display device to display the effect related to the ball output up to that point,
The effect control means, when the special symbol indicating the result of the determination based on the entry of the ball into the first starting hole is fluctuating, displays the effect related to the ball output in a manner with higher visibility than the variable effect. ball game machine.

The techniques described in the above-described second embodiment and modifications can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
an opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the big prize opening;
with
The big winning hole has an opening/closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the big winning hole, and when the big winning hole is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member,
Both the unit game in the special game and the small winning game end when the number of balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number,
The opening time of the big winning hole in the small winning game is set to a short time in which the game ball rolling on the opening and closing member can enter the big winning hole,
The open/close control means is a pinball game machine capable of repeating opening of the big winning opening for a short period of time equal to or more than the predetermined number in the small winning game.
According to this configuration, in the machine equipped with the small winning development big winning, by using the big winning opening common to the big winning and the small winning, it is possible to secure a wide board area where the production can be executed, and to enhance the interest of the production. can. In addition, in the small winning game, it is possible to acquire prize balls equivalent to those in one round during the big winning, and it is easy for the player to have a feeling that the ball will be released sufficiently.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The small winning game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
The performance determining means displays images corresponding to the predetermined number during the small winning game, and changes the image according to the ball entering the big winning opening during the small winning game.
According to this configuration, in the machine equipped with a small winning development jackpot, it is suggested to the player that a relatively large number of balls can be entered into the big winning opening during the small winning game (in other words, the possibility of winning the ball), A player can be urged to shoot during a small winning game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The small winning game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
When the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means, after the end of the small winning game, according to the type of symbol indicating the small winning, Displaying one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects suggesting a profit that the player can obtain,
During the small winning game, the performance determining means displays an image indicating the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested in a subsequent suggesting performance, and according to the entry of the ball into the big winning opening during the small winning game. A pinball machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, in the machine equipped with a small winning development big winning, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by the subsequent suggestive effect by entering the ball into the big winning opening during the small winning game. It is possible to encourage shooting during a small winning game.

[Aspect 2-3]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game accompanied by the operation of the special electric role and the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. If so, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and which involves the operation of the special electric role and the opening of the big winning opening;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The small winning game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
When the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game passes through the specific area, the performance determining means displays a performance notifying that fact, and changes from the small winning game to the special game. display an image showing the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory has been operated over the
The performance determining means displays, as the image, an image indicating that the special electric accessory is operated for the first time during the small winning game.
According to this configuration, an image indicating "first round" and the like is displayed even during the small winning game, that is, a series of count display is performed from the small winning game to the special game. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the same number of balls can be obtained in one round of the special game in the small winning game, and the player can be urged to shoot during the small winning game.

[Aspect 2-4]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The small winning game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game,
The type of profit that a player can obtain in relation to the special game executed when the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the end of the special game At least one of the types of profit that a player can obtain in relation to a game differs according to the type of symbol indicating a small win,
When the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means, after the final opening of the big winning hole in the small winning game is completed, This pinball game machine displays an effect suggesting the kind of profit that a player can obtain in accordance with the kind of pattern showing a small win until the first opening of the big winning slot in the special game.
According to this configuration, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the specific area, the game ball is displayed in the small winning game by displaying an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain according to the small winning pattern. When does not pass through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the content of the performance from becoming inconsistent with the actual profit type. In addition, in the small winning game, vibration detection may be performed for fraud prevention, but according to the above configuration, since the timing of vibration detection is removed and the suggestive effect is performed, vibration such as the effect of making the player press a button is performed. Suggestive production of the resulting mode is also possible.

[Aspect 2-5]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the second starting port, regardless of whether or not the variable display of symbols based on the lottery value obtained with the entry of the ball is started immediately, the entry of the ball is triggered. When the result of the success/failure determination based on the selected lottery value is executed is a small hit, a pre-determination capable of notifying the effect determination means of the advance determination information indicating that the variation corresponding to the ball entry will be a small win determination means;
with
The small winning game ends when the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses,
The effect determining means is a case where a game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game passes through the specific area, and the prior determination information indicates that the lottery value for the small winning is 1. This pinball game machine is capable of executing performance for predicting the occurrence of a small win one or more times between the end of a special game and the start of a normal game when indicating that one or more are reserved.
According to this configuration, it is possible to make a player aware that there is a high possibility of obtaining a large profit by suggesting that a small winning development big win can additionally be acquired in a machine equipped with a small winning development big winning. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

The techniques described in the above-described third embodiment and modifications can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 3-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
an effect control means capable of executing an advantageous notification effect for informing the player that a transition to a state advantageous to the player is scheduled;
with
In the special game, when the advantageous notification effect is executed before the start of the end demonstration, the effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value stored in the storage means in the end demonstration. However, when the advantageous notification performance is not executed before the start of the end demonstration, execution of the setting suggesting performance is restricted in the end demonstration.
Until now, setting suggestion production was not common in pinball game machines. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the special game end demonstration, the setting suggestion effect suggests or informs that the transition to an advantageous state (for example, the probability fluctuation state or the pending inner renso) is scheduled. There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that it does. According to the above-mentioned pinball game machine, since the setting suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the advantageous notification effect has been executed, it is easy to prevent the player from misrecognising the above, and the player's expectations are lost. It becomes easier to prevent
It should be noted that "restricting the execution of the setting suggestion effect" includes not being displayed at all in the effect, the display possibility is significantly reduced, and preventing the lottery of the setting suggestion effect in the first place, This includes canceling the performance lottery result that results in the execution of the set suggestion performance that has been determined. The same applies to other aspects.

[Aspect 3-2]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition to a special game more advantageous to the player than to a normal game can be made with a predetermined game operation as a trigger;
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the transition to the special game is possible;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
an effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means;
with
The effect control means associates and stores a plurality of setting suggesting effects with a plurality of priorities, and after executing the setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first priority, sets a second priority lower than the first priority. A game machine that restricts execution of setting suggestion performance corresponding to priority.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, or to suppress the decline in the interest in the game, according to the correspondence relationship between the type of setting suggestion effect and the priority. For example, a higher priority may be given to a setting suggestion effect with a narrower range of suggested setting values. In this case, the range of setting values suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect becomes wider than the range of setting values previously suggested, which impairs the player's expectation (expectation that the setting value can be specified). You can prevent it from being lost. Also, a higher priority may be given to a setting suggestion effect with a higher suggested set value. In this case, it is possible to prevent the set value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect from becoming lower than the previously suggested set value, thereby preventing the player's sense of expectation from being spoiled.

[Aspect 3-3]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
a pattern display device for displaying variations in patterns for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big win is stopped and displayed, or the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small win game further passes through a specific area provided inside. special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
an effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value stored in the storage means;
with
When the special game ends, the effect control means executes the end demonstration effect of the special game for a first time, and when the small winning game ends while the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the small a winning game ending demonstration performance is executed for a second time period shorter than the first time period;
The effect control means is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the special game, but limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration effect of the small win game.
The execution time of the end demonstration performance of the small winning game is short, and it is difficult to secure the time for the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process and the display process which are substantially meaningless by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the end demonstration of the small winning game.

[Aspect 3-4-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
holding control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the winning/failing determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed;
production control means for executing production;
When a ball enters the starting hole, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is started immediately, a prior determination means capable of notifying the performance control means of prior determination information indicating that, when the result of a winning determination based on a lottery value is a big hit, the variation corresponding to the ball entry will result in a big win;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
with
According to the prior determination information, the effect control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in the future symbol variation, and the symbol variation of a plurality of times until the future symbol variation. is executable over
The suggestive effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed so that the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game to occur differs depending on the effect mode of the suggestive effect,
The degree of expectation suggested by the production mode of the suggested production in the later pattern fluctuation among the plurality of pattern fluctuations is equal to or higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the production mode of the suggested production in the previous pattern fluctuation. designed and
A pinball game machine in which a probability that the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode differs according to the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this pinball game machine, by making the specific effect mode in the suggestive effect by the reserved look ahead suggest the set value, the player can use the suggestive effect as suggesting a big win and suggesting the set value. can be presented to the player, further increasing the expectation of the player and the interest of the game

[Aspect 3-4-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed;
Effect control means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in this pattern change,
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
with
The suggestive effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed so that the degree of expectation for transition to the special game differs according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect,
A pinball game machine in which the probability that the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode differs according to the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to newly provide the game property of guessing the setting according to the appearance frequency of each of the plurality of performance modes that the suggestive performance can take.

The techniques described in the above-described fourth embodiment and modifications can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 4-1-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition to a special game more advantageous to the player than to a normal game can be made with a predetermined game operation as a trigger;
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the transition to the special game is possible;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
An effect control means capable of executing a normal effect matching the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period when the special game ends during the advantageous period during which a game state advantageous to the player continues. and,
with
When the special game ends during the advantageous period, the effect control means stores, with a predetermined probability, an effect having contents inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period instead of the normal effect. A game machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value stored in means.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the normal effect of the content matching the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and the content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. By making it possible to selectively execute setting suggestion effects, even if the game machine is set at low settings, normal effects with contents equivalent to those at high settings can be executed, which leads to promotion of gaming motivation. can.

[Aspect 4-1-2]
Aspect 4- wherein the probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value stored in the storage means may vary according to the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to 1-1.
According to this game machine, the interest in the game during the advantageous period can be further enhanced by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period. Further, for example, when the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value increases as the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period increases, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion rendering can be provided.

[Aspect 4-1-3]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition to a special game more advantageous to the player than to a normal game can be made with a predetermined game operation as a trigger;
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the transition to the special game is possible;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
An effect control means capable of executing a normal effect matching the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period when the special game ends during the advantageous period during which a game state advantageous to the player continues. and,
with
The effect control means further executes, instead of the normal effect, a effect having contents inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value stored in the storage means. is possible and
When the special game ends in the advantageous period, either the normal performance or the setting suggestion performance can be executed with a predetermined probability, and either the normal performance or the setting suggestion performance is executed. 2, wherein the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect is increased according to the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period.
According to this game machine, when the special game ends during the advantageous period, the special game is won during the advantageous period by increasing the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance according to the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. It is possible to provide setting suggestion production as a privilege to.

[Aspect 4-2-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not a transition to a special game more advantageous to the player than to a normal game can be made with a predetermined game operation as a trigger;
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery by the lottery means indicating that the transition to the special game is possible;
setting change means for changing to one of a plurality of settings that may differ in game advantage;
a storage means for storing the setting values set by the setting change means;
an effect control means capable of executing a normal effect matching the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period when an advantageous period, which is a period in which a game state advantageous to the player continues, is terminated;
with
When the advantageous period ends, the effect control means stores in the storage means, at a predetermined probability, not the normal effect, but an effect that is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period. A game machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.
According to this game machine, when the advantageous period ends, a normal effect matching the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period and a setting-suggesting effect not matching the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period. can be selectively executed, even if the game machine is set at a low setting, a normal performance with contents equivalent to those at the time of the high setting can be executed, which leads to promotion of game motivation.

[Aspect 4-2-2]
Aspect 4- wherein the probability that the effect control means executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the setting value stored in the storage means may vary according to the number of times the special game is executed during the advantageous period. The game machine described in 2-1.
According to this game machine, the interest in the game during the advantageous period can be further enhanced by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period. Further, for example, when the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value increases as the number of executions of the special game during the advantageous period increases, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. A setting suggestion rendering can be provided.

[Aspect 5-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port is higher than in the normal state, Specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to an easy-to-enter state when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The effect determination means displays a special effect having contents that are continuous over one or more symbol variations for a predetermined period including the easy-to-enter state,
The effect determination means displays a first object and a second object for prompting the shooting of a game ball aimed at the second starting hole in the easy-ball-entering state,
the size of the second object is larger than the size of the first object;
The content of the first object does not change regardless of the number of pending second lottery values,
A pinball game machine characterized in that the presence or absence of display of content suggesting the reserved number of the second object is switched according to the reserved number of the second lottery value.
According to this pinball game machine, the first object does not change the content of prompting the player to shoot the game ball aimed at the second starting hole during the easy-ball-entering state, so that the player can be informed of the optimum shooting direction of the game ball. You can keep presenting. On the other hand, the second object, which is larger in size than the first object and tends to attract the player's attention, changes whether or not to display content suggesting the number of pending items according to the number of pending items of the second lottery value, so that during the special effect It is possible to make it difficult to understand that one or more pattern variations are being executed, and to present the special performance more effectively.

[Aspect 5-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a large winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, opened according to the result of the winning/failure determination, and serving as a trigger for awarding a profit to a player when a game ball enters the game;
a small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a small-hit is stopped and displayed;
When the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game further passes through a specific area provided inside it, it is in a state more advantageous to the player than in the normal game, and the opening of the big winning hole is made. A special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied,
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the second starting port, regardless of whether or not the variable display of symbols based on the lottery value obtained with the entry of the ball is started immediately, the entry of the ball is triggered. a pre-determining means capable of notifying the effect determining means of pre-determination information indicating that a win is achieved in the variation corresponding to the entered ball when the result is a hit when the win/loss determination is executed based on the second lottery value obtained. determination means;
with
When the preliminary determination information indicates that the lottery value for a small win is reserved, the effect determination means performs an advantageous A predetermined effect suggesting the transition to the advantageous state is displayed, and the variable display of symbols based on the withheld lottery value prior to the lottery value for the small win is performed. A pinball game machine characterized by continuing the display of the object.
According to this pinball game machine, after displaying an effect that suggests a small hit (transition to an advantageous state) in the hold by so-called look-ahead, the fluctuation of the off hold is stopped until the small hit is reached ( The misrecognition by the player that there is no small hit can be prevented by the "outside display".

[Aspect 5-3]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
The effect determination means shifts to a state in which a special effect can be displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The special effect is a effect in which a plurality of types of individual effects are displayed in a predetermined order over multiple symbol changes,
When the final individual performance of the special performance is displayed, the performance determination means prevents the special performance from being displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied again, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied again, the special performance. A pinball game machine characterized by shifting to a displayable state again.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to realize control to show a special effect only once when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the frequent appearance of game machine information (description of tie-up works, etc.) and character introduction, which are not related to the degree of expectation for a big hit, as a special effect may annoy the player. According to the present invention, such an effect unrelated to the degree of expectation for a big win can be shown only once upon fulfillment of a predetermined condition.

[Aspect 5-4]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the effect determination means shifts to a state in which a special effect performed over a plurality of symbol changes can be displayed,
After the transition to a state in which the special effect can be displayed, the effect determining means prevents display of at least a part of the other effect until a predetermined end condition of the special effect is satisfied. ball game machine.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to intensively present the player with a special effect over a plurality of symbol changes when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the special effect may be game machine information (description of a tie-up work, etc.) or character introduction. can.

[Aspect 5-5-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the first starting hole;
a second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained with the ball entering the second starting hole as a trigger;
a first display control means for variably displaying a first special symbol indicating the result of the first suitability determination;
a second display control means for variably displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second propriety determination;
A holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the success/failure determination;
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the first propriety determination is a hit, and the second special symbol is the result of the second propriety determination a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display is made in a manner indicating a win;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display a variable effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol;
with
When the second lottery value is suspended by the suspension control means, the first display control means suspends the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure determination, while the second display control means starts symbol variation display corresponding to the second success/failure determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is suspended by the suspension control means,
A special effect period in which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for holding the second lottery value is determined,
When the number of reserved second lottery values is a predetermined value at the start of the variable display of the second special symbols in the special effect period, the effect determination means determines that the number of reserved second lottery values is the predetermined value. A pinball game machine characterized in that the production pattern of the special production is determined by using a production pattern determination standard different from that in the case of no.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific variation in a period during which a special effect is executed (special effect period). For example, in the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is started when the number of reserved second lottery values is 0 during the special performance period, the performance according to the predetermined performance pattern is displayed. can be done.
[Aspect 5-5-2]
Further comprising a specific game control means,
The second starting port has a ball entry variation mechanism that can be displaced so that the game ball entry changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state,
The specific game control means, as a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, a normal state, and the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port is higher than the normal state. and an easy state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game is shifted to the easy-enter state,
The pinball game machine according to aspect 5-5-1, wherein the special effect period is a predetermined game period of the normal state.
According to this aspect, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific variation in the normal state, which is not the easy-to-enter state. As a result, even in the normal state, it becomes easier to increase the interest in the game.

[Aspect 5-6]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the first starting hole;
a second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained with the ball entering the second starting hole as a trigger;
a first display control means for variably displaying a first special symbol indicating the result of the first suitability determination;
a second display control means for variably displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second propriety determination;
A holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the success/failure determination;
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the first propriety determination is a hit, and the second special symbol is the result of the second propriety determination a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display is made in a manner indicating a win;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
effect determination means for causing the effect display device to display a variable effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol;
with
When the second lottery value is suspended by the suspension control means, the first display control means suspends the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure determination, while the second display control means starts symbol variation display corresponding to the second success/failure determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is suspended by the suspension control means,
A special effect period in which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for holding the second lottery value is determined,
The effect determining means, when the variable display of the second special symbols in the special effect period is started, the number of pending second lottery values is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined permission condition is satisfied, the second lottery value is satisfied. 2. A pinball game machine characterized in that the performance pattern of the special performance is determined by using a performance pattern determination standard different from that when the number of pending lottery values is not the predetermined value.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific variation during a period during which a special effect is executed (special effect period). Further, by judging whether or not the permission condition is satisfied, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern at the timing intended by the designer even in an irregular situation.

[Aspect 6-1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole is higher than in the normal state,
The effect determination means displays an object suggesting a pending number of the second lottery value in the easy-to-enter state,
The effect determining means causes the object to be displayed in a predetermined mode as an initial display mode of the object regardless of the actual reserved number of the second lottery value, and from the state in which the object is displayed in the predetermined mode, the A pinball game machine characterized by displaying the object in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode when the predetermined number of balls are entered into the second start opening.
When an object suggesting the number of reserved second lottery values is initially displayed in a manner corresponding to the actual number of reserved second lottery values, how many more balls are allowed to enter the second starting hole for the player? Sometimes it can be hard to know what to do. According to the configuration of the present pinball game machine, by setting the initial display mode of the object to a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of reserved objects, the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value is set so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player. Makes it easier to accumulate to the upper limit. Further, even if the number of reserved second lottery values has reached the upper limit, by encouraging the shooting of game balls, the total number of outs can be increased and the base of the gaming machine can be lowered.

[Aspect 6-2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
According to the result of the success/failure determination based on the first lottery value, the variation pattern of the first special symbol for indicating the result is determined, and the result is determined according to the result of the success/failure determination based on the second lottery value. Variation pattern determination means for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol for showing;
a symbol display device in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed according to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a mode indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, a special game for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. a control means;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole is higher than in the normal state,
The easy-to-enter state is defined by an end condition based on the number of times of variation of the first special symbol and an end condition based on the number of times of variation of the second special symbol, and ends when either end condition is satisfied. and
The variation pattern determining means refers to a special standard, which is a standard that defines a variation pattern for executing a special effect in the easy-to-enter state and is a standard for which the number of times of reference is limited, to determine the first Determining the variation pattern of the special design and the second special design,
A pinball game machine characterized in that the number of times the special reference is referred to is subtracted with the variation of the second special symbol, but is not subtracted with the variation of the first special symbol.
According to this pinball game machine, it is possible to shift the special reference only by the variation of the second special symbol in the ball-entering easy state. As a result, even if the first special symbol is changed unintentionally by the designer and the player (for example, the player leaves the seat while the first lottery value is reserved at the end of the big win, and the ball is in the easy-to-enter state. (Even in a situation where the first special symbol is changed during the second game), the special performance can be controlled so as not to proceed, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

[Aspect 6-3]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
holding control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the winning/failing determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the starting hole, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is started immediately, a prior determination means capable of notifying the effect determination means of prior determination information indicating that, when the result of a winning determination based on a lottery value is a win, the change corresponding to the ball entering the ball will result in a win;
with
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole is higher than in the normal state,
The effect determination means displays an object indicating the degree of expectation that a win exists among the reserved lottery values according to the prior determination information,
The effect determination means changes the mode of the object so as to indicate a higher degree of expectation as the number of balls entered into the starting hole in the easy-ball-entering state increases according to a predetermined standard. is possible and
The standard includes a rule that the object can change its form when the number of balls entering the starting port in excess of the predetermined number in the easy-ball-entering state exceeds the maximum number assumed in design. A pinball game machine characterized by
According to this pinball game machine, when the number of over winnings to the starting port exceeds the maximum number assumed in the design due to the clogging of game balls (so-called grapes) in the game area, etc. By using a standard that can change, it is possible to realize an effect that is usually difficult to see. In addition, even if an unforeseen situation (for example, grapes) that is undesirable for the player occurs, there is a possibility that an effect that is normally difficult to see can be seen, so the player's stress and dissatisfaction can be reduced.

[Aspect 6-4]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
holding control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the winning/failing determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the starting hole, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is started immediately, a prior determination means capable of notifying the effect determination means of prior determination information indicating that, when the result of a winning determination based on a lottery value is a win, the change corresponding to the ball entering the ball will result in a win;
with
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the starting hole is higher than in the normal state,
The effect determination means displays an object indicating the degree of expectation that a win exists among the reserved lottery values according to the prior determination information,
The effect determination means changes the mode of the object so as to indicate a higher degree of expectation as the number of balls entered into the starting hole in the easy-ball-entering state increases according to a predetermined standard. is possible and
Let N be the open/close time of the ball entry variation mechanism in the easy ball entry state, let M be the number of balls that can be shot in N hours, and let O be the opening ratio of the ball entry variation mechanism in the easy ball entry state, The standard is defined as a stipulation that the state of the object can be changed when the number of balls entering the starting port exceeds the predetermined number (M×O−the predetermined number) in the easy-ball-entering state. A pinball game machine characterized by comprising:
According to this pinball game machine, when the number of over winnings to the starting port exceeds the maximum number assumed in the design due to the clogging of game balls (so-called grapes) in the game area, etc. By using a standard that can change, it is possible to realize an effect that is usually difficult to see. In addition, even if an unforeseen situation (for example, grapes) that is undesirable for the player occurs, there is a possibility that an effect that is normally difficult to see can be seen, so the player's stress and dissatisfaction can be reduced.

[Aspect 6-5]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
holding control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the winning/failing determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the starting hole, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is started immediately, a prior determination means capable of notifying the effect determination means of prior determination information indicating that, when the result of a winning determination based on a lottery value is a win, the change corresponding to the ball entering the ball will result in a win;
with
The effect determination means causes the effect display device to display a pending image corresponding to the pending lottery value,
The effect determining means is capable of executing a first pending change effect and a second pending change effect for a pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value, according to advance determination information regarding a certain pending lottery value,
In the first pending change effect, the pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value is displayed in a first stage mode different from the usual before the symbol variation based on the certain lottery value is started, and after the symbol variation is started, It is a production that changes the pending image to a second stage mode that is different from usual,
The second holding change performance is a performance that can be executed both before and after the start of pattern variation based on the certain lottery value, and corresponds to the certain lottery value in a manner that is completed in one time. It is a production that changes the pending image,
Even after the holding image corresponding to the certain lottery value is changed to the second stage mode by the first holding change effect, the second holding change effect can be executed for the holding image. A pinball game machine characterized by:
According to this pinball game machine, even after one holding change performance is performed, the player's expectation for another holding change performance can be continued, and the attraction of the performance can be further enhanced.

[Aspect 6-6]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
holding control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the winning/failing determination;
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
a special game control means for executing a special game in a state more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit is stopped and displayed;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
When a ball enters the starting hole, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is started immediately, a prior determination means capable of notifying the effect determination means of prior determination information indicating that, when the result of a winning determination based on a lottery value is a win, the change corresponding to the ball entering the ball will result in a win;
with
The effect determination means causes the effect display device to display a pending image corresponding to the pending lottery value,
The effect determining means is capable of executing a first pending change effect and a second pending change effect for a pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value, according to advance determination information regarding a certain pending lottery value,
In the first pending change effect, the pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value is displayed in a first stage mode different from the usual before the symbol variation based on the certain lottery value is started, and after the symbol variation is started, It is a production that changes the pending image to a second stage mode that is different from usual,
The second holding change performance is a performance that can be executed both before and after the start of pattern variation based on the certain lottery value, and corresponds to the certain lottery value in a manner that is completed in one time. It is a production that changes the pending image,
After the second pending change effect is executed for the pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value, the first pending change effect is not executed for the pending image, while the second pending effect for the pending image is executed. 2 pending change rendition is executable,
After the on-hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value is changed to the first-stage mode by the execution of the first on-hold change effect and before the on-hold image becomes the second-stage mode, the While the second pending change effect is not executed, after the pending image becomes the second stage mode by executing the first pending change effect for the pending image corresponding to the certain lottery value, the pending image is A pinball game machine characterized in that the second hold change effect can be executed.
According to this pinball game machine, even after one holding change performance is performed, the player's expectation for another holding change performance can be continued, and the attraction of the performance can be further enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of confusing the player due to discrepancies in the change transition of the pending image.

11 first starting port 12 second starting port 60 effect display device 20 big prize winning port 221 first success determination means 222 second success determination means 240 reservation control means 260 special game control means 265 small win Game control means, 270 Specific game control means, 303 Effect determination means, 304 Effect control means, 500 Pachinko game machine.

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
a second start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism capable of being displaced so as to change a state in which it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball to a state in which it is relatively easy to enter the game ball;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. and,
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value, up to a predetermined number, until the start of variable display of the symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination;
According to the result of the success/failure determination based on the first lottery value, the variation pattern of the first special symbol for indicating the result is determined, and the result is determined according to the result of the success/failure determination based on the second lottery value. Variation pattern determination means for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol for showing;
a symbol display device in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed according to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a mode indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, a special game for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. a control means;
a performance display device for displaying a performance;
an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
with
As game states related to the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port in the normal game, there are a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting port is higher than in the normal state,
The easy-to-enter state is defined by an end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and an end condition based on the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. terminates when one of the termination conditions is satisfied,
The variation pattern determining means refers to a special standard, which is a standard that defines a variation pattern for executing a special effect in the easy-to-enter state and is a standard for which the number of times of reference is limited, to determine the first Determining the variation pattern of the special design and the second special design,
The number of times of reference of the special reference is subtracted with the variation of the second special symbol, but not subtracted with the variation of the first special symbol,
The variation pattern determination means refers to a normal state special standard, which is a standard for limiting the number of times of reference, in a predetermined period in the normal state after the end of the easy-to-enter state, and refers to the first special symbol and the Determine the variation pattern of the second special design,
The normal state special reference subtracts the number of times of reference according to the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol,
In the variation of the first special symbol to which the normal state special reference is referred, the effect to be executed is determined from among the effect modes of the dedicated effect mode in the effect determining means , while the effect for the normal state is determined. In the variation of the second special symbol to which the special reference is referred, the effect to be executed is determined from the effect mode of the effect mode different from the dedicated effect mode in the effect determining means. ball game machine.

Images